www.classicmachinery.

net

SHOP MANUAL
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
MAGNUM SERIES

MODELS

7110-7120-7130-7140

IDENTIFICATION
Tractor model number and identification seriai number are
iocated on a piate on iower ieft side of instrument panei
cover. Engine seriai number is iocated on a piate on left
side of timing gear iiousing. Cab seriai number is iocated
on a piate just to the ieft of inching pedai. Transmission
seriai number is located on a piate on right front side of
speed transmission housing. On modeis so equipped,
front-wheei drive seriai number is iocated on a piate on
right rear side of front drive axie housing.

INDEX (By Starting Paragraph)

Models
7110 7120 7130 7140
AFTER COOLER 71

AIR CLEANER SYSTEM . . 72 72 72 72

AXLE, FRONT (TWO

WHEEL DRIVE)
Axle Main Memter 4 4 4 4
Front Support 5 5 5 5
Spindles 2 2 2 2
Tie Rod & Toe-In 3 3 3 3
Wheel Bearings 1 1 1 1

BRAKES
Adjustment 178 178 178 178
Bleed System 181 181 181 181
Brake Cylinders 179 179 179 179
Control Valve 180 180 180 180

CAB
Remove & Reinstall 228 228 228 228

COOLING SYSTEM
Belt Tensioner 75 75 75 75
Fan 74 74 74 74
Filter & Conditioner 78 78 78 78
Radiator 73 73 73 73
Thermostat 77 11 11 11
Water Pump 76 76 76 76
 www.classicmachinery.net

INDEX (CONT.)
Models
7110 7120 7130 7140
DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM
Bleed System 55 55 55 55
Ether Starting Aid 67 67 67 67
Fuel, Filters & Transfer
Pump 52,53,54 52,53,54 : 52,53,54 52,53,54
Fuel Solenoid Shut-Off . . . . 66 66 66 66
Injection Pump 56 56 56 56
Injector Nozzle 59 59 59 59
Timing 57 57 57 57

DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
R&R and Overhaul . 171 171 171 171

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
Control Valve 175 175 175 175

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Accessory Systems 95 95 95 95
Alternator 85 85 85 85
Batteries 79 79 79 79
Cab Fan 130 130 130 130
Charging System 81 81 81 81
Digital Instrument Cluster .. 96 96 96 96
Heater & Air Conditioning . 131 131 131 131
Protective Circuits 93 93 93 93
Starting Motor 88 88 88 88
Windshield Wiper 129 129 129 129

ENGINE
Cam Followers 30 30 30 30
Camshaft 37 37 37 37
Connecting Rods &
Bearings 42 42 42 42
Crankshaft & Bearings 43 43 43 43
Cylinder Head 25 25 25 25
Cylinder Sleeves 40 40 40 40
Flywheel 47 47 47 47
Main Bearings 43 43 43 43
Oil Pan 48 48 48 48
Oil Pump 49 49 49 49
Piston & Rod Removal 39 39 39 39
Piston Pins & Bushings 41 41 41 41
Pistons & Rings 40 40 40 40
Remove & Reinstall Engine
Assembly 24 24 24 24
Timing Gear Cover 31 31 31 31
Timing Gears 32 32 32 32
Valve Adjustment 27 27 27 27
Valve Guides & Springs . . . 28 28 28 28
Valves & Seats 26 26 26 26
 www.classicmachinery.net

INDEX (CONT.)
Models
7110 7120 7130 7140
FINAL DRIVES
Overhaul 177 177 177 177
Remove & Reinstall 176 176 176 176

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE

Differential 11 11 11 H
Front Drive Shaft 12 12 12 12
Front Support 7 7 7 7
Pivot Housing & Axle
shaft 10 10 10 10
R&R Drive Axle Assy 6 6 6 6
Tie Rod & Toe-In 8 8 8 8
Wheel Hub & Planetary . . . . 9 9 9 9

HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEM

Electronic Diagnostic
Codes 203 203 203 203
Control Circuit Tests 204 204 204 204
Control Valve 221 221 221 221
Hitch Adjustments 216 216 216 216
Hitch Lift Assist Cylinders . 223 223 223 223
LiftHousing 222 222 222 222
Operation 200 200 200 200

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Priority Valve 198 1% 1% 198
Pto Control Valve 199 199 199 199
Pump Compensator Valve .. 196 196 196 196
Pump Drive Unit 197 197 197 197
Pumps 193 193 193 193
Remote Control Valves . . . . 224 224 224 224

PARK LOCK
Linkage Adjustment 182 182 182 182
Overhaul Park Lock 183 183 183 183

POWER SHIFT
Adjustment 134 134 134 134
Control Valve 138 138 138 138
Power Shift Operation 133 133 133 133
Speed Transmission,
Overhaul 150 150 150 150
Range Transmission,
Overhaul 161 161 161 161

POWER STEERING SYSTEM

Huid, Filters & Bleeding . . . 13 13 13 13
Hand Pump 20 20 20 20
Operational Tests 16 16 16 16
Steering Cylinder 22,23 22,23 22,23 22,23
System Pressure 15 15 15 15
Trouble-Shooting 14 14 14 14
 www.classicmachinery.net

INDEX (CONT.)
Models
7110 7120 7130 7140
POWER TAKE-OFF
Clutch Overhaul 188,191 188,191 188,191 188,191
Control Valve 186 186 186 186
Linkage Adjustment 184 184 184 184
Overhaul Dual Shaft 190 190 190 190
Overhaul Single Shdft 189 189 189 189
Pressure Adjustment 185 185 185 185
Rear Unit, R&R 187 187 187 187
Reduction Gears 192 192 192 192

TURBOCHARGER
Operation 68 68 68 68
Overhaul 70 70 70 70
Remove & Reinstall 69 69 69 69

DUAL DIMENSIONS
This service manual provides specifications in both the U.S. Customary and Metric (SI) system of measurements. The first
specification is given in the measuring system used during manufacture, while the second specification (given in parenthesis) is
the converted measurement. For instance, a specification of "0.011 inch (0.279 mm)" would indicate that the equipment was
manufactured using the U.S. system of measurement and the metric equivalent of 0.011 inch is 0.279 mm.

CONDENSED SERVICE DATA

Models
7110 7120 7130 7140
GENERAL
Engine Make _ ^ Case-International ^
Engine Model 6T-830 6TA-830
Cylinders, No. of 6
Bore 4.488 in.
(114mm)
Stroke 5.315 in.
(135 mm)
Displacement 505 cu. in.
(8.3 L)
Compression Ratio 17.3:1 16.5:1
Main Bearings, No. of 7
Cylinder Sleeves Wet
Forward Speeds 18 or 24 ^___

TUNE-UP
Firing Order __^^__ 1-5-3-6-2-4.
Valve Tappet Gap, C o l d -
Intake 0.012 i n . _
(0.305 mm)
Exhaust 0.024 in.__
(0.609 mm)
 www.classicmachinery.net

CONDENSED SERVICE DATA (CONT.)

Models
7110 7120 7130 7140
TUNE-UP (CONT.)
Injection Pump—
Make Robert Bosch
Model PS6A PS6MW
Timing TDC
Injection Nozzles—
Make Robert Bosch 17 mm
Opening Pressure,
New 2968-3084 psi
(20464-21263 kPa)
Used 2722-3084 psi
(18768-21263 kPa)
Turbocharger—
Make Holset
Engine Governed Speeds (Rpm)—
Low Idle 825-875
High Idle 2315-2395
Rated Load 2200
Battery Terminal Grounded Negative

CAPACITIES
Cooling System 30 U.S. qts. 31 U.S. qts.
(28.6 L) (29.3 L)
Crankcase (w/filters) 22 U.S. qts.
(21 L)
Transmission & Hydraulic
System 202 U.S. qts.
(191 L)
Oil Type Hy-Tran Plus
Fuel Tank 78 U.S. gal.* 78 U.S. gal.* 95 U.S. gal. 95 U.S. gal.
(295 L)* (295 L)* (359 L) (359 L)
Front Drive Axle—
Differential (Axle) Housing Refer to paragraph 11.
Oil Type Case IH 135 HEP or SAE 85W-140.
Planetary (Each Side) 1 U.S. qt.
(0.9 L)
Oil Type Case IH 135 HEP or SAE 85W-140.

*95 U.S. gallons (359 liters) with auxiliary tank.

 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 1-4

FRONT AXLE (TWO-WHEEL DRIVE)

FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS TIE RODS AND TOE-IN

All Models All Modeis

1. Refer to Fig. 1 for typical wheel hub and bearing
assembly. The tapered inner and outer roller bearings
are not interchangeable. Clean and inspect bearing
cups and cones and renew as necessary.
Install dust shield (2) outer flange toward hub and
with open section on the bottom. Install oil seal (3) on
the spindle (1) so that metal face of seal is toward the
hub. Press bearing cups (6) into hub until seated.
Pack bearing cones (5 and 8) with No. 2 lithium
grease and install bearing cone (5) in hub. Install hub
wear ring (4) into hub until outer flange contacts hub.
Coat lips of seal (3) with grease and install hub onto
spindle. Install outer bearing cone (8), washer (9) and
nut (10). Tighten nut to a torque of 15fl;.-lbs.(20 N.m)
while rotating hub. Back off nut to flrst slot where
cotter pin can be installed. Install cotter pin and cap
(12). Lubricate the assembly through lube fitting (13).
Install wheel and tire assembly and tighten lug bolts
to a torque of 140-160 ft.-lbs. (190-220 N.m).
SPINDLES
3. Removal and disassembly ofthe tie rods is obvi-
ous after examination ofthe xmit and reference to Fig.
2. Tighten tie rod end slotted nuts to a torque of 100
ft.-lbs. (136 N.m) and install new cotter pins. Tighten
clamp bolts to a torque of 40-50 ft.-lbs (55-70 N.m).
Front wheel toe-in must be 0.187-0.312 inch (4.7-
7.9 mm). Ib adjust toe-in, remove clamp bolts from tie
rod extension. Loosen jam nut, then rotate extension
in or out to obtain correct toe-in. Install clamp bolts
and tighten jam nut. Recheck toe-in and readjust if
necessary. Both tie rods should be approximately the
same length.
AXLE MAIN MEMBER
All Models
4. Tb remove the axle main member (6—Fig. 3), first
raise and support tractor under engine side rails with

All Models

2. R&R SPINDLES. Ib remove either spindle, lift

and support front of tractor and remove wheel. Dis-
connect tie rod ball joint (9—Fig. 2) from steering arm
(5). Remove cap screw (3) and washer (4). If not
marked, install alignment punch marks on steering
arm and spindle. Remove steering arm (5) and lower
spindle assembly (11) from axle extension (7). Remove
thrust bearing (10) from spindle. Inspect spindle
bushings (6 and 8) in axle extension and renew as
necessary.
If removed, install bushings (6 and 8) into axle
extension with open end of oil grooves in bushings
toward inside. Install bushings imtil recessed 0.157
inch (4 mm) below flush with top and bottom. New
bushings are presized and should not require ream-
ing if carefully installed.
Install thrust bearing (10) on spindle (11), then
install spindle into axle extension. Align punch marks
and install steering arm (5) on spindle. Apply Loctite
262 on threads of cap screw (3), then install cap screw Fig. 1—Exploded view of front wheel hub and bearing
and washer (4). Connect tie rod end to steering arm assembly used on all two-wheel drive tractors.
1. Spindle
and tighten nut (1) to a torque of 100 ft.-lbs. (136 2. Dust shield 8. Bearing cone (outer)
N.m). Secure with cotter pin (2). Install wheel and tire 3. Oil seal . 9. Washer
assembly and tighten lug bolts to a torque of 140-160 4. Hub wear ring 10. Nut
5. Bearing cone (inner) 11. Cotter pin
ft.-lbs. (190-220 N.m). Lubricate with Case/IH 251EP 6. Bearing cups 12. Cap
or equivalent No. 2 multipurpose lithium grease. 7. Hub 13. Lube fitting

Paragraph 4 (Cont.)
suitable split stands (CAS-10749 or equivalent). If so
equipped, remove front weights and weight bracket.
Disconnect and remove tie rods, then disconnect
steering cylinder from lug on axle main member and
center steering arm. Tie cylinder assembly up out of
the way, being careful not to damage steering cylinder
hoses. Remove bolts (10) and using a hoist, remove
axle extension (12), spindle and wheel from both
sides.
Place a floor jack under axle main member (6).
Remove cap screw (1), flat washer (2) and spacer (3).
Remove front grease fitting and install a slide ham-
mer to pivot shaft (4). Support weight of axle with
floor jack and withdraw pivot shaft from front support
(5). Catch thrust washers (7 and 8) as shaft is with-
drawn. Lower axle main member to clear fi:'ont sup-
port and roll forward from tractor.
Drive out roll pin (14) from pivot pin (20). Withdraw
pivot pin, then carefully remove center steering arm
(19) with shim washers (15 and 16) and "O" rings (17).
Inspect bushings (18) and renew as required. Press
new bushings in from top and bottom of steering arm
until they are recessed 0.196 inch (5 mm) below flush.
Lubricate new "O" rings (17) with petroleum jelly arid
install in recesses above and below bushings. Install
Fig, 2—Exploded view showing axie extension, spindie and bushings used on aii two-wheei drive tractors.
1. Nut 4. Washer
2. Cotter pin 5. Steering arm
3. Cap screw 6. Bushing (upper)
8
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
two 0.156 inch (3.96 mm) thick shim washers below
steering arm and one 0.156 inch (3.96 mm) and one
0.042 inch (1.067 mm) shim washer above steering
arm. Reinstall center steering arm assembly and
pivot pin. Measure clearance between upper washer
(15) and axle main member. If clearance is more than
0.042 inch (1.067 mm), add shim washers (16) as
required to obtain clearance of less than 0.042 inch
(1.067 nmi). Secure pivot pin (20) with new roll pin
(14).
Axle pivot bushings (9) can now be removed using
a suitable drift punch. Drive new bushings into bore
of axle main member until Vie inch (1.6 mm) below
outer surface. When reassembling, coat pivot shaft (4)
and bushings vdth anti-seize compound. Install one
steel washer (7), one nylon washer (8) and second
steel washer (7) at front and rear of axle main mem-
ber. Install pivot shaft, then check axle main member
end clearance. If end clearance exceeds 0.059 inch
(1.5 mm), add steel washer (7) at rear side of axle.
Install spacer (3), flat washer (2) and cap screw (1).
Tighten cap screw to a torque of 65-75 ft.-lbs. (90-100
N.m).
7. Axle extension 10. Thrust bearing
8. Bushing (lower) 11. Spindle
9. Tie rod end 12. Hub assy.
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 5-6

The balance of reassembly is the reverse of disas- lever in PARK position and block rear wheels se-
sembly procedure. Tighten axle extension bolts (10) curely. If so equipped, remove front weights and
to a torque of 375-425 ft.-lbs. (510-575 N.m). weight bracket. Loosen front wheel lug nuts. Raise
hood and remove side panels. Install front split
FRONT SUPPORT stands, CAS-10749 or equivalent, to side rails. Raise
front of tractor and remove fi-ont wheels. Install axle
All Models carrier CAS-10500-4 to support drive axle. Unbolt
front of drive shaft shield (10) and slide shield rear-
ward. Unbolt front drive shaft "U" joint (9) and lower
5. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the
front end of drive shaft. Disconnect steering cylinder
fi-ont support (5—Fig. 3), first remove hood, grille and
hoses and plug or cap all openings to prevent entrance
side panels. Disconnect air intake hose. Drain radia-
of dirt into system. Remove cap screw (1) and washer
tor and disconnect front wiring harness connector.
(2), then remove pivot shaft (3). Catch washers (5 and
Disconnect upper and lower radiator hoses, coolant
6) as shaft is withdrawn. Lower axle carrier and
filter hose and coolant recovery hose. Disconnect
remove axle assembly forward from tractor.
ether starting line from intake manifold. Remove
hoses from clip on radiator, then remove air condition-
ing condenser and lay back on top of engine. Identify
and disconnect oil cooler lines and remove oil cooler.
Attach a hoist with lift straps to radiator support.
Unbolt radiator support from front support and tilt
radiator forward to clear fan as the assembly is re-
moved.
If so equipped, remove front weights and weight
bracket. Remove front axle assembly as in paragraph
4, but do not separate axle extensions from axle main
member. Attach a hoist to front support, unbolt from
side rails and slide support forward from tractor.
Reinstall by reversing the removal procedure.
Tighten side rail to front support bolts to a torque of
162-184 ft.-lbs. (220-250 N.m). Tighten the five cap
screws securing radiator support to firont support to
a torque of 34-38 ft.-lbs. (46-52 N.m).

FRONT DRIVE AXLE

All models are available with a Spicer front drive
axle. Front drive axle can be engaged or disengaged
with tractor on the go. Front drive axle is spring
clutch engaged £ind hydraulically disengaged. The
solenoid control valve is located on left side of rear
frame housing and is identical to the rear differential
lock valve. Refer to paragraph 175 for service infor-
mation. Unit is equipped with a limited slip differen-
tial.

NOTE: The front drive axle clutch is located in

the RANGE transmission iiousing and the ciutch Fig. 3—Expioded view of axie main member, front sup-
output shaft is iocated in the SPEED transmission port and reiated parts used on aii two-wheei drive trac-
housing. Refer to these sections for R&R AND tors,
OVERHAUL procedures. 1. Cap screw 12. Axle extension
2. Flat washer 13. Square nut
3. Spacer 14. Roll pin
DRIVE AXLE ASSEMBLY 4. Pivot shaft 15. Washer, 0.156 in.
5. Front support (3.96 mm)
6. Axle main member 16. Washer, 0.042 in.
Models So Equipped 7. Washer (steel) (1.067 mm)
8. Thrust washer (nylon) 17. "O" Ring
9. Pivot bushings 18. Bushing
6. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove fi-ont 10. Bolt 19. Center steering arm
drive axle assembly (8—Fig. 4), place shift control 11. Washer 20. Pivot pin

Paragraphs 7-9
Inspect bushings (7) and renew as necessary. When
installing new bushings, apply a coat of Loctite anti-
seize to bore in axle housing. Freeze bushings in dry
ice and carefully install flush to Vie inch (1.6 mm)
below the face of axle housing.
Inspect thrust washers (5 and 6) for excessive wear
and renew as necessary. Reinstall axle assembly to
front support. Make sure that nylon thrust washer (6)
is installed between steel thrust washers (5) at both
front and rear sides of axle. Use as many additional
steel washers as possible at rear side of axle housing
to shim axle housing forward. Secure pivot shaft (3)
in place with washer (2) and cap screw (1), tightened
to a torque of 93-112 ft.-lbs. (126-152 N.m). Connect
steering cylinder lines and reinstall front drive shaft.
Tighten drive shaft coupling bolts to a torque of 45-54
ft.-lbs. (61-73 N.m). Install fi-ont drive shaft shield.
Remove axle carrier. Install front wheels and remove
split standsfif-omside rails. Tighten front wheel lug
nuts to a torque of 300-370 ft.-lbs. (407-502 N.m). If
so equipped, install front weight bracket and tighten
cap screws to a torque of 450-540 ft.-lbs. (610-730
N.m), then install front weights.
Fig. 4^-View of front drive axie and front support re-
moved from tractor.
1. Cap screw 6. Thrust washer (nylon)
2. Flat washer 7. Bushings
3. Pivot shaft 8. Drive axle assy.
4. Front support 9. Front drive shaft
5. Washer (steel) 10. Drive shaft shield
10
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
FRONT SUPPORT
Models So Equipped
7. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove fi^ont
support (4—Fig. 4), first remove hood, grille and side
panels. Disconnect air intake hose. Drain radiator
and disconnect front wiring harness connector. Dis-
connect upper and lower radiator hoses, coolant air
bleed hose and coolant recovery hose. Disconnect
ether starting line from intake manifold. Remove
hoses from clip on radiator, then remove air condition-
ing condenser and lay back on top of engine. Identify
and disconnect oil cooler lines and remove oil cooler.
Attach a hoist with lift straps to radiator support.
Unbolt radiator support from front support and tilt
radiator forward to clear fan as the assembly is re-
moved.
If so equipped, remove front weights and weight
bracket. Remove front drive axle assembly as out-
lined in paragraph 6. Attach a hoist to front support,
unbolt from side rails and slide front support forward
from tractor.
Reinstall by reversing removal procedure. Tighten
side rail to front support bolts to a torque of 162-184
ft.-lbs. (220-250 N.m). Tighten the five cap screws
securing radiator support to front support to a torque
of 34-38 ft.-lbs. (46-52 N.m).
TIE ROD AND TOE-iN
Models So Equipped
8. Due to the closeness between tie rod and firont
support, removal of tie rod and toe-in adjustment can
be accomplished only after removal of front drive axle
assembly as outlined in paragraph 6. Disassembly of
tie rod is obvious after removal and reference to Fig.
5. Tbe-in should be adjusted to 0-0.5 inch (0-12.7 mm).
One full turn of a tie rod end (2 or 6) will change toe-in
% inch (9.5 mm). Make sure bow of tie rod tube (4) is
down.
Tighten slotted nuts (1) to a torque of 140 ft.-lbs.
(190 N.m). Tighten jam nuts (3 and 5) to a torque of
250-300 ft.-lbs. (340-405 N.m).
WHEEL HUB AND PLANETARY
Modeis So Equipped
9. R&R AND OVERHAUL, Tb remove the wheel
hub and planetary, support axle housing and remove
front wheel and tire assembly. Rotate wheel hub until
drain plug (13—Fig. 6) is at bottom.
NOTE: Front drive shaft must be disconnected
before wheei hub can be rotated.

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
Remove drain plug and allow oil to drain. Remove
the two socket head cap screws (14), then remove
planetary carrier (12). Withdraw sun gear (11). Re-
move the three cap screws (10), retaining plate (9) and
shim (8), then lift off ring gear (21). Remove wheel
hub (4). Remove bearing cone (6)fii^omring gear (21).
Remove oil seal (1), inner bearing cone (2), "O" ring
(7) and, if necessary, bearing cups (3 and 5) from
wheel hub (4).
Remove retaining rings (20), spacers (16) and
planetary gears (18) with needle rollers (17) and
spacers (19). Clean and inspect all parts and renew
as necessary. Needle rollers (17) are available in a set
of 376 and planetary gears (18) are available in a set
of four.
Install first spacer plate (16) over pin in planetary
carrier (12). Use petroleum jelly to hold needle rollers
in place and install two rows of needle rollers in gear
(18) with spacer (19) between the two rows. Install
planetary gear and needle roller assembly over pin in
planetary carrier. When all four plsmetary gears and
needle rollers are installed, install second spacer
plate (16) and secure with retaining rings (20).
If removed, install bearing cups (3 and 5) in hub.
Heat bearing cone (6) in a bearing oven to a tempera-
ture of 250° F (120° C) and install on ring gear (21)
until seated.
WARNING: Always wear heat protective gioves
when handiing heated parts.
Install bearing cone (2), but do not install oil seal
(1) at this time. Install Hub (2) on pivot housing and
install ring gear (21) and retaining plate (9) without
shims (8). Tighten cap screws (10) evenly to a torque
Fig. S—Front drive axle, tie rod and steering cylinders
removed from tractor.
1. Slotted nut 5. Jam nut
2. Tie rod end (LH thread) 6. Tie rod end (RH thread)
3. Jam nut 7. Steering cylinders
4. Tie rod tube 8. Drive axle ass^.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraph 9 (Cont.)
of 20 ft.-lbs. (27 N.m). Use a torque wrench and
special tool CAS-1768 as shown in Fig. 7, to check
rolling torque of hub. Tighten or loosen cap screws
(10—Fig. 6) until rolling torque is 50-90 in.-lbs. (6-10
N.m). Then, using a depth micrometer through hole
in retaining plate (9), measure distance from outer
face of plate to end of pivot housing. See Fig. 8. Record
this measurement. Remove retaining plate and meas-
ure thickness of the plate. Subtract this measure-
ment from the first measurement. The difference will
be the correct thickness of shim pack (8—Fig. 6) to be
installed. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.001,
0.002, 0.005, 0.010, 0.020 and 0.030 inch (0.0254,
0.0508, 0.127, 0.254, 0.508 and 0.762 mm). Remove
sun gear (11), ring gear (21) and hub (4). Install new
oil seal (1) in hub with lip facing away from bearing
(2). Reinstall hub, ring gear, correct shim pack and
retaining plate. Install cap screws (10) and tighten to
a torque of 65-75 ft.-lbs. (88-102 N.m). Install sun
gear (11) and new "O" ring (7). Align holes for socket
head screws (14) and install planetary carrier (12).
Install socket head screws (14) and tighten secure^.
Rotate hub until oil level arrow points downward.
Remove plug (13) and fill planetary unit to level plug
Fig. &--Expioded view of wheei hub and pianetary unit
used on front drive axie.
1. Oil seal
2. Bearing cone (inner) 12. Planetary carrier
3. Bearing cup 13. Plug
4. Hub 14. Socket head screw (2)
5. Bearing cup 15. Plug
6. Bearing cone (outer) 16. Spacer
7. "O"Ring 17. Needle rollers
8. Shim 18. Planetary gear
9. Retaining plate 19. Spacer
10. Cap screw (3) 20. Retaining ring
11. Sun gear 21. Ring gear
11
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 10 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

opening with Case IH 135H EP or equivalent SAE
85W-140 gear oil. Capacity is approximately 1.0 quart
(0.9 L). Gear oil in planetary units should be changed
every 1000 hours of operation or once each year,
whichever occurs first.
Reinstall wheel and tire and remove jack stands.
Reconnect front drive shaft. Repeat procedures for
opposite planetary as required.
PIVOT HOUSING AND AXLE SHAFT
Modeis So Equipped
10. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove pivot
housing (24—Fig. 9), first remove drain plugs from
axle housing and planetary carrier and drain gear oil.
Remove wheel hub and planetary as outlined in para-
graph 9. Disconnect hoses from steering cylinder and
plug all openings. Remove cap screws (21 and 26—
Fig. 9) and support pivot housing with a hoist. Re-
move king pins (22 and 25) and shims (23). Remove
cotter pins and slotted nuts that secure steering cyl-
inder and tie rod to arm on pivot housing. Move pivot
housing rearward to provide clearance to remove
stoedng cylinder and tie rod ends from pivot housing.
Remove pivot housing (24). Remove upper and lower
seal rings (2), bearing cones (3), bearing cups (4) and
cup plugs (5) from axle housing (1). Remove the three
cap screws (9) with flat washers, then withdraw axle
assembly (6 through 18). Remove snap rings (12) and
disassemble the double "U" joints. Remove outer oil
seal (18), inner oil seal (15) and snap ring (16) from
outer yoke (17). Press axle shaft (11) from collar (6),
bearing (7), retainer (8) and oil seal (10). Remove oil
seal and bearing from retainer. Remove oil seal (19)
and bushing (20) from pivot housing (24).
Clean and inspect all parts and renew as necessary.
Apply Loctite 515 to bearing seat in retainer (8) and
press bearing in until seated. Install new oil seal (10)
in retainer so that lip of seal is toward bearing.
Lubricate oil seal with grease and install retainer
assembly on axle shaft until seal is against yoke. Heat
collar (6) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250°

Fig. 7—Use torque wrench and speciai tooi CAS-1768

to measure hub roiiing torque.

Fig. 9—Expioded view of pivot housing and axie as-

sembiy used on front drive axie.
1. Axle housing 14. Center yoke
2. Seal ring 15. Oil seal (inner)
3. Bearing cone , 16. Snap ring
4. Bearing cup 17. Outer yoke
5. Cup plug 18. Oil seal(outer)
6. Collar . 19. Oil seal
7. Bearing 20. Bushing
8. Bearing retainer 21. Cap screw
9. Cap screw (3) 22. King pin (upper)
10. Oil seal 23. Shims
Fig. 8—Use a depth micrometer through hole in retain- 11. Axle shaft 24. Pivot housing
ing piate to determine correct shim thicicness to be 12. Snap ring 25. King pin (lower)
used. 13. Bearing and cross as^. 26. Cap screw

12

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
F (120° C) and install collar onto axle shaft until
firmly against bearing (7).
WARNING: Aiways wear heat protective gloves
when handiing heated parts.
Install bushing (20) and oil seal (19) in pivot hous-
ing so that lip of seal is toward bushing. Install
retaining ring (16), inner oil seal (15) and outer oil
seal (18) in outer yoke (17) as shown in Fig. 10.
Reassemble double *TJ" joints and yokes, then install
axle assembly (6 through 18—Fig. 9). Apply Loctite
515 to threads of cap screws (9), install cap screws
and fiat washers and tighten to a torque of 35-45
ft.-lbs. (47-61 N.m). Apply Loctite 515 to lips of cup
plugs (5), then install cup plugs and bearing cups (4)
in axle housing. Lubricate bearing cones (3) with Case
IH 25 IH EP or equivalent No. 2 multipurpose lithium
grease and install bearing cones. Do not install seal
rings (2) at this time. Install pivot housing (24) over
axle housing (1). Do not install tie rod or steering
cylinder. Install lower king pin (25) with 0.015 inch
(0.381 mm) thick shim pack (23). Tighten cap screws
(26) with washers, alternately and evenly to a torque
of 80-90 ft.-lbs. (108-122 N.m). Install upper king pin
(22) with 0.015 inch (0.381 mm) thick shim pack (23).
Tighten cap screws (21) with washers, alternately
and evenly to a torque of 80-90 ft.-lbs. (108-122 N.m).
Using a torque wrench on one of the upper king pin
cap screws (21), check the amount of torque required
to move the pivot housing. The torque must be be-
tween 16 and 25 ft.-lbs. (22 and 34 N.m). If necessary,
add shims to decrease torque or remove shims to
increase torque. Shims are available in thicknesses
of 0.005 and 0.010 inch (0.127-0.254 mm). Upper and
lower king pins must be shimmed evenly.
Unbolt and remove upper and lower king pins and
shim packs. Move pivot housing as required to install
new seal rings (2) and to connect steering cylinder
and tie rod ends. Apply Loctite anti-seize to king pins,
then reinstall king pins with correct shim packs.
Tighten cap screws (21 and 26) to a torque of 80-90
ft.-lbs. (108-122 N.m). Tighten slotted nuts on steer-
ing cylinder and tie rod ends to a torque of 140 ft.-lbs.
(190 N.m) and secure with new cotter pins.
Refer to paragraph 9 for balance of reassembly. Fill
axle housing to level plug opening with recommended
gear oil. Refer to paragraph 11 for capacity.
DIFFERENTIAL AND BEVEL GEARS
Modeis So Equipped
11. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the front
differential assembly, place transmission lever in
PARK position and securely block rear wheels. Re-
move front drive axle assembly as outlined in para-
graph 6, then remove both planetary and hub
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragrapii 11
assemblies as in paragraph 9 and pivot housings and
axles as in paragraph 10. Support the differential
carrier assembly with a hoist, unbolt carrier from axle
housing and remove the assembly. Place unit on a
clean bench.
Tb disassemble the differential assembly, refer to
Fig. 11 and remove cap screws (22), washers and locks
(23). Remove cap screws (19), washers (20) and bear-
ing caps (21) with adjusting rings (24). Separate bevel
ring gear and differential case from carrier. Remove
bearing cups (1 and 14). Place match marks across
differential case halves (4 and 10). Remove cap screws
(12) and adapters (11) and lift off case half (10).
Remove cap screws (12) and adapters (11) and lift off
case half (10). Remove dished plate (6), dished disc
(7), fiat plates (8) and fiat disc (9). Remove pressure
ring (36) and side gear (37), then lift out cross pins
(39) and differential pinions (38). Remove side gear
(37), pressure ring (36), fiat plates (8), fiat disc (9),
dished disc (7) and dished plate (6) from left case half
(4). Remove cap screws (3) and separate bevel ring
gear (5) from case half (4). Using a suitable puller,
remove bearing cones (2 and 13).
Clean and inspect all parts and renew as necessary.
Bevel ring gear (5) and bevel pinion shaft (15) are
available only as a matched set. When reassembling,
heat bearing cones (2 and 13) in a bearing oven to a
temperature of 250° F (120° C) and install on case
halves (4 and 10).
WARNING: Aiways wear heat protective gioves
when handiing heated parts.
Assemble bevel ring gear (5) to case half (4), then
install and tighten retaining cap screws (3) to a torque
of 100-120 ft.-lbs. (135-162 N.m). Apply a coat of
friction modifier (Case IH part number 990063R2) to
all disc and plate friction surfaces. Place case half (4)
assembly on a bench with bevel ring gear facing up.
Install dished plate (6) with concave side down. In-
stall dished disc (7) with concave side down. Install
one flat plate (8), one flat disc (9) and second flat Plate
OUTER
SEAL
Fig^ 10--View showing correct instaiiation of retaining
ring, and inner and outer oil seals in outer yoke (17—
Fig. 9).
13
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 11 (Cont.) CASE/iNTERNATiONAL

(8). Install pressure ring (36) and side gear (37). bearing cone (29). Remove shims (27) and spacer (26)
Assemble differential cross pins (39) and differential from pinion shaft, then press bearing cone (16) from
pinions (38), then install the cross pin and pinion pinion shaft. Using a suitable puller, remove bearing
assembly. Install second side gear (37) and pressure cup (28), bearing cup (17) and shims (18).
ring (36). Install one fiat plate (8), one flat disc (9) and Clean and inspect all parts and renew as necessary.
second fiat plate (8). Install dished disc (7) with Bevel drive pinion (15) and bevel ring gear (5) are
concave side up and dished plate (6) with concave side available only as a matched set. On end of pinion
up. Align match marks and install case half (10). shaft, there is etched a zero (0), plus (+) or minus (-)
Install adapters (11) and cap screws (12). Tighten cap nimiber in inches. This indicates the best running
screws to a torque of 65-70 ft.-lbs. (88-95 N.m). position for each gear set. The dimension is set by
Tb remove bevel pinion shaft (15), remove nut (35) shims (18) behind inner bearing cup (17). Tb set the
and washer (34). Place differential carrier (25) in a pinion depth, install bearing cup (17) without shims
press and push bevel pinion shaft (15) from yoke (33), (18). Install outer bearing cup (28) and install inner
oil seal (31), washer (30) and bearing cone (29) and and outer bearing cones (16 and 29). Insert special
remove from carrier. Remove dust shield (32) from tools (handle CAS-1898-1 and threaded shaft CAS
yoke (33). Remove oil seal (31), washer (30) and 1898-2) through the bearing cones from the front.
Install gage disc (CAS-1898-3) against inner bearing
cone and install gage block CAS-898-4. Finger tighten
to hold the gage assembly and bearing cones in posi-
tion. Place tube CAS-1898-6 in differential carrier
bearing grooves as shown in Fig. 12. Install bearing
caps (21—Fig. 11) and secure with cap screws and
washers (19 and 20), tightened to a torque of 180-200
ft.-lbs. (240-270 N.m). Using a feeler gage, measure
distance between gage block CAS-1898-4 and tube
CAS-1898-6. This measurement is the correct thick-
ness of shim pack (18) to be installed if pinion is
marked zero (0). If pinion has a plus (+) marking,
subtract the amount shown fi:'om measurement. If
pinion has a minus (-) marking, add the amount
shown to measurement. This will give the correct
shim thickness to be installed. Shims are available in
thicknesses of 0.003, 0.005 and 0.010 inch (0.076,
15
0.127 and 0.254 mm). Accepted tolerance is 0.0-0.004
inch (0.0-0.1016 mm). Remove special tools, bearing
cones (16 and 29) and bearing cup (17). Install calcu-
latod shim pack (18) and bearing cup (17). Press
24 bearing cone (16) on pinion shaft (15). Install spacer
(26) on pinion shaft and install assembly in carrier
(25). Install a shim pack (27) 0.060 inch (1.5 mm)
thick onto pinion shaft and install bearing cone (29).
Fig. 11—Expioded view of front drive axie limited siip
differentiai assembiy.
1. Bearing cup
2. Bearing cone 21. Bearing cap
3. Cap screw 22. Cap screw
4. Differential case (L.H.) 23. Lock
5. Bevel ring gear 24. Adjusting ring
6. Dished plate 25. Differential carrier
7. Dished disc 26. Spacer
8. Flat plate 27. Shims
9. Flat disc 28. Bearing cup
10. Differential case (R.H.) 29. Bearing cone
11. Adapter 30. Washer
12. Cap screw 31. Oil seal
13. Bearing cone 32. Dust shield
14. Bearing cup 33. Yoke
15. Bevel pinion shaft 34. Washer
16. Bearing cone 35. Nut
17. Bearing cup 36. Pressure ring
18. Shims 37. Side gear Fig. 12—View showing speciai tooi CAS-1898-6 in-
19. Cap screw 38. Differential pinions staiied in carrier bearing grooves when checking for
20. Washer 39. Differential cross pins pinion position shim adjustment.

14
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 12-13

Install yoke (33) without shield (32), oil seal (31) or drained. Slide rear yoke off the shaft, then unbolt and
washer (30). Install washer (34) and nut (35) and remove drive shaft shield rear support (4).
tighten nut to a torque of 250-260 ft.-lbs. (340-353 When reassembling, reverse the disassembly pro-
N.m). Using a torque wrench on pinion nut, check the cedure. Tighten cap screws securing rear support (4)
torque required to rotate pinion shaft. The torque to a torque of 69-78 ft.-lbs. (94-106 N.m). Tighten
should be 10-50 in.-lbs. (1.9-4.8 N.m). Tb increase cross and bearing cap screws to a torque of 33-37
torque, remove shims (27). Tb decrease torque, add ft.-lbs. (45-50 N.m).
shims. Remove yoke and, using Loctite 515 on new oil
seal (31), install washer (30) and oil seal (31). Install
new dust shield (32) on yoke. Apply Loctite 515 to the POWER STEERING
washer seal area between yoke and pinion shaft and
install washer aind pinion nut. Tbrque pinion nut to
SYSTEM
250-260 ft.-lbs. (340-353 N.m). All models are equipped with hydrostatic
Install bearing cups (1 and 14) over bearing cones power steering using a Ross steering unit. The
(2 and 13) and install differential assembly in carrier piston pump furnishes pressurized oil to the
(25). Install bearing caps (21), washers (20) and cap priority valve where a portion of the oil is di-
screws (19). Tighten cap screws finger tight. Install verted to the steering unit at a pressure of
adjusting rings (24). Using special tool CAS 1898-9, 2350-2450 psi (16,203-16,892 kPa). One double-
tighten adjusting rings to a torque of 85-95 ft.-lbs. acting steering cylinder is used on the stand-
(115-129 N.m) while maintaining some backlash. Use ard axle and two double-acting cylinders are
a dial indicator and measure backlash between bevel used on the front drive axle.
ring gear and bevel drive pinion. Backlash should be
approximately 0.005 inch (0.127 mm). Loosen one
adjusting ring and tighten the opposite ring to correct FLUID, FiLTERS AND BLEEDiNG
the backlash. Rotate adjusting rings exactly the same
amount. Install adjusting ring locks (23) and secure Aii Modeis
with washers and cap screws, tightened to a torque
of 15-17 ft.-lbs. (20-23 N.m). Tighten cap screws (19) 13. The transmission and hydraulic system fluid is
to a torque of 180-200 ft.-lbs. (240-270 N.m). used in the power steering system. A dip stick located
At this time, pinion shaft rolling torque should be at the left rear of the tractor rear housing indicates
60-80 in.-lbs. (6.8-9.0 N.m). If not, recheck assembly fiuid level. Use Hy-Tran Plus fiuid in all models. Refer
procedures.
Apply Loctite gasket eliminator to mounting sur-
faces of carrier and axle housing and reinstall differ-
ential carrier assembly. Install washers and
mounting cap screws. Tighten cap screws to a torque
of 110-120 ft.-lbs. (149-163 N.m).
The balance of reassembly is the reverse of disas-
sembly procedure. Fill axle housing to level plug
opening with correct gear oil. Capacity is 12.0 quarts
(11.0 L). Use 11.5 quarts (10.8 L) of Case IH 135HEP
or equivalent SAE 85W-140 gear oil plus 1.0 pint (0.47
L) of limited slip additive. Gear lubricant should be
changed every 1000 hours of operation or once each
year, whichever occurs first.

FRONT DRiVE SHAFT

Modeis So Equipped
12. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the front
drive shaft, refer to Fig. 13, then unbolt sleeves (1 and
3) and slide over shield (2). Unbolt cross and bearing
assemblies (6) from front and rear yokes. Lower drive
shaft and shield from tractor. Unbolt cross and bear- Fig. 13—Expioded view of front drive shaft and shield.
ing assemblies (6) from drive shaft (7). Cross and 1. Sleeve (rear)
2. Shield 5. Rear yoke
bearing units are available only as assemblies. If rear 3. Sleeve (front) 6. Cross and bearing as^.
yoke (5) is to be removed, speed transmission must be 4. Shield support (rear) 7. Drive shaft

15

Paragraphs 14-15
to CONDENSED SERVICE DATA for reservoir ca-
pacity and to HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SECTION for
additional hydraulic system information. A suction
screen-type filter is located in right side of range
transmission housing and an externally mounted
pressure screw-on-type filter is located on right side
of transmission. See Fig. 14. Tb clean filter screen
(13), first drain transmission housing, then remove
plug and drain filter base (12). Unbolt and remove
cover (17) with "O" ring (16), screen locator (15) with
"O" ring (14) and withdraw screen (13). Clean screen
in suitable solvent and blow dry with compressed air.
When reinstalling, install screen with gasket end
outward. Lubricate new "O" rings (14 and 16) with
petroleum jelly and install with screen locator (15)
and cover (17). Install and tighten cover cap screws.
Install drain plugs and refill transmission to dip stick
"FULL" level.
The manufacturer recommends that transmission
and hydraulic fluid be drained and new Hy-Tran Plus
fluid be installed each 1000 hours of operation. Suc-
tion filter screen should be removed, cleaned and
reinstalled each 1000 hours of operation. Filter ele-
ment (5) should be changed whenever service monitor
on digital instrument cluster indicates a clogged filter
or at least once each 1000 hours of operation
Tb change the filter element (5), unbolt and remove
filter shield. Using a strap wrench, rotate filter ele-
ment counterclockwise to remove. Lubricate gasket
on new element with clean oil and install element
Fig. 14^-Expioded view of transmission and hydraulic
niters used on aii modeis. Refer to text.
1. Filter head
2. "O"ring 10. «O"ring
3. "O"ring 11. "O" ring retainer
4. Pressure switch 12. Filter base
5. Filter element 13. Screen
6. Filter container (in housing) 14. "O**ring
7. "0^'ring 15. Screen locator
8. Gasket 16. "Oaring
9. Suction tube retainer 17. Cover
16
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/iNTERNATiONAL
until gasket contacts filter head. Then, hand tighten
element an additional one-third turn.
Start engine and check for leaks. Reinstall filter'
shield and check transmission oil level.
Tb bleed the steering hydraulic system, operate
engine at half throttle and rotate steering wheel from
lock to lock several times until steering action is firm.
TROUBLE-SHOOTING
All Models
14. Some of the troubles that may occur in the
operation of the power steering system and their
possible causes are as follows:
1. No power steering or steers slowly.
a. Binding hiechanical linkage.
b. Excessive load on front wheels and/or air pres-
sure low in front tires.
c. Steering cylinder piston seal faulty or cylinder
damaged.
d. Faulty power steering supply pump.
e. Faulty hand pump.
f Faulty priority flow divider valve.
2. Will not steer manual^.
a. Binding mechanical linkage.
b. Excessive load on front wheels and/or air pres-
sure low in front tires.
c. Pumping element in hand pump faulty.
d. Faulty seal in steering cylinder or cylinder dam-
aged.
3. Hard steering through complete cycle.
a. Low pressure from supply pump.
b. Internal or external leakage.
c. Faulty steering cylinder.
d. Binding mechanical linkage.
e. Excessive load on front wheels and/or air pres-
sure low in front tires.
4. Momentary hard or lumpy steering.
a. Air in power stoering circuit.
SYSTEM OPERATiNG PRESSURE
Aii Modeis
15. The power steering operating pressure is con-
trolled by a relief valve located in the priority flow
divider valve. The priority flow divider valve is lo-
cated on inner side of remote valves on right side of
tractor. Operating pressure should be 2350-2450 psi
(16,203-16,892 kPa).

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
Tb check the operating pressure, disconnect one
steering line at front of tractor and install a tee in line
with a 3000 psi (21,000 kPa) test gage. Start engine
and operate until transmission and hydraulic oil is
warmed to a temperature of 150° F (65.5° C). Turn
steering wheel in direction to apply pressure to test
gage and hold on pressure against lock. Check pres-
sure reading on test gage. If pressure reading is
incorrect, refer to Fig. 15 and loosen locknut. Turn
adjusting screw in or out to obtain correct operating
pressure, then tighten locknut., Remove tee fitting
and test gage and reconnect steering line.
OPERATiONAL TESTS
Aii Modeis
The following tests are valid only when the power
steering system is void of any air. If necessary, bleed
system as outlined in paragraph 13 before performing
tests.
16. HAND PUMP. With power steering supply
pump inoperative (engine not running), attempt to
stoer manually in both directions.
NOTE: Manual steering with power steering sup-
piy pump inoperative, wiii require high steering
effort. If manual steering can be accomplished with
supply pump inoperative, it can be assumed that
the manual steering hand pump will operate satis-
factoriiy with the supply pump operating.
17. STEERING WHEEL SLIP TEST. Steering
wheel slip is the term used to describe the inability of
the steering wheel to hold a given position without
further steering movement. Wheel slip is generally
due to either internal or external leakage, or a faulty
hand pump or steering cylinder. Some steering wheel
slip, with hydraulic fluid at operating temperature,
is normal and permissible. A maximum of one revolu-
tion per minute is acceptable.
Tb check for steering wheel slip, proceed as follows:
Operate tractor until hydraulic fiuid is warmed to a
temperature of 150° F (65.5° C). Remove steering
wheel cap, then turn front wheels until they are
against the stop. Attach a torque wrench to steering
wheel nut. Apply 72 in.-lbs. (8 N.m) of force to steering
shaft in same direction as front wheels are positioned
against stop, then count revolutions of steering wheel
in a period of one minute. Use same procedure and
check stoering wheel slip in opposite direction. Up to
one revolution in one minute in either direction is
acceptable and system can be considered as operating
satisfactorily. If steering wheel revolutions per min-
ute exceed the maximum, record total rpm for use in
checking steering cylinder(s) or hand pump as out-
hned in the following paragraph.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 16-20
18. STEERING CYLINDER TEST. If steering
wheel slip as checked in paragraph 17 exceeds the
maximum one revolution per minute, proceed as fol-
lows: Disconnect and plug lines to steering cylin-
der(s). Make sure t h a t fluid is at operating
temperature, then repeat wheel slip test as outlined
in paragraph 17. If steering wheel slip is less than
that recorded in previous test, overhaul or renew
steering cylinders). If steering wheel slip (with steer-
ing cylinder(s) disconnected) still exceeds maximum
one revolution per minute, overhaul or renew steer-
ing hgind pump.
HYDRAULIC PUMP
Aii Modeis
19. The power source for the hydrostatic steering
system is the 27 gpm (102 L/m) piston pimip. This
pump also furnishes pressurized oil for the main
hydraulic system. Refer to HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECTION for information and service procedures for
the pump.
HAND PUMP (STEERiNG UNIT)
Aii Modeis
20. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. The steering
hand pump mounts on front side of engine fire wall.
Tb remove the hand pump, place hood in raised posi-
tion. Identify and remove the four steering tubes and
the signal port tube from the hand pump. Plug or cap
all openings immediately to prevent dirt from enter-
ing the system. Unbolt pump mounting bracket from
fire wall and remove the assembly. The universal joint
will be removed with the steering hand pump.
Tb reinstall hand pump assembly, first disconnect
battery ground cable. Remove four screws securing
instrument cluster to instrument panel. Raise instru-
ment cluster and disconnect wiring harnesses. (See
Fig. 15—Bottom view of priority vaive showing reiief
pressure adjusting screw.
17
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 21 CASE/iNTERNATIONAL

Fig. 16.) Lay cluster unit aside. This will provide
access to the steering shaft. Have helper ahgn steer-
ing shaft in "U" joint as steering hand pump assembly
is installed in fire wall. Tighten bracket to fire wall
cap screws to a torque of 20-24 ft.-lbs. (27-32 N.m).
Reconnect steering lines and signal port line. Rein-
stall instrument cluster and connect battery ground
cable. Start engine and bleed air from steering system
as outlined in paragraph 13.
is not equipped with vanes or springs and is a
thicker set.
The spacer (28) used with two-wheel drive imits is
located in the center of rotor. Spacer (28A) used with
front drive axle hand pump is located in the recess in
input shaft (31).
Remove adjusting screw (12) and torsion blades
(13) from spool (17). Clean and inspect all parts for

21. OVERHAUL (ROSS UNIT). Tb disassemble

the removed hand pump, drive out roll pin and re-
move "U" joint and collar (32—Fig. 17) from input
shaft (31). Remove dust shield (33), then unbolt and
remove pump mounting bracket. Identify and remove
hydraulic fittings, inlet (3) and outlet (1) check valves
and signal check valve (14). Mark check valves for aid
in reassembly. Remove guide pin (7) with "O" ring (6)
and check ball (5). Remove cap screws (37) and wash-
ers (38) and lift off cover (39). Remove seal ring (40),
snap ring (34), back-up ring (35) and seal (36) from
cover. Remove thrust washer (41) and thrust bearing
(42) from input shaft (31). With input shaft in hori-
zontal position, carefully withdraw input shaft as-
sembly with commutator (20). Remove washer (22)
from pump body (16), drive plate (18) from spool (17)
and seal assembly (19) from sleeve in body (16). Hold
adjusting screw (12) from turning and remove
locknut (8). Push adjusting screw (12), torsion blades
(13) and spool (17)fi'ombody. Remove adjusting screw
and torsion blades from spool. Remove plug (9) and
"O" ring (10). Remove commutator (20) and seal as-
sembly (21). Clamp not more than one inch (25.4 mm)
of input shaft (31) in protected jaws of vise and
remove seven cap screws (23). Remove manifold (24),
drive link (26 or 26A) with pins (25), stator-rotor set
(27 or 27A) and spacer (28 or 28A).
37
NOTE: The rotor used in two-wheei drive hand Fig. 17—Expioded view of Ross steering hand pump
pumps is equipped with vanes (29) and vane sp- used on aii tractors, items 26 through 30 are used on
rings (30) that can fali out. Do not lose these parts. two-wheei drive modeis. items 26A through 28A are
The rotor set used on models with front drive axie used on modeis with front drive axie.
1. Outlet check valve 22. Washer
2. "O"ring 23. Ferry head cap screw (7)
3. Inlet check valve 24. Manifold
4. "O''ring 25. Drive pin
5. Check ball 26. &26A. Drive link
6. "O**ring 27. &27A. Stator-rotor set
7. Guide pin 28. & 28A. Spacer
8. Locknut 29. Rotor vane
9. Plug 30. Vane spring
10. "Oaring 31. Input shaft
11. "Oaring 32. Collar
12. Adjusting screw 33. Dust shield
13, Ibrsion blade (2) 34. Snap ring
14. Signal port check valve 35. Back-up washer
15. "O'ring 36. Shaft seal
16. Body 37. Ferry head cap screw (8)
17. Spool 38. Washer
18. Drive plate 39. Cover
19. Seal assy. 40. Seal ring
Fig. 16—Instrument cluster being removed from instru- 20. Commutator 41. Thrust washer
ment panei for access to steering shaft and "U" joint. 21. Seal assy. 42. Thrust hearing

18

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
excessive wear or other damage. If spool (17) or sleeve
in body (16) are worn, renew hand pump assembly.
Commutator (20) and manifold (24) are available only
as a matched set, as are the stator and rotor. Refer to
Fig. 18 when checking the stator-rotor set and to Fig.
19 when checking vane springs.
When reassembling, use all new seal rings, "O**
rings and oil seals and lubricate seals with white
petroleum jelly.
Install "O" ring (10—Fig. 17) and pump plug (9) in
body and tighten plug to a torque of 55-75 ft.-lhs.
(75-102 N.m). Install new "O'' ring (11) on adjusting
screw (12) and place the two torsion blades in slot in
adjusting screw. Each torsion hlade has an identifica-
tion dot. Torsion blades must be installed with dots
facing the outside, so dots are at opposite ends of the
spool. Insert torsion blades and adjusting screw into
flat end of valve spool (17) so blades are installed in
the narrowest slot in valve spool. Lubricate exterior
of valve spool with new Hy-Tran Plus oil and install
valve spool. Tighten nut (8) on adjusting screw finger
tight. Use drive plate (18) and commutator (20) as
assembly guides to position valve spool. Center the
commutator lugs in the slots of body. Remove commu-
tator and drive plate. Tighten locknut (8) to a torque
of 10-15 fl.-lbs. (14-20 N.m). Install new seal assem-
bly (21) in groove of open end of commutator and
install commutator into manifold (24). Place commu-
tator and manifold on a clean surface with commuta-
tor side down. Install drive link (26 or 26A) and drive
pins (25) into the commutator. Install the rotor over
the drive pin and install the stator. On two-wheel
CENTER RO
IN STATi
'o
0.007 INCH MAXIMUM CLEARANCE
Fig. 18—With rotor positioned in stator as shown,
clearance must not exceed 0.007 inch (0.178 mm). Ro-
tor from Ross hand pump used on two-wheel drive is
shown. Clearance of rotor on Ross unit used on mod-
els with front drive axie is the same.
0.080 TO 0.100"
_±
Fig. I^'-On units so equipped, correct vane spring
height Is 0.080-0.100 Inch (2.032-2.540 mm). Renew
springs not meeting required height.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraph 21 (Cont.)
drive hand pump, install spacer (28) in rotor, then
install vanes and springs in rotor slots. Convex side
of spring must he towards the vane. On models with
front drive axle, install spacer (28A) in end of input
shaft (31). On all models, lubricate rotor set with new
Hy-Tran Plus oil and place input shaft on top of rotor
set. Align mounting bolt holes. Holding the commu-
tator in place, turn the assembly over and clamp only
the first one-inch (25.4 mm) of the shaft in a protected
jaw vise. Install and tighten cap screws (23), using
sequence shown in Fig. 20, to a torque of 2-3 fl.-lbs.
(3-4 N.m). Rotate the commutator to make sure all
components are free. Then, tighten the seven cap
screws in sequence to a torque of 10-14 ft.-lbs. (14-19
N»m). Lubricate and install thrust bearing (42—Fig.
17) on input shaft. Free rotating thrust race side of
bearing is first on shaft. Install thrust washer (41).
This thrust washer must be selected from a washer
kit. Ten washers are available in thicknesses from
0.046 inch (1.17 mm) to 0.100 inch (2.54 mm) in
increments of 0.006 inch (0.15 mm). Select and install
a 0.082-0.083 inch (2.08-2.11 mm) thick thrust
washer. Place new seal ring (40) in groove in cover
(39), then install input shaft assembly in cover. In-
stall new seal assembly (19) in valve sleeve in pump
hody. Use white petroleum jelly and stick drive plate
(18) in place on valve spool (17) and washer (22) on
the manifold (24). Align commutator lugs with slots
in pump body and carefully slide assemblies together.
CAUTION: Do not force the parts together. Rotate
input shaft back and forth to align drive piate and
commutator, if necessary.
When assemblies are together, install and tighten
two opposite cap screws (37) with washers (38) to a
torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs. (26-31 N.m). Using a torque
wrench, check the amount of torque needed to rotate
the input shaft. If the needed torque is greater than
15 in.-lhs. (1.7 N.m), remove the selected thrust
washer (41) and install one that is the next size
thinner. Continue this operation until needed torque
is 15 in.-lbs. (1.7 N.m). Install and tighten all eight
BOLT TORQUE
SEOUENCE
Fig. 20—Tighten manifold cap screws In the sequence
shown.
19

Paragraph 22
cap screws (37) evenly to a torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs.
(26-31 N.m). Install shaft seal (36) with seal lip facing
inward. Install back-up ring (35) and snap ring (34)
with rounded edge inward. Fill cavity in pump cover
bore with white petroleum jelly and install dust
shield (33). Install check ball (5) and guide pin (7)
with new "O" ring (6). Tighten guide pin (7) to a torque
of 10-14 ft.-lbs. (14-19 N.m). Inspect check valves (1,
3 and 14) and make sure they are clean and operate
freely. Use new "O" rings and install signal port check
valve (14), outlet check valve (1), inlet check valve (3)
and the other two (right and left turn) hydraulic
fittings. Tighten signal port check valve to a torque of
15-25 ft.-lbs. (20-34 N.m), and the inlet and outlet
check valves, and the other two fittings, to a torque
of 22-27 ft.-lhs. (30-37 N.m). Install "U" joint and
collar (32) and secure with the roll pin.
Reinstall hand pximp assemhly as outlined in para-
graph 20. Start engine and operate at 1500 rpm.
Rotate steering wheel from lock to lock several times
to hleed all air from system.
The procedure for balancing the steering hand
pump is as follows: With engine operating at 1500
rpm, place front wheels in straight-ahead position.
Using a torque wrench on steering wheel nut, turn
Fig. 21—View of power steering cylinder removed from
two-wheel drive tractor with standard adjustable front
axle,
1. Cap screw
2. Washer 5. Cylinder assy.
3. Center steering arm 6. Clamp bolt
4. Trunnion 7. Ball joint
20
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
steering wheel one turn to the left and record amount
of torque needed. Center front wheels and check
amount of torque needed to turn steering wheel
turn to the right. Record this reading. If the
readings are not within 2-3 in.-lbs. (0.22-0.33 N.m),
balance the unit as follows: Loosen locknut (8—Fig.
17) and turn adjusting screw (12) counterclockwise a
slight amount if torque reading was greater for the
right turn. TVtm adjusting screw clockwise if torque
reading was greater for left turn. Adjusting screw will
require a turn of 10 degrees or less to correct the
balance. Tighten locknut and recheck the torque in
both directions. Balance is correct when torque read-
ings in both directions are within 2-3 in.-lbs. (0.22-
0.33 N.m). When balance is correct, tighten locknut
to a torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs. (27-34 N.m).
STEERING CYLINDER(S)
All Two-Wheel Drive Models
22, R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the power
steering cylinder (5—Fig. 21), disconnect both steer-
ing lines. Cap or plug all openings. Loosen ball joint
clamp bolt (6). Using a wrench on the flat end of piston
rod, turn piston rod out of ball joint (7). Remove
cylinder mounting bolts (1) and washers (2), then
withdraw cylinder from center steering arm (3). Re-
move trunnions (4) from cylinder.
To disassemble the steering cylinder, use a spanner
wrench and rotate cylinder head (3—Fig. 22) until
sharp end of retaining ring (4) is visible in slot in
cylinder tube (7). Raise end of retaining ring out of
slot and rotate cylinder head to remove the retaining
ring. Remove cylinder head assembly from cylinder
tube. Remove cylinder head from opposite end of
cylinder tube in the same manner. Remove "O" ring
(6), back-up ring (5), wiper seal (1) and rod seal (2)
from cylinder heads. Withdraw piston rod (10), then
remove piston seal (9) and "O" ring (8).
Inspect cylinder tube (7) for scoring, grooves or
out-of^roundness. Light scoring can be polished out
by using a fine emery cloth and oil, using a rotary
motion while polishing. Heavy scoring, grooving or
out-of-roundness will require renewal of cylinder
tube. Check rod end piston (10) for scoring, grooving
and straightness and renew as necessary.
Renew all "O" rings, seals and back-up rings (avail-
able in a kit) during reassembly.
Reassemble steering cylinder as follows: Install "0"
ring (8) in piston, then install piston seal (9) on top of
"O" ring. Use a ring compressor and compress piston
seal back to its original size. Lubricate with white
petroleum jelly and install piston rod assembly into
cylinder tube. Install rod seal (2) and wiper seal (1)
in cylinder heads and back-up ring (5) and "O" ring
(6) in wide groove of cylinder heads. "O" rings must
be toward inside of cylinder. Lubricate and install
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 23

over piston rod and into cylinder tube. Turn cylinder
heads until the small hole appears in slot of cylinder
tube. Install hooked end of retaining ring (4) into hole
and rotate cylinder head until retaining ring is fully
inside the cylinder tube.
Th reinstall steering cylinder, reverse the removal
procedure. Tighten mounting cap screws (1—Fig. 21)
to a torque of 460-510 ft.-lbs. (620-690 N.m). Tighten
piston rod into ball joint to a torque of 110-125 ft.-lbs.
(150-170 N.m) and tighten clamp bolt (6) to a torque
of 25-30 ft.-lbs. (35-40 N.m). Reconnect steering lines.
Start engine and cycle steering lock to lock several
times to bleed air from system.
All Models With Front Drive Axle
23. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Ib remove either
steering cylinder (2—Fig. 23), disconnect steering
lines from steering cylinder. Plug or cap all openings
immediately to prevent dirt from entering the sys-
tem. Remove cotter pins and slotted nuts and sepa-
rate ball joints from front drive axle assembly (1).
Remove cylinder.
To disassemble the steering cylinder, loosen clamp
bolts and unscrew both ball joints from cylinder.
Using a spanner wrench, rotate cylinder head (11—
Fig. 24) until sharp end of retaining ring (10) is visible
in slot in cylinder tube (1). Raise end of retaining ring
out of slot and rotate cylinder head to remove the
retaining ring. Remove cylinder head assembly. Re-
move wiper seal (13), rod seal (12) and "O" ring (9)
from cylinder head (11). Withdraw piston and rod
assembly from cylinder tube (1). Remove nut (2) and
piston (3) from piston rod (8). Remove wear ring (4),
piston seal (5) and "O" ring (6) from piston and "O"
ring (7) from piston rod.
Inspect cylinder tube (1) for scoring, grooves or
out-of-roundness. Light scoring can be polished out
by using a fine emery cloth and oil, using a rotary
motion while polishing. Heavy scoring, grooving or
out-of-roundness will require renewal of cylinder
tube. Check rod (8) and piston (3) for scoring, grooving
and straightness and renew as necessary.
Renew all "O" rings, seals and back-up rings (avail-
able in a kit) during reassembly.
Fig. 23.—View of power steering cylinders removed
from tractor equipped with front drive axle.
1. Front drive axle assy.
2. Steering cylinders

Fig. 24—Exploded view of one power steering cylinder.

Two cylinders are used on models equipped with front
drive axle.
Fig. 22—Exploded view of steering cylinder used on
1. Cylinder tube
two-wheel drive tractors. 2. Nut 8. Rod
Wiper seal 6. "O"ring 3. Piston 9. «O"ring
Rod seal 7. Cylinder tube 4. Wear ring 10. Retaining ring
Cylinder head 8. W r i n g 5. Piston seal ring H. Cylinder head
Retaining ring 9. Piston seal ring 6. "O"ring 12. Rod seal
Back-up ring 10. Rod & piston as^. 7. «O"ring 13. Wiper seal

21

Paragraph 24
Reassemble steering cylinder as follows: Install rod
seal (12) and wiper seal (13) in cylinder head (11) and
"O" ring (9) in groove (without hole) in cylinder head.
Lubricate seals with white petroleum jelly and install
rod (8), piston end first, through cylinder head. Install
"O" ring (7) in groove on rod. Install wear ring (4) in
wide groove of piston, install "O" ring (6) in narrow
groove, then install seal ring (5) on top of "O" ring.
Install piston on rod and secure with nut (2) tightened
to a torque of 55-65 ft.-lbs. (75-90 N.m). Use a ring
compressor and compress seal ring (5) and wear ring
(4) back to their original size. Lubricate with white
petroleum jelly and install rod and piston assembly
into cylinder tube. Push cylinder head into cylinder
tube and turn cylinder head until small hole is
aligned with slot in cylinder tube. Place hooked end
of retaining ring (10) into hole and rotate cylinder
head until retaining ring is fully inside the cylinder
tube.
ENGINE AND COMPONENTS
All models are equipped with six cylinder
diesel engines having a bore of 4.488 inches (114
mm), a stroke of 5.315 inches (135 mm) and a
displacement of 505 cu. in. (8.3 L).
Models 7110,7120 and 7130 are equipped with
a turbocharger and Model 7140 is equipped
with a turbocharger and an after cooler*
R&R ENGINE ASSEMBLY
All Models
24. To remove engine assembly, first split tractor
between engine and speed transmission as follows:
Place transmission shift lever in PARK position and
securely block rear wheels. Unbolt and remove front
weights, if so equipped. Disconnect battery cables.
Remove drain plug and drain transmission oil. Drain
coolant from engine and radiator. Remove cab floor
mat and unbolt and remove access cover from cab
floor. Disconnect hydraulic oil cooler upper hose at tee
fitting under cab fioor and oil cooler lower hose at the
bulkhead fitting under the cab. Remove side panels
and raise hood. Make sure hood hinge lock is engaged
and remove left hood strut. Disconnect wiring from
air conditioning compressor, unbolt compressor from
engine and remove condenser from radiator support.
Carefully put compressor and condenser with hoses
connected in tractor cab. Unbolt hose routing clamp
and tool box bracket from left side rail. Shut off fuel
valve and disconnect fuel line at primer pump. Dis-
connect fuel return hose and throttle cable from fuel
injection pump. Disconnect heater hoses from left and
right sides of engine. Identify and remove steering
hoses from left side of steering hand pump, then cap
22
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Tb reinstall the steering cylinder, first install both
ball joints, but do not tighten clamp bolts at this time.
Adjust ball joints until three threads are showing at
each end. Fully retract cyHnder (piston rod bottomed)
and measure distance between the two ball joint lube
fittings as shown in Fig. 23. Center to center of lube
fittings should be 21 inches (533 mm). Adjust both
ball joints evenly to obtain correct measurement.
Position ball joints so that cylinder ports will be
straight up when cylinder is installed, then tighten
ball joint clamp bolts to a torque of 60-70 ft.-lbs.
(80-95 N.m). Install cylinder and tighten slotted nuts
on ball joints to a torque of 140 ft.-lbs. (190 N.m).
Secure with cotter pins. Reconnect steering lines.
Start engine and cycle steering lock to lock several
times to bleed air from system.
Repeat operation for other steering cylinder if nec-
essary.
or plug all openings. Disconnect wires from starter
solenoid on engine fire wall. Unbolt and remove hy-
draulic filter cover from right side of cab. Disconnect
and remove engine wiring harness and positive bat-
tery cable from bottom of cabfioar.Remove side panel
latch from right side rail. If so equipped, remove front
axle drive shaft shield and shaft, and the drive shaft
shield rear support as outlined in paragraph 12. Use
a jack or rear housing handler to support tractor
transmission. Install splitting stand (17-526A or
equivalent) under front of tractor. Place a jack stand
under tractor draw bar. Remove fiywheel housing to
speed transmission housing bolts and separate front
half of tractor from rear half.
Install a support under front end weight bracket.
Unbolt and remove radiator recovery reservoir from
left side of engine. Disconnect ether starting line from
intake manifold. Disconnect and remove the aspira-
tor tube. Disconnect, imbolt and remove exhaust muf-
fler and air cleaner assemblies. Unbolt and remove
exhaust pipe and elbow. Disconnect and remove up-
per and lower radiator hoses and the coolant air
removal hose. Remove battery cables and wiring from
starting motor. Unbolt and remove hood support and
battery cable assembly from fiywheel housing. Attach
a hoist and lifting sling to engine lifting brackets.
Remove engine mounting bolts from side rails, then
unbolt side rails from fiywheel housing. Unbolt left
side rail from front support and slide the rail away
from engine. Raise engine and move engine to the
rear and to the left away from right side rail.
Reinstall engine by reversing the removal proce-
dure. Tighten side rail to front support bolts to a
torque of 162-184 ft.-lbs. (220-250 N.m). When in-
stalling side rail to fiywheel housing cap screws,

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
tighten 20 mm cap screws to a torque of 313-358
ft.-lbs. (425-485 N.m) and the 22 mm cap screws to a
torque of 432-483 ft.-lbs. (585-655 N.m). Tighten bolts
securing engine mounts to side rails to a torque of
69-78 ft.-lbs. (94-106 N.m). Install exhaust elbow on
fiywheel housing and tighten mounting bolts to a
torque of 59-66 ft.-lbs. (80-90 N.m). Install exhaust
pipe and tighten clamp bolts to a torque of 34-38
ft.-lbs. (46-52 N.m). Tighten air cleaner and muffler
mounting bolts to a torque of 34-38 ft.-lbs. (46-52
N.m).
Clean mounting flanges of fljrwheel housing and
speed transmission. Apply Molydisulfide grease on
splines of transmission input shaft. Install two guide
studs in the transmission housing. Apply Loctite 504
gasket eliminator to flange of transmission housing
and roll tractor togethe*. Remove guide studs and
install mounting bolts and lockwashers. Tighten 12
mm bolts to a torque of 69-78 ft.-lbs. (94-106 N.m),
tighten 16 mm bolts to a torque of 162-184 ft.-lbs.
(220-250 N.m) and tighten 22 mm bolts to a torque of
432-483 ft.-lbs. (585-655 N.m). Remove split stands.
The balance of assembly is the reverse of disassembly
procedure.
CYLINDER HEAD
All Models
25. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Ib remove the
cylinder head, raise hood and remove side panels.
Drain cooling system and disconnect battery cables.
Disconnect air cleaner restriction sending unit wires.
Disconnect air tubes, then unbolt and remove the
strata tube and air cleaner assembly. Disconnect ex-
haust tubes, then unbolt and remove muffler assem-
bly. Unbolt and remove air cleaner and muffler
support. Disconnect oil supply and drain tubes from
turbocharger, then unbolt and remove turbocharger.
Disconnect wiring from air conditioning compressor,
unbolt compressor from engine and remove con-
denser from radiator support. Carefully place com-
pressor and condenser with hoses connected, in
tractor cab. Remove ether starting line from intake
manifold. Remove fuel leak-off line and injection
lines. Cap or plug all openings. Using adapter CAS-
1815 and slide hammer, remove injectors. Shut off
fuel valve and remove fuel filters and filter housing.
Unbolt and remove exhaust manifold. Remove
breather tube and valve cover. Unbolt and remove
intake manifold cover or after cooler. Disconnect and
remove the coolant bypass tube. Unbolt and remove
rocker arm assemblies. Remove and discard the
rocker arm oil supply tube. Remove the push rods.
Remove cylinder head retaining cap screws and lift
off cylinder head.
Clean cylinder head and engine block mating sur-
faces, removing carbon or other deposits. Check cyl-
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraph 25
inder head for cracks or other signs of damage. Using
a straight edge and feeler gage, check cylinder head
at each side and between cylinders for warping. If
warping is greater than 0.004 inch (0.1016 mm),
cylinder head must be machined or renewed.
NOTE: After machining, if cyiinder liead height is
less than 4.557 inches (115.75 mm), renew cylinder
head.
When reassembling, select the correct head gasket
to be installed. Head gaskets are identified by notches
in edge of gasket as shown in Fig. 25. Standard gasket
has no notches, 0.008 inch (0.21 mm) oversize thick-
ness gasket has two notches and 0.011 inch (0.27 mm)
oversize thickness gasket has three notches.
Install head gasket and cylinder head. Lubricate
cylinder head bolt threads with oil and install.
Tighten cylinder head bolts in three steps using the
sequence shown in Fig. 26. Tighten to 37 ft.-lbs. (50
N.m) in first step, to 110 ft.-lbs. (149 N.m) in second
step and to 148 ft.-lbs. (201 N.m) in third step.
Tighten rocker arm stand bolts to a torque of 32
ft.-lbs. (43 N.m).
Using a new gasket, install intake manifold cover
on Models 7110, 7120 and 7130 or after cooler on
Model 7140. Apply liquid Ifeflon on the retaining cap
screw threads and tighten to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24
N.m) using sequence shown in Fig. 27. Install ex-
haust manifold with new gaskets and tighten cap
screws to a torque of 32 ft.-lbs. (43 N.m) using se-
quence shown in Fig. 28.
Refer to paragraph 60 for installation information
on fuel injectors and to paragraph 69 for installation
of turbocharger. Adjust valve tappet gap as outlined
in paragraph 27.
Notches
1 o O o o o "1
\9/^—N
)
Fig. 25—View showing typicai cyiinder head gasket
thickness identification notches. Refer to text.
BOLT TORQUE SEQUENCE
Fig. 26—Cylinder head bolt tightening sequence for all
models.
23
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraphs 26-27 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Complete the assembly by reversing the disassem- Intake

bly procedure. Other tightening torques are as fol- Face and seat angle 30°
lows: Stem diameter 0.373-0.374 in.
Valve cover bolts 18 ft.-lbs. (9.48-9.50 mm)
(24 N.m) Stem to guide clearance 0.0015-0.003 in.
Filter housing nut 24 ft.-lbs. (0.039-0.079 mm)
(32 N.m) Seat width 0.054-0.078 in.
Fuel injector bolts 18 ft.-lbs. (1.38-1.98 mm)
(24 N.m) Valve tappet gap (cold) 0.012 in.
Turbocharger mounting nuts 24 ft.-lbs. (0.305 mm)
(32 N.m) Valve recession from face of
cylinder head 0.035-0.056 in.
VALVES AND SEATS (0.89-1.42 mm)

All Models Exhaust

Face and seat angle 45""
26. Intake and exhaust valves seat on renewable Stem diameter 0.373-0.374 in.
seat inserts. Seat inserts are available in standard (9.48-9.50 mm)
size and 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) oversize. Valve stem Stem to guide clearance 0.0015-0.003 in.
seals are used on all valves. When renewing valve (0.039-0.079 mm)
seat inserts, use valve seat puller CAS-1869 and slide Seat width 0.076-0.106 in.
hammer to remove seats. DO NOT attempt to drive (1.92-2.68 mm)
a chisel under insert as counterbore will be damaged. Valve tappet gap (cold) 0.024 in.
Chill new inserts in dry ice prior to installation, then 0.609 mm)
use a driver and install seats. Valve recession from face of
Check the valves against the following specifica- cylinder head 0.035-0.056 in.
tions: (0.89-1.42 mm)

27. VALVE (TAPPET) GAP ADJUSTMENT.

BQLT TORQUE SEQUENCE
The two-position method of tappet adjustment is rec-
ommended. DO NOT attempt to adjust valve tappet
gap with engine operating. Using a fljrwheel rotating
tool CAS-1690 through opening in flywheel housing,
turn flywheel in normal direction of rotation while
pushing inward on the timing lock pin. The timing
Fig. 27—Intake manifold or after cooler bolt tightening lock pin is located in timing gear housing below the
sequence. fuel injection pump. When the lock pin moves forward
into hole in camshaft gear, engine will be locked with
BOLT TOROUE SEOUENCE No. 1 piston at TDC of compression stroke. Adjust the
six valves indicated by arrows in Fig. 29. Disengage
n nffl cm n lock pin and rotatefl3rwheelone complete revolution
TTT LLXJ to position No. 6 piston at TDC of compression stroke.
Then, adjust the six valves indicated by arrows in Fig.
30. Refer to paragraph 26 for valve tappet gap. Re-
Fig. 28—Exhaust manifold bolt tightening sequence for move flywheel rotating tool and install plug in hole.
all models.

FAH FAN

Fig. 29—With No. 1 piston at TDC of compression Fig. 30—With No. 6 piston at TDC of compression
stroke, adjust the vaives indicated by arrows. stroke, adjust the vaives indicated by arrows.

24
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 28-32

VALVE GUIDES AND SPRINGS Measure outside diameter of cam follower stem. If
outside diameter is less than 0.627 inch (15.926 mm),
All Models renew cam follower. Measure follower bores in block.
If inside diameter is more than 0.632 inch (16.055
28. The intake and exhaust valve guides are inter- mm), renew cylinder block
changeable. If valve guides are worn beyond the limit
of 0.376 inch (9.559 mm), renew guides as follows: Use TIMING GEAR COVER
tool CAS-10823 or equivalent and press on bottom of
guides until removed. Then, use tool CAS-10823 and All Models
press on top end of guides until top of intake guides
are 0.813-0.833 inch (20.65-21.16 mm) above spring 31. Tb remove the timing gear cover, remove hood,
recess in head or top of exhaust guides are 0.886- grille and side panels. Drain cooling system. Unbolt
0.906 inch (22.50-23.01 mm) above spring recess in air conditioning condenser and lay back on top of
head. Ream installed guides to inside diameter of engine. Remove radiator, oil cooler and support as
0.3755 inch (9.539 nun). Stem seals are used on all outlined in paragraph 73. Loosen air conditioning
valves. compressor and remove belt. Lift belt tensioner and
Intake and exhaust valve springs are interchange- remove fan belt. Unbolt and remove fan assembly, fan
able. Renew any spring that is cracked, discolored or pulley and crankshaft pulley. Then, unbolt and re-
does not meet the following specifications: move timing gear cove*.
Free length 2.585 in.
(65.66 mm) NOTE: Refer to paragraph 45 for crankshaft seal
Test length 2.0 in. installation and timing gear cover alignment.
(50.8 mm)
Test load 104-115 lbs. When reassembling, use new cover gasket and
(464.5-513.5 N) tighten cover retaining cap screws to a torque of 18
ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Tighten crankshaft pulley retaining
ROCKER ARMS cap screws to a torque of 148 ft.-lbs. (200 N.m) and
fan bolts to a torque of 32 ft.-lbs. (43 N.m). Tighten
All Models the five cap screws securing radiator support to front
support to a torque of 34-38 ft.-lbs. (46-52 N.m).
29. Refer to Fig. 31 for exploded view of rocker arm
and shaft assembly used on each cylinder. To disas- TIMING GEARS
semble the removed unit, remove cap screws (7) and
separate rocker shaft support (8) from shaft (9). Re-
move snap rings (1), flat washers (2) and spring
All Models
washers (3), then slide rocker arms (4) from rocker
shaft (9). 32. The timing gear train consists of the crankshaft
gear, camshaft gear and injection pump drive gear.
Measure rocker shaft (9) and if worn to a diameter
of less than 0.874 inch (22.199 mm), renew shaft.
Measure inside diameter of rocker arm (4). If diame-
ter of bore is more than 0.878 inch (22.301 mm),
renew rocker arm.
Reassemble by reversing the disassembly proce-
dure and install a new rocker arm oil supply tube.
Tighten rocker support cap screws (7) to a torque of
32 ft.-lbs. (43 N.m). Adjust valve tappet gap as out-
lined in paragraph 27. Use a new gasket and install
valve cover. Tighten cap screws to a torque of 18
ft.-lbs. (24 N.m).

CAM FOLLOWERS
Fig. 31—Expioded view of rocker arm assembly used
All Models on each cylinder.
1. Snap ring
30. The mushroom-type cam followers can be re- 2. Washer 6. Locknut
3. Spring washer 7. Cap screw
moved from below after first removing camshaft and 4. Rocker arm assy. 8. Rocker shaft support
oil pan as outlined in paragraphs 37 and 48. 5. Adjusting screw 9. Rocker shaft

25

Paragraphs 33-35
Engine oil pump is mounted on front of engine block
inside the timing gear housing and drives through an
idler gear from crankshaft gear, becoming part of the
gear train. Refer to the appropriate following para-
graphs for timing, inspection and R&R information.
33. TIMING MARKS. When installing camshaft
gear and crankshaft gear, align single punch mark on
Fig. 32—View of timing marks aiigned on crankshaft
gear and camshaft gear.
X ^
Fig. 33—View of timing io6k pin iocated in timing gear
housing directiy below fuel Injection pump.
Fig. 34—View of the injection pump timing lock pin.
When slot in long end of pin engages tab in pump, the
injection pump is iocked in time for No. 1 cyiinder.
26
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
crankshaft gear with double punch marks on cam-
shaft gear. See Fig. 32. Oil pump gear and idler, and
the injection pump gear do not have timing marks.
34. CAMSHAFT GEAR. The camshaft gear is a
shrink fit on the camshaft. To remove the camshaft
gear, remove camshaft from engine as outlined in
paragraph 37. With timing gear cover removed and
before removing the camshaft, use a dial indicator
and check backlash between camshaft gear and
crankshaft gear. Normal backlash is 0.006-0.010 inch
(0.152-0.254 mm). Maximum backlash is 0.018 inch
(0.45 mm). Excessive backlash could be caused by
gear wear, shaft wear or camshaft bushing wear, or
by a combination of factors.
To remove camshaft gear after removing camshaft,
press the gear off the shaft. Refer to paragraph 38 and
check camshaft bushings and camshaft for excessive
wear.
When installing camshaft gear on camshaft, heat
gear approximately 45 minutes in a bearing oven at
a temperature of 250° F (121° C). Install camshaft
gear with timing marks to the front and timing pin
hole to the rear.
WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves
when handling heated parts.
Reinstall camshaft as outlined in paragraph 37.
35. INJECTION PUMP GEAR. To remove the
injection pump drive gear, first remove the timing
gear cover as outlined in paragraph 31. Using a dial
indicator, check backlash between injection pump
drive gear and camshaft gear. Normal backlash is
0.006-0.010 inch (0.152-0.254 mm). Maximum back-
lash is 0.015 inch (0.38 mm). Remove nut ^ d lock-
washer from injection pump shaft. Using flywheel
rotating tool CAS-1690 through hole in flywheel
housing, turn fljrwheel in normal direction of rotation
while pushing inward on the timing lock pin. See Fig.
33. When lock pin is engaged in hole in camshaft gear,
remove the injection pump timing pin cover. Remove
timing pin from injection pump. Reverse the pin and
reinstall with long end inward. See Fig. 34. When slot
in long end of pump timing pin engages tab in pump,
injection pump is locked in time for No. 1 cylinder.
Install pump timing pin cover and tighten a small
amount. Using puller CAS-1691, remove injection
pump drive gear.
When installing pump drive gear, make certain the
timing lock pin is engaged in hole in camshaft gear
and that pump timing pin has pump locked in time.
NOTE: Inside diameter of drive gear is tapered to
fit the injection pump shaft. There is no key siot in
the pump gear.
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 36-37

Install drive gear on pump shaft and install lock-
washer and nut. Tighten nut a small amount. There
is no timing mark on injection pump drive gear.
Remove pump timing pin cover and timing pin. Re-
verse the timing pin and install in pump short end
first. Install and tighten timing pin cover to a torque
of 11 ft.-lbs. (15 N.m). Pull lock pin out of camshaft
gear. Remove flywheel rotating tool and install plug
in flywheel housing. Then, tighten pump drive gear
nut to a torque of 60 ft.-lbs. (81 N.m) on Models 7110,
7120 and 7130, or 66 ft.-lbs. (90 N.m) on Model 7140.
Refer to paragraph 31 and reinstall timing gear
cover.
ing (6—Fig. 37). Remove drive plate, flywheel, fly-
wheel housing and rear seal retainer. Remove oil pan
and oil inlet tube. Remove cylinder head and piston
and rod units. Remove main bearing caps, then lift
out crankshaft. Press crankshaft from crankshaft
gear.
Inspect crankshaft gear timing pin for looseness or
damage and renew as necessary. Timing pin must
protrude 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) above surface of crank-
shaft when installed. See Fig. 36. Heat new gear in a
bearing oven for at least 25 minutes at a temperature
of 250° F (121° C). Install gear with timing mark to
the front, until seated against bearing journal.

WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves

36. CRANKSHAFT GEAR. The crankshaft gear
is a shrink fit on crankshaft. Backlash between
crankshaft gear and camshaft gear should be 0.006-
0.010 inch (0.152-0.254 mm). Maximum allowable
backlash is 0.018 inch (0.45 mm). Crankshaft must
be removed from engine to renew crankshaft gear. Tb
remove crankshaft, remove engine as outlined in
paragraph 24. Remove camshaft as in paragraph 37
and injection pump as in paragraph 57. Unbolt and
remove engine mounting plate and timing gear hous-
when handiing heated parts.
Reassemble by reversing disassembly procedures.
CAMSHAFT AND BEARINGS
All Models
37. R&R CAMSHAFT. To remove the camshaft
and gear assembly, first remove the timing gear cover
as outhned in paragraph 31. Remove injection pump
drive gear as outlined in paragraph 35. Unbolt and
remove fuel transfer pump from left side of engine
block. Remove valve cover, rocker arm assemblies, oil
supply tube and push rods. Make 12 wooden dowels

Fig. 35—if the balance marks on crankshaft pulley are

not aligned, renew the pulley.

0.040 INCH (1.02 mm)

IS 14
Fig. 37—Exploded view of timing gear housing, cover
and related parts.
1. Crankshaft front seal
2. Plug 9. Timing lock pin
3. Seal ring 10. "O"ring
4. Timing gear cover 11. Retaining ring
5. Gasket 12. Slotted head cap screw
6. Timing gear housing 13. Housing gasket
Fig. 36—Crankshaft gear timing pin must protrude 7. Seal ring 14. Gasket
0.040 Inch (1,02 mm) above surface of crankshaft. S. Lock pin housing 15. Access plate

27

Paragraphs 38-40
V2 X 18 inches (12.7 x 457 mm) and cut a slot in end
ofeach dowel 0.354 inch (9.0 mm) deep. Push slotted
end ofeach dowel into a cam follower. Pull dowel pins
upward to hold cam followers up and away from
camshaft. Place a rubber band around each pair of
dowel pins to hold them in upward position. Working
through the holes in camshaft, unbolt and remove the
camshaft thrust plate (3—Fig. 38). Withdraw cam-
shaft and gear assembly.
Remove camshaft gear as outlined in paragraph 34
if renewal is indicated. Refer to paragraph 38 for
specification data on camshaft and bushings.
When reinstalling camshaft, align timing marks as
shown in Fig. 32. Install thrust plate (3—Fig. 38) and
secure with cap screws (2). Then, using a dial indica-
tor, check camshaft end play. End play is controlled
by the thrust plate (3). Camshaft end play should be
0.0047-0.0134 inches (0.120-0.340 mm). If end play is
more than 0.0185 inches (0.470 mm), renew thrust
plate. Tighten thrust plate retaining cap screws (2) to
a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Complete reassembly
by reversing the disassembly procedure. Adjust valve
clearance as outlined in paragraph 27.
38. CAMSHAFT BEARINGS. Camshaft rides in
seven camshaft bearings. Camshaft journals should
have an operating clearance in bearings of 0.0018-
0.0048 inch (0.045-0.123 mm). Maximum allowable
clearance is 0.0059 inch (0.150 mm).
To renew camshaft bearings (5—Fig. 38), first re-
move engine as outlined in paragraph 24. Remove
drive plate, flywheel and flywheel housing. Remove
camshaft as in paragraph 37. Remove oil pan and oil
inlet tube. Remove expansion plug from behind rear
camshaft bearing. Using a suitable camshaft removal
tool, pull camshaft bearings from engine.
All seven camshaft journals are the same size.
Journals should measure 2.3617-2.3627 inches
Fig, 38—View of camshaft and related parts. All seven
camshaft bearings are identical.
1. Camshaft gear
4. Gear timing pin
2. Cap screw (2) 5. Camshaft bearings (7)
3. Thrust plate 6. Camshaft
28
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
(59.987-60.013 mm). If any journal is worn beyond
the limit of 2.3607 inches (59.962 mm), renew cam-
shaft. Renew camshaft if any lobes are scuffed, scored
or excessively worn.
Cainshaft bearings are presized and should need
no final sizing if carefully installed. When installing
new bearings, make certain the oil holes in bearings
and crankcase are aligned. When installing expan-
sion plug at rear camshaft bearing, apply Loctite 277
to the sealing surface of the plug.
ROD AND PISTON UNITS
All Models
39. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Connecting rod
and piston units are removed from above after remov-
ing cylinder head, oil pan, oil inlet tube and connect-
ing rod caps. Before removing, place a cylinder
identification mark at top front ofeach piston. If not
marked, place cylinder identification number on con-
necting rod and cap in side opposite the camshaft.
Remove carbon or wear ring from top of cylinders,
then remove the rod and piston units.
Reinstall by reversing the removal procedure. Lu-
bricate threads and tighten nuts on connecting rod
bolts in three steps. In first step, tighten to a torque
of 30 ft.-lbs. (40 N.m), in second step to a torque of 60
ft.-lbs. (80 N.m) and in third step to a torque of 88
ft.-lbs.(120N.m).
PISTONS, SLEEVES AND RINGS
All Models
40. Sleeves and pistons are available separately or
in sets. New pistons have a diametrical clearance in
new sleeves of 0.006-0.008 inch (0.153-0.207 mm),
measured between sleeve and bottom of piston skirt
90 degrees from piston pin. Maximum allowable
clearance is 0.013 inch (0.341 mm).
The wet-type sleeves (12—Fig. 39) should be re-
newed when out-of-round or taper exceeds 0.0016
inch (0.040 mm). Inside diameter of new sleeve is
4.488-4.490 inches (114.00-114.04 mm) with a maxi-
mum service limit of 4.493 inches (114.117 mm).
Using a suitable sleeve puller, remove sleeves, being
careful not to contact the four block lugs. See Fig. 40.
Before installing sleeves, thoroughly clean upper
and lower sleeve contact areas of the engine block.
Install new "O** ring (13—Fig. 39) in groove in sleeve
(12), lubricate "O" ring and sleeve contact areas in
block with clean oil. Install sleeve in block. Use a
hammer and wooden block to seat the sleeve. Make
sure the sleeve does not contact the four block lugs
(Fig. 40). If sleeve contacts the lugs, renew cylinder
block. Using a dial indicator, measure sleeve standout
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 41-42

(distance from top of sleeve flange to cylinder block CONNECTING RODS AND BEARINGS
surface). Measure at four (90 degree) intervals.
Sleeve standout should be 0.0005-0.004 inch (0.013-
0.109 mm). If sleeve standout is not correct, use All Models
alternate sleeves to correct the problem. If sleeve
standout cannot be corrected, renew cylinder block. 42. Connecting rods are removed as outlined in
The pistons (4—Fig. 39) should measure 4.4816- paragraph 39. Standard crank pin diameter is
4.4822 inches (113.833-113.847 mm) at 0.472 inch 2.9916-2.9926 inches (75.987-76.013 mm). Desired
(12.0 mm) above bottom of piston and at 90 degrees
from piston pin holes. If worn beyond the minimum
service limit of 4.479 inches (113.776 mm), renew
pistons.
Piston ring specifications are as follows:
Top Compression Ring:
Ring type Keystone
End gap 0.016-0.028 in.
(0.40-0.70 mm)
Side clearance Not measurable
Second Compression Ring:
Ring type Rectangular taper face
End gap 0.016-0.028 in.
(0.40-0.70 mm)
Side clearance 0.003-0.005 in.
(0.070-0.125 mm)
Oil Control Ring:
Ring type Two piece
End gap 0.012-0.024 in.
(0.30-0.60 mm)
Side clearance .\ 0.0008-0.0026 in.
(0.020-0.065 mm)
Top compression rings and second compression
rings are marked "TOP" for correct installation. Oil
rings can be installed either side up. Install piston
rings on pistons so that ring gaps are 120 degrees Fig. 39—Exploded view showing piston, connecting
rod and sieeve and related parts. Piston pin bushing (6)
apart. is not avaiiabie separately,
1. Ibp compression ring
2. Second compression ring 8. Nut
PISTON PINS 3. Oil control ring 9. Connecting rod & cap
4. Piston 10. Rod bolt
5. Retaining rings 11. Piston pin
6. Pin bushing 12. Sleeve
All Models 7. Connecting rod bearing 13. "O" ring

41. The full floating-type piston pins (11—Fig. 39)

are retained in piston bosses by retaining rings (5)
and are available in standard size onljr. Outside di-
ameter of new pin is 1.7715-1.7718 inches (44.997-
45.003 mm). If pin is worn beyond the minimum
service limit of 1.7714 inches (44.993 mm), renew pin.

Pin bushing inside diameter in connecting rod

should be 1.7726-1.7730 inches (45.023-45.035 mm).
If pin bushing inside diameter exceeds 1.7730 inches
(45.035 mm), renew connecting rod as bushing (6) is
not serviced separately.
Measure piston pin bore in piston, which should be
1.7719-1.7721 inches (45.006-45.012 mm). If wom
beyond the maximum service limit of 1.7726 inches Fig. 40—View of four block lugs at base of cylinder In
(45.025 mm), renew piston. , , crankcase.

29

Paragraphs 43-45
bearing clearance is 0.0012-0.0046 inch (0.033-0.117
mm) with a maximum allowable clearance of 0.0056
inch (0.142 mm). Regrind or renew crankshaft if
out-of-round exceeds 0.0019 inch (0.050 mm) or if
taper exceeds 0.0005 inch (0.013 mm). Rod bearings
(9--Fig. 39) are available in undersizes of 0.010,
0.020, 0.030 and 0.040 inch (0.25, 0.50, 0.75 and 1.0
mm) as well as standard. Connecting rod side clear-
ance should be 0.004-0.012 inch (0.1-0.3 mm).
When reinstalling, stamped cylinder numbers on
connecting rods and caps should face opposite cam-
shaft side and arrows on top of pistons must be toward
front of engine. Tighten nuts (8) on connecting rod
bolts in three steps. In first step, tighten to a torque
of 30 ft.-lbs. (40 N.m). In second step, tighten to a
torque of 60 ft.-lbs. (80 N.m). In third step, tighten to
a torque of 88 ft.-lbs. (120 N.m).
CRANKSHAFT AND MAIN BEARINGS
All Models
43. The crankshaft (8—Fig. 41) is supported in
seven main bearings. Crankshaft end play is control-
led by the flanged upper half of No. 4 main bearing
insert.
10
Fig. 41—View showing crankshaft and related parts.
Center (No, 4) upper bearing half controls crankshaft
end play.
1. Crankshaft gear 6. Seal retainer
2. Front oil seal 7. Gasket
3. Crankshaft pulley 8. Crankshaft
4. Main bearings 9. Gear timing pin
(upper halves) 10. Main bearings
5. Rear oil seal (lower halves)
30
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Standard main journal diameter is 3.8578-3.8588
inches (97.987-98.013 mm). Main bearing caps are
numbered one through seven and must be reinstalled
in correct position. Desired main bearing diametrical
clearance is 0.0026-0.0053 inch (0.066-0.134 mm).
Upper and lower bearing liners are not interchange-
able. Make certain the half containing the oil hole is
installed in block and that oil holes properly align.
Desired crankshaft end play is 0.006-0.013 inch
(0.157-0.334 mm). If, after installing new main bear-
ing liners, end play exceeds 0.015 inch (0.381 mm),
crankshaft should be renewed. Regrind or renew
crankshaft if out-of-round exceeds 0.0019 inch (0.050
mm) or if taper exceeds 0.0005 inch (0.013 mm).
Crankshaft removal is outlined in paragraph 36.
Main bearing liners can be renewed after removing
oil pan, oil pump inlet tube and bearing caps.
Main bearing liners are available in undersizes of
0.010,0.020,().030 and 0.040 inch (0.25,0.50,0.75 and
1.0 mm) as well as standard.
Main bearing cap screws are self-locking type and
can be reused. Tighten main bearing cap screws in
three stages. In the first stage, tighten to a torque of
37 ft.-lbs. (50 N.m). In second stage, tighten to a
torque of 88 ft.-lbs. (119 N.m). In third stage, tighten
to a torque of 129 ft.-lbs. (175 N.m).
OIL SPRAY NOZZLES
All Models
44. Engines are equipped with piston cooling spray
nozzles located in main bearing carriers in engine
block. All engines in Models 7110 and 7120, and early
Models 7130 and 7140 are equipped with six spray
nozzles. Later Models 7130 and 7140 engines are
equipped with 12 spray nozzles.
With crankshaft and main bearings removed, clean
oil spray nozzles with a wire. The spray nozzles need
not be removed unless they are damaged. When re-
newing spray nozzles, drive nozzles in until flange on
nozzles is seated.
CRANKSHAFT SEALS
All Models
45. FRONT. Tb renew the front crankshaft seal
(2—Fig 41), first remove timing gear cover as outlined
in paragraph 31. Then, drive seal from front cover.
Thoroughly clean seal and gasket mounting surfaces
of front cover and timing gear housing.
The front crankshaft seal is avaiiabie only In a kit
(Part No. J908139), which indudes the two installa-
tion toois.
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 46-48

Install two guide studs in the timing gear housing
and using a new gasket, slide cover in place. Install
cover retaining bolts, but do not tighten at this time.
Install seal driving tool over crankshaft and into front
cover with small diameter toward the engine. This
will center the cover with the crankshaft. Tighten
front cover cap screws to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24
N.m). Remove seal driver tool. Place new seal on the
seal protective tool. Apply Loctite 277 to outer diame-
ter of seal. Slide protective sleeve tool and seal on
crankshaft until seal contacts the cover. Remove pro-
tective sleeve and install seal driver tool. Drive seal
inward until outside diameter of installing tool con-
tacts front cover. This will be the correct installation
depth for the seal. Remove seal driver tool. If sealing
surface on crankshaft is worn or pitted, a wear ring
and installing tool kit (Part No. J908277) is available
for installation.
For the balance of reassembly, refer to paragraph
3L
46. REAR. To renew rear crankshaft seal (5—Fig.
41), first split tractor between engine and speed
transmission housing as outlined in paragraph 24.
Drain oil, then unbolt and remove oil pan. Refer to
Fig. 42 and remove drive plate (1),fl3rwheel(2), fly-
wheel housing (3) and "O" ring (6). Unbolt and remove
retainer (6—Fig. 41) with seal (5), then remove seal
from retainer. Clean gasket surfaces of retainer and
crankcase. Use Loctite safety solvent and clean
mounting surface of seal in retainer.
plate and tighten cap screws to a torque of 69-78
ft.-lbs. (94-106 N.m). Use new gasket and reinstall oil
pan.
Refer to paragraph 24 and reconnect tractor.
FLYWHEEL
All Models
47. To remove the flywheel (2—Fig. 42), first split
tractor between engine and speed transmission hous-
ing as outlined in paragraph 24. Remove drive plate
(1), then unbolt and remove flywheel.
The flywheel ring gear is a shrink fit on front of
flywheel. The manufacturer cautions against the use
of a torch or open flame for heating ring gear. Heat
the new ring gear to 400°-450° F (204°-232° C) in oil
or in an oven. Install gear on flywheel.
WARNiNG: Always wear heat protective gloves
when handiing heated parts.
Install flywheel and tighten the retaining cap
screws to a torque of 101 ft.-lbs. (137 N.m). Reassem-
ble tractor by reversing disassembly procedure.
OIL PAN AND OIL INLET TUBE
All Models

NOTE: The rear crankshaft seal is avaiiabie oniy 48. Tb remove the oil pan, remove drain plug and
in a kit (Part No. J909410), which inciudes two drain engine oil. On models equipped with front-
instailation toois. wheel drive, remove front drive shaft shield and drive
Install two guide studs in rear of crankcase. Using
a new gasket, slide seal retainer in place over guide
studs. Install retainer bolts, remove guide studs, but
do not tighten retainer bolts at this time. Install seal
driver tool into seal retainer with small diameter
toward engine. This will center the retainer with the
crsinkshaft. Tighten seal retainer cap screws to a
torque of 7 ft.-lbs. (9 N.m). Remove seal driver tool.
Slide protective sleeve tool with new seal over crank-
shaft until outer diameter of seal contacts seal re-
tainer. Remove protective sleeve and install seal
driver with small diameter toward the seal. Coat
outer diameter of seal with soap. Drive seal inward
until outer dieimeter of installing tool contacts seal
retainer. This will be the correct installation depth for
the seal. Remove seal driver tool.
If sealing surface on crankshaft is wom or pitted,
a wear ring and installing tool kit (Part No. J906081)
is available for installation.
Use new "O" ring (6—Fig. 42) and reinstall fljnvheel Fig, 42—View of flywheel housing and related parts,
housing. Tighten fl3rwheel housing bolts to a torque 1. Drive plate , 4. "O" ring
of 45 ft.-lbs. (60 N.m). Install flywheel and tighten 2. Flywheel 5. Flywheel rotating hole plug
bolts to a torque of 101 ft.-lbs. (137 N.m). Install drive 3. Flywheel housing 6. "O** ring

31

Paragraphs 49-50
shaft as outlined in paragraph 12. Unbolt and remove
oil pan, then unbolt and remove oil inlet tube.
Clean all surfaces of foreign material. Make certain
that strainer screen on inlet tube is clean. Using new
gasket, install oil inlet tube. Tighten retaining screws
to a torque of 7 ft.-lbs. (9 N.m). Install oil pan with
new gasket and tighten cap screws to a torque of 18
ft.-lbs. (24 N.m).
Fig, 43—With timing gear front cover removed, unbolt
and remove oil pump assembly.
Fig. 44^-Using a feeier gage, measure clearance be-
tween lobe on Inner rotor and lobe on outer rotor.
Fig, 45—Use tightening sequence shown when Install-
ing oil pump assembly.
32
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Reinstall front drive shaft and shield, if so
equipped, as outlined in paragraph 12. Fill oil pan
with new oil to proper level. Oil should have API
service classification CD or CE. Use SAE 20W-40 oil
in temperatures above 30° F (-1° C), SAE 15W-40 oil
in temperatures above 10° F (-12° C) or SAE lOW-30
oil in temperatures below 90° F (32° C). Capacity with
filler change is 22 quarts (21 L).
OIL PUMP
All Models
49. To remove the oil pump, first remove timing
gear cover as outlined in paragraph 31. With front
cover removed, unbolt and lift out pump assembly as
shown in Fig. 43. Place oil pump on a bench with gear
side down. Remove rear cover, then u^ing a feeler
gage, measure clearance between lobe on inner rotor
and lobe on outer rotor as shown in Fig. 44. If clear-
ance exceeds 0.0098 inch (0.25 mm), renew pump
assembly. Oil pump is serviced only as a complete
assembly.
When installing oil pump assembly, tighten the
four mounting bolts evenly to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs.
(24 N.m) following the sequence shown in Fig. 45. DO
NOT over tighten. A small clearance will exist be-
tween pump flange and cylinder block.
With oil pump installed, check backlash between
pump idler gear and crankshaft gear. If backlash
exceeds 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), renew pump assembly.
Refer to paragraphs 31 and 45 and reassemble
tractor.
OIL FILTER AND
PRESSURE REGULATOR
All Models
50. All engines are equipped with a full-flow, screw-
on oil filter (10—Fig. 46). Manufacturer recommends
changing the oil filter and engine oil every 250 hours
of operation. When installing new filter cartridge,
lubricate gasket on filter with clean oil. Turn filter
clockwise until gasket contacts filter head. Then,
hand tighten filter one-half turn.
The oil pressure regulator valve (6) is located in the
filter head (4). Remove plug (9) with gasket (8), spring
(7) and regulator valve (6). Free length of spring (7)
should be 3.41 inches (86.61 mm) and should test
38.8-42.6 lbs. (172.6-189.3 N) when compressed to a
length of 2.37 inches (60.3 mm). Inspect valve (6) and
renew if scored or pitted. When reinstalling, use new
gasket (8) and tighten plug (9) to a torque of 60 ft.-lbs.
(80 N.m). Oil pressure should be 43-54 psi (296-372
kPa) with engine warm and operating at 2200 rpm.
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 51-54

ENGINE OIL COOLER
All Models
51. The engine oil cooler (2—Fig. 46) is located in
right side of engine block behind the oil filter head (4).
TD remove the oil cooler, drain cooling system and
remove oil filter cartridge. Disconnect the turbo-
charger oil supply line. Unbolt and remove filter head
(4) and gasket (3). Remove oil cooler (2) and gasket
(1).
Clean all surfaces of foreign material. Cleaning
procedure for the oil cooler consists of flushing the oil
circuit with clean solvent and removing scale or rust
from exterior of cooling plates.
Using new gaskets, reinstall by reversing the re-
moval procedure. Tighten filter head retaining cap
screws (5) to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m).

DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM

Models 7110,7120 and 7130 are equipped with
Robert Bosch Model PS6A injection pumps.
Model 7140 is equipped with a Robert Bosch
Model PS6MW ii^ection pump. Robert Bosch
multihole ii\jector nozzles are used on all mod-
els.
FUEL, FUEL FILTERS AND
TRANSFER PUMP
each morning and drain any accumulated water from
fuel tank.
Tb renew the filters, first clean filter head, elements
and surrounding area. Shut off fuel valve at tank and
remove water bleed screw from primary filter (P).
Using a clamp-type filter wrench, unscrew and re-
move filters.

All Models
52. FUEL. The manufacturer recommends using a
good grade of No. 2 diesel fuel, with a Cetane rating
of 43 or better, for normal operation. For cold weather
operation, Cetane rating should be 45-55 and fuel
pour point should be at least -15° F (-26° C).

53. TRANSFER PUMP. A plunger-type fuel

transfer pump (7—Fig. 47) is located on left side of
cylinder block.This unit pumps the fuel through the
two filters and on to the diesel injection pump. The
transfer pump is operated by an eccentric lobe on
engine camshaft. A thumb push button actuates the
pump when bleeding air from fuel system.
Ib remove the transfer pump, shut ofFfiiel at tank
valve and disconnect supply line from pump. Discon-
nect outlet line from pump, remove cap screws (6) and
withdraw pump from engine. The transfer pump is
serviced only as a complete unit.
Use new gasket (8) when installing pump and
tighten cap screws (6) to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24
N.m).

54. FUEL FILTERS. Filters are the screw-on type

(Fig. 47). Filters are available in a kit that consists of
both units, and both should be renewed every 500 Fig. 46—Exploded view of engine oil cooler, oil filter
hours of operation or when noticeable loss of power head and relative components.
occurs. Primary filter (P) is equipped with a water 1. Gasket 7. Spring
bleed screw. Each morning before operating tractor, 2. Oil cooler 8. Gasket
loosen water bleed screw and drain off any water from 3. Gasket 9. Regulator valve plug
4. Filter head 10. Filter cartridge
primary filter. Retighten screw. There is also a water 5. Cap screw (11) < 11- Filter adapter
drain valve in the bottom of thefizeltank. Open valve 6. Regulator valve 12. Cold oil relief valve

33
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraphs 55-57 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Lightly oil gaskets on new filters and turn filters
clockwise until gaskets contact filter head (3). Then,
hand tighten filters one-half to three-quarters of a
turn. DO NOT over tighten. Bleed air from system as
outlined in paragraph 55.
55. BLEED SYSTEM. To bleed fiiel system, make
certadn there is fuel in the tank and that shut off valve
at tank is open. Loosen the air bleed screw (Fig. 48)
and operate thumb push button on transfer (primer)
pump until air-free fuel flows from bleed screw open-
ing. Close the air bleed screw. Loosen the fuel return
line fitting at left front side of injection pimip. On
Model 7140, also loosen bleed screw on the inner front
side of injection pump. Operate thumb push button
on transfer pump until clear fuel with no air bubbles
flows from fitting and bleed screw. Tighten return line
fitting and bleed screw, if so equipped.

INJECTION PUMP

All Models
56. LUBRICATION. The fiiel injection pump is
lubricated with the engine oil through a port in the
timing gear housing. An "O" ring is used to seal the
port to the injection pump housing.

57. R&R AND TIME PUMP. Tb adjust injection

pump timing, remove pump as follows: Raise hood
and remove left side panel. Disconnect and remove
high-pressure injection lines. Immediately cap or
plug all openings to prevent entrance of foreign ma-
terial into system. Shut off fuel at tank, then discon-
nect and remove fuel return line and pump supply
line. Disconnect wire, then unbolt and remove fuel
shut-off solenoid. Disconnect throttle cable at injec-
tion pump. Remove the access plug from timing gear
front cover. Working through the access hole, remove
pump shaft nut and lockwasher. Remove plug from
left front side of flywheel housing and install flywheel
rotating tool CAS-1690. Rotate flywheel in normal
direction of rotation and push inward on timing lock
Fig. 47—Screw-on fuel fiiters are used on ali tractors. pin. See Fig. 49. When lock pin is engaged in hole in
Fiiter head (3) is secured to flange on cylinder head by camshaft gear, engine will be locked with No. 1 piston
adapter tube (5) and nut (4). at TDC on compression stroke. Working through ac-
p. Primary filter 4. Nut cess hole in front cover, use gear puller CAS-1691 or
S. Secondary filter 5. Adapter tube equivalent and pull gear until it is loose on pump
1. ^O"ring 6. Cap screw (2)
2. "O" ring 7. Transfer pump shaft. Check for alignment marks on pump flange and
3. Filter head 8. Gasket timing gear housing. If no marks are visible, install

taw AIR REMOVAL SCREV*

n
Fig, 48—View showing iocation of transfer (primer) _ 4g—Yi0w of timing lock pin iocated in timing gear
pump and air removal screw. housing directly below fuel injection pump.

34
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 58

match m£irks for pump alignment. Unbolt and re- except for minor speed adjustments, governor service
move injection pump and remove puller from pump should be done at an authorized diesel service shop.
drive gear. Remove pump timing pin cover (1—Fig. Recommended governed speeds for all models are
51) and timing pin (3) from left side of pump. Rotate as follows:
pump shaft until the timing tab is visible in timing
pin hole. Reverse the pin and install with long end Low idle 825-875 rpm
inward. See Fig. 50. When slot in long end of timing ffigh idle (no load) 2315-2395 rpm
pin engages tab in pump, injection pump is locked in Rated (loaded) speed 2200 rpm
time for No. 1 cylinder. Install pump timing pin cover
and tighten finger tight. To adjust governed speeds, first make certain that
Install new oil port "O" ring (5—Fig. 51) and pump throttle cable is correctly adjusted to fully open and
flange "O" ring (6) on pump. Make certain the timing close governor control lever on pump. Turn stop
lock pin is engaged in hole in camshaft gear and that screws (HS and IS—Fig. 52) to adjust high and low
pump timing pin has pump locked in time. Install idle speeds.
pump, aligning the match marks on pump flange and
timing gear housing. Tighten pump retaining nuts to
a torque of 32 ft.-lbs. (43 N.m).

NOTE: Inside diameter of pump drive gear is

tapered to fit the injection pump siiaft. There is no
key slot in the pump drive gear. 1 2 3

Install lockwasher (8) and nut (9) on pump shaft.

Tighten nut a small amount. Remove pump timing
pin cover (1) and timing pin (3). Reverse the timing
pin and install in pump short end first. Use new seal
washer (2) and install and tighten timing pin cover to
a torque of 11 ft.-lbs. (15 N.m). Pull lock pin out of
camshaft gear. Remove flywheel rotation tool and
install plug in fljrwheel housing. Then, tighten pump
drive gear nut to a torque of 60 ft.-lbs. (81 N.m) on
Models 7110, 7120 and 7130 or 66 ft.-lbs. (90 N.m) on
Model 7140. Install access plug in timing gear front
cover. Install fuel shut-off solenoid and throttle cable. Fig. 51—View of injection pump and reiative compo-
Install fuel return line and fuel supply line. Install nents.
high-pressure injection lines. Turn fdel shut-off valve 1. Timing pin cover
2. Seal washer 7. Pump drive gear
at tank fiilly on, then bleed fuel system as outlined in 3. Timing pin 8. Lockwasher
paragraph 55. 4. Injection pump 9. Nut
5. Oil port "O" ring 10. Shut-off solenoid
6. Flange "O" ring 11. Bracket
58. PUMP SPEED ADJUSTMENT. The diesel
governor is an integral part of injection pump and.

Fig. 52—Location of diesel Injection pump speed ad-

justments.
Fig. 50--View of injection pump timing lock pin. When HS. High idle speed screw
slot In long end of pin engages tab in pump. Injection IS. LfOw idle speed screw
pump is locked in time for No, 1 cylinder. TPC. Timing lock pin cover

35
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraphs 59-62 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

NOTE: Adjustment of fuel pump beyond factory
specifications wili void the warranty on tractor.
INJECTOR NOZZLES
All Models
All tractors Eire equipped with Robert Bosch fuel
injectors shown in Figs. 53 and 54.
59. LOCATING AFAULTYNOZZLE. If rough or
uneven engine operation or misfiring indicate a faulty
injector, defective unit can usually be located as fol-
lows:
With engine operating at speed where malfunction
is most noticeable (usually slow-idle speed), loosen
compression nut at high-pressure line at each injector
in turn and listen for change in engine performance.
As in checking spark plugs, faulty unit is one that,
when its line is loosened, least affects engine opera-
tion.
If a faulty nozzle is found and considerable time has
elapsed since injectors have been serviced, it is rec-
ommended that all nozzles be removed and checked
or that new or reconditioned units be installed. Refer
to appropriate following paragraphs for removal and
test procedures.
60. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Clean the area
around the fuel injectors. On Model 7140, drain cool-
ing system, then ixnbolt and remove after cooler. On
all models, unbolt injection lines bracket. Loosen
injection line tube nut at pump, then disconnect line
from injector. Unbolt leak-off line from injector. Cap
or plug all openings. Remove injector clamp and bolt,
then using special tool CAS 1815 and slide hammer,
remove injector.
Make sure injector seal ring (11—Fig. 53) is re-
moved with injector. If not, use a suitable tool or wire
to remove the seal ring from the bore. Remove seal
sleeve from injector. Remove the remainder of injec-
tors using the same procedure. Clean bores for injec-
tors using special tool CAS-1858.
Install new seal sleeve (10) and seal ring (11),
reinstall injector. Install injector clamp and bolt and
tighten to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Using new
connector seal (1), install leak-offline and tighten bolt
to a torque of 7 ft.-lbs. (9 N.m). Install and tighten
injection line. On Model 7140, install after cooler and
fill cooling system. Then, on all models, start engine.
If engine fails to start, loosen injection line nuts at
injectors. Turn key switch and crank engine until
diesel fuel leaks at loosened connections. Tighten line
nuts and start engine.

61. TESTING. Acomplete job of testing and adjust-

ing an injector nozzle requires use of special test
Fig. 53—Exploded view of Robert Bosch diesel fuel In- equipment, such as test stand part number CAS-
jector. 10091 shown in Fig. 55. Only clean diesel fuel or
1. Connector seal approved testing oil should be used in tester tank.
2. Injector body 7. Valve
3. Shim 8. Nozzle tip The nozzle should be tested for opening pressure, seat
4. Spring 9. Cap nut leakage and spray pattern. When tested, nozzle
5. Spring seat 10. Seal sleeve should open with a sharp popping or buzzing sound
6. Valve stop 11. Seal ring and cut off quickly at end of injection with a minimum
of seat leakage and a controlled amount of back
OfEMNO PRESSURE CONTROL SPMNO leakage. Check as outlined in the following para-
graphs:

WARNING: Fuei ieaves nozzie tip with sufficient

force to penetrate the sicin. Keep hands away from
nozzie tip when testing.
H4JECTOR VALVE

Fig. 54—Cross-sectional view of diesel fuel Injector as- 62. OPENING PRESSURE. Before conducting
sembly. test, operate tester until fuel flows, then attach injec-

36
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 63-65

tor to tester using correct adapter. Close valve to
tester gage and pump tester lever a few quick strokes
to be sure that nozzle is not plugged and that all four
spray holes are open.
Open valve to tester gage and operate tester until
fuel flows, then observe gage reading. Opening pres-
sure should be 2722-3084 psi (18768-21263 kPa).
NOTE: When testing ail the injectors in an en-
gine, there must not be more than 150 psi (1034
kPa) difference between any of the injectors.
If opening pressure is not as specified, disassemble
injector as outlined in paragraph 65 and vary shims
(3—Fig. 53) as required. Shims are available in 30
thicknesses ranging from 0.039 inch (1.0 mm) to 0.078
inch (1.98 mm). The opening pressure is changed
about 55 psi (379 kPa) for each 0.001 inch (0.0254
mm) of shim thickness that is added or removed.
NOTE: if adjusting a new injector, or a used
injector with a new spring (4), opening pressure
shouid be 2968-3084 psi (20464-21263 icPa).
63. SPRAY PATTERN. Close the valve to tester
gage and operate tester handle at approximately 60
strokes per minute. Four finely atomized conical
sprays should be emitted from injector tip. If spray is
solid, streaky or irregular, disassemble and overhaul
injector as outlined in paragraph 65.
64. SEAT LEAKAGE. Point injector tip downward
and operate tester rapidly to be sure nozzle valve is
seated. Dry injector tip, then operate tester slowly to
raise gage pressure to within 100 psi (690 kPa) under
the opening pressure. Maintain this pressure for five
seconds and observe the injector tip. If nozzle is in
good condition, there should be no fuel accumulation
in the five-second period although a slight dampness
is permissible. If fuel drips or a visible drop forms,
renew injector or overhaul as outlined in paragraph
65.
Nozzle valve (7) and tip (8) are a matched set and
parts should never be intermixed. Keep parts for each
injector separate and immersed in clean diesel fuel or
solvent in a compartmented pan as injector is disas-
sembled.
A brass wire brush can be used to clean exterior
surfaces of nozzle valve and tip. Clean nozzle spray
orifices using cleaning wires 0.0005-0.001 inch
(0.0127-0.0254 mm) smaller than orifice holes. Ori-
fice holes are 0.011 inch (0.28 mm). Each nozzle
contains four spray orifices. Use compressed air to
clean ducts in nozzle body and a reverse flow of air
through tip end of nozzle is recommended. Clean
nozzle valve seat area with a brush. If necessary to
remove varnish, use solvent and a felt cleaning pad.
Make sure that nozzle valve (7) slides freely in valve
tip (8). Renew any parts that are scratched, scored,
eroded or show signs of any other damage.
Reassemble injector as follows: Be sure parts are
wet with diesel fuel and install adjusting shims (3),
spring (4) and spring seat (5) with small diameter side
toward spring. Align dowel pins in valve stop (6) with
dowel holes in body (2) and install valve stop. Install
valve and tip assembly (7 and 8) on valve stop, apply
Lubriplate to shoulder only of nozzle tip, then install
cap nut (9). Clamp flats of injector body (2) in an
injector holder in a vise and tighten cap nut to a
torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m).
Recheck injector opening pressure and, if neces-
sary, readjust opening pressure as outlined in para-
graph 62.

65. OVERHAUL. Soak injector in a carbon-remov-

ing solvent and clean outside of injector thoroughly.
Clamp flats of injector body (2—Fig. 53) in an injector
holder in a vise so injector tip is pointing upward. Use
a box wrench to remove cap nut (9) and BE SURE that
nozzle valve tip (8) does not turn with cap nut. If
nozzle valve tip does turn with cap nut, dowels and/or
valve stop (6) will be damaged. Return nozzle assem-
bly to solvent if nozzle tip is stuck to cap nut.
With cap nut removed, nozzle tip (8) with valve (7),
valve stop (6), spring seat (5), spring (4) and shim (3)
can be removed from body (2). Note number and
thickness of shims (3) removed for aid in reassembly.
Shims are available in 30 thicknesses ranging from
0.039 inch (1.0 mm) to 0.078 inch (1.98 mm). Fig. 55—CAS'1OO91 diesel fuel injection nozzie tester.

37

Paragraphs 66-69
FUEL SHUT-OFF SOLENOID
All Models
66. To remove the fuel shut-off solenoid (10—Fig.
51), disconnect electrical plug, then unbolt solenoid
from mounting bracket (11).
Reinstall solenoid and tighten retaining bolts se-
curely. Connect electrical plug.
All models are equipped with an automatic shut-
down system. If engine oil pressure or transmission
oil pressure is too low or if transmission oil tempera-
ture or engine coolant temperature is too high, 30
seconds after alarm sounds, current will shut off to
solenoid and engine will shut down. Refer to appro-
priate paragraphs in ELECTRICAL SYSTEM sec-
tion.
ETHER STARTING AID
All Models
67. On all diesel engines, it may be necessary to use
ether as a starting aid at temperatures of 20°
DIESEL TURBOCHARGER
A Holset turbocharger is used on all models. Refer
to Fig. 56. The unit mounts on exhaust manifold and
uses exhaust pressure to slightly compress the intake
air.
All Models
68. OPERATION. Exhaust gas energy turns the
turbine wheel at varying speeds ranging from a few
thousand to 125,000 rpm, depending on engine speed
and load. The compressor wheel supplies air to the
intake manifold (6—Fig. 56) on Models 7110, 7120
and 7130 or to the after cooler (1) on Model 7140 at
or above normal atmospheric pressure. The addi-
tional air entering combustion chamber permits an
increase in amount of fuel burned, and increased
power output over an engine of comparable size not
so equipped.
The use of engine exhaust to power the compressor
increases engine flexibility, enabling it to perform
with the economy of a small engine on light loads yet
permitting substantial horsepower increase at full
load. Horsepower loss because of altitude or atmos-
pheric pressure changes is also largely eliminated.
Turbine shaft bearings are floating sleeve type and
unit is lubricated and cooled by a flow of engine oil
under pressure.
All diesel engines operate with an excess of air
under light loads. In a naturally aspirated engine.
38
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
C) or lower. Ether can is located in front of tractor
radiator.
To test the ether spray pattern, disconnect ether
spray nozzle from intake manifold. Press ether injec-
tor button on dash and observe spray pattern. A good
spray pattern is cone shaped. Dribbling or no spray
indicates a blocked spray nozzle or lack of ether
pressure. Clean spray nozzle or install new can of
ether as needed.
Ib change ether container, loosen adjusting nut
until container can be removed. Install new container
in the bail and tighten adjusting nut while guiding
container into proper position. Rotate container to
make certain it is seated properly in injector body,
then firmly tighten adjusting nut.
NOTE: in warm temperatures, the base shouid be
piaced in the storage position or an empty ether can
shouid be installed in the injector ixxly.
most of the air is used at full load and increasing
amount of fuel results in a higher smoke level with
little increase in power output. Turbocharging pro-
vides a variation of air delivery and a turbocharged
engine operates with an excess of air up to or beyond
designed capacity of engine. When more fuel is pro-
vided, the turbocharger speed and air delivery in-
crease, resulting in additional horsepower and heat
with little change in smoke level. Smoke, therefore,
cannot be used as an accurate guide to safe maximum
fiiel setting for a turbocharged engine. Refer to appro-
priate following paragraphs for R&R and overhaul
procedures.
69. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the
turbocharger (11—Fig.56), first raise hood and re-
move side panels. Disconnect air cleaner restriction
sending unit wire. Disconnect air tubes, then unbolt
and remove strata tube and air cleaner assembly.
Loosen clamps on aspirator tube coupling and remove
the tube. Remove pyrometer from exhaust elbow (8).
Disconnect exhaust tubes, then unbolt and remove
muffler assembly. Unbolt and remove air cleaner and
muffler support. Disconnect oil supply and drain
tubes from turbochargo", then unbolt and remove
turbocharger from exhaust manifold (13).
When reinstalling, use new gasket (14) and tighten
turbocharger mounting nuts to a torque of 24 ft.-lbs.
(32 N.m). Install new gasket on oil drain line (12) and
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 70

tighten bolts to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Install
oil supply tube (10) and tighten securely. Complete
installation by reversing removal procedure.
Turbocharger MUST be primed after installation
as follows: Disconnect plug for fuel shut-off solenoid
wire. Turn key switch and crank engine for approxi-
mately 30 seconds. Reconnect solenoid wire and set
speed control lever to one-third speed position. Start
engine and operate at 1000 rpm for about two min-
utes to supply normal lubrication to the turbocharger.
Then, increase engine speed to 1800 rpm until normal
oil pressure indicator assures proper oil pressure.
CAUTION: Do not rest weight of any parts on
compressor wiieei or turbine wheei blades. Weight
of only the turbocharger unit is enough to damage
the blades.
Remove clamp (2), then lift off compressor housing
(1). Straighten tabs of lock plates (23) and remove cap
screws (24) with lock plates and clamp plates (22).
Lift center housing assembly from turbine housing
(21). Place turbine wheel end of center housing as-
sembly in a holding fixture to prevent turbine shaft
from turning and remove nut (3).

NOTE: Use a "T" iiandle or a double universal

70. OVERHAUL. With turbocharger removed as
outlined in paragraph 69, place match marks across
compressor housing (1—Fig. 57) and back plate (5),
across back plate and center housing (15) and across
center housing and turbine housing (21) for aid in
correct assembly.
joint socket to remove the LEFT-HAND THREAD
compressor wheei nut (3).
Remove compressor wheel (4), then remove center
housing assembly from turbine shaft. Remove heat

10

Fig. 57'-Exploded view ofHolset turbocharger assem-

bly used on all models.
1. Compressor housing
Fig. 56—View of turbocharger and relative compo- 2. Clamp 15. Center housing
nents. Items 1,2 and 3 are used on Model 7140 and 3. Nut 16. Snap rings
4. Compressor wheel 17. Bearing
Items 4, 5 and 6 are used on Models 7110, 7120 and 5. Back plate 18. Heat shield
7130. 6. Seal ring 19. Split ring seal
1. After cooler 7. Split ring seal 20. Turbine wheel & shaft
2. Hose 9. Hose 8. Oil slinger 21. Turbine housing
3. Air tube 10. Oil supply line 9. Oil baffle 22. Clamp plate
4. Air tube elbow 11. Turbocharger 10. Tbrx screw (3) 23. Lock plate
5. Hose .. 12. Oil drain tube 11. Thrust bearing 24. Cap screw
6. Intake manifold cover ' 13. Exhaust manifold 12. Thrust collar 25. Gasket
7. Elbow support ' 14. Gasket 13. Snap rings 26. Cap screw
8. Exhaust outlet elbow ^ 15. Clamping seal 14. Bearing 27. Lock plate

39

Paragraph 71
shield (18) and split seal ring (19) from turbine shaft.
Straighten tabs of lock plates (27), remove cap screws
(26) and lock plates, then remove center housing from
back plate (5).
Remove oil baffle (9) and seal ring (6) from back
plate. Remove oil slinger (8) from back plate and split
seal ring (7)fromoil slinga". Remove Tbrx head screws
(10), then remove thrust bearing (11) and thrust
collar (12). Remove outer snap rings (13 and 16) from
each end of center housing and using a wire hook, pull
bearings (14 and 17) from center housing. Remove
inner snap rings (13 and 16) from housing.
Clean all parts in a suitable carbon-softening sol-
vent. A stiff brush and plastic or wood scraper should
he used after deposits have softened. When cleaning,
use extreme caution to prevent parts from being
nicked, scratched or bent.
Inspect turbine housing (21) outlet opening for
warping or cracking. Check compressor housing (1)
and back plate (5) for wheel friction wear. Inspect
turbine shaft for grooves or scratches and turbine
wheel and compressor wheel for bent or cracked
blades or other damage. Check heat shield (18) and
oil slinger (8) for damage and center housing (15)
bearing surfaces for scoring or scratches. If any of
these parts are damaged, renew turbocharger as they
are not serviced separately. A kit consisting of the
11
Fig. 58—View of after cooler and relative parts used on
Model 7140 tractors.
1. Hose 8. Hose
2. Air tube 9. Elbow connector
3. Hose 10. Retainer
4. After cooler 11. Exhaust manifold
5. Hose 12. Gasket
6. Outlet tube 13. Manifold gasket (6)
7. Inlet tube 14. Drain valve
40
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
following parts is available for cleaning and servicing
the turbocharger: nut (3), seal ring (6), split ring seals
(7 and 19), Tbrx head screws (10), thrust bearing (11),
snap rings (13 and 16), bearings (14 and 17), lock
plates (23 and 27), cap screws (24 and 26) and gasket
(25).
Lubricate all parts with clean engine oil and reas-
semble by reversing the disassembly procedure.
When installing snap rings (13 and 16), make sure
round edge of snap rings face the bearings. When
installing nut (3), use a double universal joint socket
and tighten to a torque of 120 in.-lbs. (14 N»m). Other
tightening torques are as follows: center housing to
back plate cap screws (26), 48 in.-lbs. (6 N.m); Ibrx
head screws (10), 36 in.-lbs. (5 N.m); center housing
to turbine housing cap screws (24), 96 in.-lhs. (11
N.m).
With unit reassembled, use a dial indicator and
check turbine shaft horizontal end play, which should
be 0.0039-0.0063 inch (0.10-0.16 mm). If shaft end
play exceeds 0.0063 inch (0.16 mm), thrust collar (12)
and/or thrust bearing (11) is worn excessively. End
play of less than 0.0039 inch (0.10 mm), indicates
incomplete cleaning (carbon not all removed) or dirty
assembly. Unit must be disassembled and recleaned.
Reinstall turbocharger, then prime turbocharger as
outlined in paragraph 69.
AFTER COOLER
Model 7140
71. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. 1b remove the
after cooler (4—Fig. 58), drain cooling system and
remove air cleaner and muffler. Open drain valve (14)
and drain after cooler. Loosen clamps on hoses (1 and
3) and remove air tube (2). Loosen hose clamps and
disconnect outlet and inlet tubes (6 and 7) from after
cooler. Unbolt injection line bracket and support.
Unbolt and remove after cooler (4) and gasket (12).
After cooler can be air checked under water if air
pressure is controlled at 18 psi (125 kPa). If air leaks
are visible, renew after cooler.
Clean mounting surfaces of after cooler and cylin-
der head of all foreign material. Using a new gasket
(12), install after cooler. Coat threads of cap screws
with Loctite liquid Teflon, then install and tighten cap
screws to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Follow
tightening sequence shown in Fig. 59. Complete in-
BOLT TORQUE SEQUENCE
Fig. 59—Bolt torque sequence for after cooler used on
Model 7140 tractors.
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 72-73

stallation by reversing the removal procedure. When 35 psi (242 kPa). Make sure the check valve is free
refilling cooling system, loosen bleed valve (14) to and operating correctly. Move or rotate the strata
remove air from after cooler. tube. If you hear flap valve movement, valve is free
and will operate satisfactorily. If flap valve does not
move, renew the strata tube assembly.
AIR CLEANER SYSTEM
All Models
COOLING SYSTEM
72. FILTERS. All models are equipped with a
dry-type air cleaner. See Fig. 60. The secondary RADIATOR
(safety) filter should be renewed each 1000 hours of
operation. DO NOT attempt to clean the secondary
element. Ali Models
The large primary filter element can be cleaned by
directing compressed air into inside of element. Air 73. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. To remove the
pressure must not exceed 35 psi (242 kPa). An ele- radiator, drain cooling system and disconnect front
ment cleaning solution, part No. A40910, is available. wiring harness. Remove hood, side panels and grille.
Renew primary element after four cleanings. Disconnect air intake duct. Disconnect upper and
lower radiator hoses, coolant air bleed hose and cool-
Tractor is equipped with an air filter restriction ant recovery hose. Disconnect ether starting hne from
switch and warning lamp on the digital instrument intake manifold. Remove hoses from clip on radiator,
cluster, which will indicate when primary element then remove air conditioning condenser and lay back
needs servicing.
An aspirated strata tube acts as an air pre-cleaner.
Air is sucked from strata tube check valve, along with
any dust, then through the aspirator tube to the
muffler and out with exhaust gas. Remove the strata
tube and blow clean with compressed air regulated at

Am CUEANER COVER

PRIMARY ELEMENT

SEOONOARYELBMEKT

Fig. 61—Exploded view of typical exhaust pipe and

muffler used on all models.
EXHAUST TliBE
1. Muffler 7. Extension pipe
2. Clamp bracket 8. Lower exhaust elbow
3. Air cleaner & 9. Shield
miiffler support 10. Bracket
4. TUrbocharger elbow 11. Clamp bracket
Fig. 60—Exploded view of air cleaner system used on 5. Elbow support 12. Exhaust ejector tube
all models. 6. Bracket 13. Muffler outlet elbow

41
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraphs 74-75 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

on top of engine. Identify and disconnect oil cooler
lines and remove oil cooler. Attach a hoist with lift
straps to radiator support. Unbolt radiator support
from front support and tilt radiator forward to clear
fan as the assembly is removed. Unbolt and remove
upper air baffle and fan shroud. Unbolt and remove
radiator from support.
Reinstall by reversing the removal procedure.
Make certain that all foam rubber seals and pads are
correctly installed in their original positions. Tighten
the five bolts securing the radiator support to the
front support to a torque of 34-38 ft.-lbs. (46-52 N.m).
Refill radiator with coolant. On Model 7140, loosen
bleed valve on after cooler to remove air trapped in
aft;er cooler. Coolant capacity is 30 U.S. quarts (28.6
L) on Models 7110, 7120 and 7130 and 31 U.S. quarts
(29.3 L) on Model 7140.
A 15 psi (103 kPa) radiator cap is used on all
models. Refer to paragraph 78 for coolant recommen-
dations.

FAN

All Models

74. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Ib remove the

fan (3—Fig. 62), raise hood and remove right side
panel. Raise belt tensioner (9) and remove fan belt
(7). Remove the four bolts (5), move fan and viscous
drive (6) forward and remove spacer (4) and pulley
(2). Lift fan and viscous drive from tractor. Remove
six nuts (17) and washers and separate fan from
viscous drive. Remove four holts (16) and remove fan
bracket assembly (1) if necessary.
Fig. 62—View showing fan, water pump and belt ten- Reinstall fan by reversing removal procedure.
sioner and relative components. Water pump (13) and Tighten fan bracket bolts (16) to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs.
pulley (15) are available only as an assembly.
(24 N.m) and fan mounting bolts (5) to a torque of 32
1. Fan mounting bracket
2. Fan pulley 10. Bracket bolt (2)
ft.-lbs. (43 N.m).
3. Fan 11. Bracket
4. Spacer . 12. "O" ring
5. Bolt (4) 13. Water pump BELT TENSIONER
6. Viscous fan drive 14. Bolt (3)
7. Fan belt 15. Pulley
8. Tfensioner bolt 16. Bolt (4) All Models
9. Belt tensioner 17. Nut (6)
75. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the
belt tensioner (9—Fig. 62), raise hood and remove
right side panel. Raise belt tensioner and remove fan
belt. Remove bolt (8) and lift out belt tensions:*. Re-
move the two bolts (10) and remove tensioner mount-
ing bracket (11) if necessary.
Reinstall bracket and tighten bolts (10) to a torque
of 18ft.-lbs.(24 N.m). Install tensioner (9) and tighten
bolt (8) to a torque of 32 ft.-lbs. (43 N.m).
Before installing fan belt, refer to Fig. 63 and check
belt tensioner as follows: Using a torque wrench, raise
tensioner pulley about 45 degrees from perpendicu-
lar. Then lower tensioner pulley to 35 degrees from
perpendicular and check torque reading. Torque
reading should he 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). If torque read-
DEGREES ing is less than 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m), renew belt ten-
sioner.
Fig. 63—View showing tension check of fan belt ten-
sioner. Refer to text. Raise tensioner and install fan belt.
42
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 76-79

WATER PUMP and clean water and add one pint (0.45 L) of condi-
tioner part No. 331-509. This will protect the system
to a temperature of-34° F (-37° C). On Model 7140,
All Models
open air bleed valve on after cooler. On all models, fill
radiator with coolant solution. Close bleed valve on
76. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the
after cooler, if so equipped. Fill coolant recovery res-
water pump (13—Fig. 62), raise hood and remove
ervoir to the FULL mark with coolant solution. In-
right side panel. Drgiin cooling system. Raise belt
stall radiator cap and coolant recovery reservoir cap.
tensioner (9) and remove fan belt (7). Unbolt alterna-
Start engine and operate until warm. Stop engine
tor lower brace, then unbolt and remove water pump
and allow coolant to cool. Check coolant level in
assembly. Water pump (13) and pulley (15) are serv-
recovery reservoir only. Add coolant to reservoir to
iced only as an assembly.
bring level to FULL mark. Do not remove radiator
Clean mounting surfaces, install new "O" ring (12) cap.
and reinstall water pump assembly, lighten water
pump retaining bolts to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24
N.m). Raise belt tensioner and reinstall fan belt.
Refill cooling system. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
THERMOSTATS
BATTERIES
All Models
All Models
77. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove
thermostats (10—Fig. 64), first remove belt tensioner 79. Two 12 volt, 950 CCA, Group size 31 batteries,
and bracket as outlined in paragraph 75. Drain cool- connected in parallel, are used on all models. Electri-
ing system and remove upper radiator hose. Discon- cal system is negative ground type.
nect wiring, then unbolt and remove alternator.
Unbolt and remove alternator bracket (6) and coolant
outlet tube (1). Remove coolant filter (7). Unbolt and
remove thermostat housing (5). Remove thermostats.
Before installation of thermostats (10), test both
thermostats for correct opening temperatures.
Thermostats should start to open at 181^ F (83° C)
and be fully open at 203° F (95° C).
Use new gaskets (9 and 2) and reinstall thermo-
stats by reversing removal procedure. Tighten
thermostat housing and coolant outlet tube bolts to a
torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Refer to paragraph 78
for coolant filter installation.

COOLANT, FILTER AND CONDITIONER

All Models
78. The cooling system is equipped with a filtration
system designed to prolong internal engine life and
to increase cooling efficiency. Coolant filter (7—Fig.
64) should be changed every 250 hours of operation.
Tb change the filter, tum shut-off valve (3) to off
position. Use a filter wrench to unscrew filter. Lubri-
cate the gasket on new filter and tum filter on adapt-
er (8) until gasket makes contact. Tighten the filter Fig. 64—View of thermostat, thermostat housing, cool'
an additional one-half to three-quarter tum. Do not ant filter and relative components.
over tighten. Open shut-off valve. 1. Coolant outlet tube 7. Coolant filter
The manvifacturer recommends that engine coolant 2. Gasket 8. Filter adapter
be changed every 2000 hours or at least every two 3. Shut-off valve ; 9. Gasket
4. "O"ring 10. Thermostat (2)
years. Any time cooling system is drained, refill sys- 5. Thermostat housing 11. Air vent check valve
tem as follows: Use a 50:50 mixture of ethylene glycol 6. Altemator mounting bracket 12. Hose connector

43

Paragraphs 80-85
Before any electrical system service is performed,
a thorough check of battery condition, condition of
cable connections and condition and tightness of al-
ternator drive belt should be made.
Batteries should be checked for total voltage and
voltage drop under rated load. If battery voltage is
excessively low, they should be recharged to rated
level using an external battery charga*. Failure to do
so can cause alternator to overheat, resulting in pre-
mature failure of altemator, regulator or both.
All relative connections should be checked for ex-
cessive resistance, using an ohmmeter.
80. BATTERY CURRENT DRAIN TEST. If after
checking, servicing and installing batteries, they re-
turn to an undercharged condition when tractor is not
in use, current drain should be suspected. Tb check,
disconnect negative battery cables at chassis ground
and connect an ammeter lead to chassis ground and
the other lead to negative cable ends. Make sure all
electrical systems are off. Any reading on ammeter
indicates current leakage. Check for lights, radio or
accessories being on, or shorted electrical wiring or
components.
CHARGING SYSTEM
All Models
81. TESTING. Prior to beginning test, be sure
batteries are fully charged, all connections are clean
and tight and altemator drive belt is in good condition
and under correct tension.
CAUTION: Do not disconnect any wires from
aiternator whiie engine is running as damage to
alternator may result.
Alternator warning light should not come on when
key switch is in OFF position. If hght fails to go out
when key is in OFF position, test circuits as outlined
in paragraph 82.
Normal operation of altemator warning light is to
come on only when key switch is in ACC or ON
position, engine NOT running. If engine is started
while throttle is in low idle position, light may stay
on until engine speed is increased for the first time.
Light should not come on at any time after engine is
running and initial engine speed increase was suffi-
cient to shut light off. If operation of warning light is
not normal, test circuits as outlined in paragraph 82.
82. WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT TEST. If warning
light fails to go out with key switch in OFF position,
disconnect wire from B+ terminal on alternator. If
light goes out when B+ wire is disconnected, rectifier
bridge in alternator is defective and must be renewed.
44
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
If light stays on after disconnecting wire firom B+
terminal on alternator, there is an electrical short
between wires at some place in wiring harness. Check
wire insulation for damage.
If the light fails to come on with the key switch in
ACC or ON position, engine NOT running, check for
a break in the circuit to the instrument cluster or an
open circuit in the regulator or altemator. Check for
the problem as follows: Tfest the voltage at key switch.
If voltage is not approximately 12 volts, check for
continuityfi:'omB+ terminal on altemator to the key
switch. If this circuit is good, check batteries. If volt-
age at key switch is 12 volts, connect a 12 volt test
light between D+ terminal on altemator and the key
switch. If the test light comes on, the circuit between
the indicator and the key switch or the circuit be-
tween the D+ terminal and the indicator is open.
Check connections and wiring. If test light fails to
come on, there is an open circuit in the altemator or
voltage regulator.
If warning light functions normally with engine not
running but fails to go OFF when engine is running
at various speeds, check altemator as outlined in
paragraphs 83 and 84.
83. ALTERNATOR VOLTAGE OUTPUT TEST.
Check to see that all accessories are turned OFF.
With engine operating at rated speed (2200 rpm),
connect the positive lead ofa voltmeter to the positive
stud to the battery and the negative lead to the
negative jump start terminal to the battery. If volt-
meter reading is in excess of 15 volts, disassemble
altemator and check voltage regulator and other
components.
84. ALTERNATOR AMPERAGE OUTPUT TEST.
Connect an ammeter in the circuit at the B+ terminal
on the alternator. See Fig. 65. Connect a battery load
tester CAS-10147 or equivalent, across battery termi-
nals. Tum light switch to ROAD position. With en-
gine operating at rated speed (2200 rpm), adjust
battery load tester for maximum current output. If
reading on ammeter is between 110 and 130 amperes
and alternator warning light is still ON, disassemble
altemator and test the rectifier bridge.
ALTERNATOR
All Models
85. Robert Bosch 110 ampere alternator is used on
all models. Altemator is equipped with a solid state
regulator and has no provisions for adjustment.
Rated output is 14 volts at 110 amperes.
CAUTiON: Because certain components of the
aiternator can be damaged by procedures that wiil

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
not affect a D.C. generator, the foiiowing precau-
tions MUST be observed:
a. Before working on the eiectricai system, discon-
nect the battery cables.
b. When instailing batteries, negative post of bat-
teries must be grounded.
c. When using an auxiiiary battery for starting,
connect negative to negative and positive to posi-
tive. Use the auxiiiary battery connectors provided
on tractor.
d. When charging batteries on tractor, use the aux-
iliary battery connections on tractor. Do not attach
directiy to battery terminais.
e. Never operate tractor when battery cabies are
disconnected.
f. if necessary to weid on tractor, disconnect battery
cabies and instrument cluster. Connect weider
ground cabie as close as possibie to weid area.
86. DISASSEMBLY AND TESTING. Tb disas-
semble the removed altemator, use special tool CAS-
1375 as shown in Fig. 66 and remove pulley nut
(1—Fig. 67) and washer (2). Remove pulley (3) and
BATTERY LOAD
TESTER
TO INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
NOTE: USE HEAVY GAUGE
WIRE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS AMMETER
Fig. 65—Connect ammeter and battery load tester as
shown when checking amperage output of alternator.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraph 86
fan (4). Remove the voltage regulator and brush
holder (15) with springs (16) and brushes (17). Re-
move capacitor (14). Place alignment marks across
front and rear housings (6 and 13) for aid in correct
reassembly. Remove the four through bolts and sepa-
rate front housing and rotor assembly from rear hous-
ing and stator assembly. Place alignment mark on
stator in register with alignment mark on rear hous-
ing. Remove the four screws securing retainer plate
(8) to front housing (6), then separate rotor assembly
from front housing. Using a suitable puller, remove
rear bearing (10) from rotor, then press retainer plate
(8), front bearing (7) and spacer (5)firomfront of rotor
(9).
Check the rotor for damage. Inspect slip rings for
wear or deep grooves. Slip rings C£in be cleaned up
using fine (400 grit) sandpaper. Touch one ohmmeter
lead to the rotor frame and the other lead to a slip
ring as shown in Fig. 68. Then, repeat the test on the
other slip ring. There must be no continuity between
either slip ring and rotor frame. A reading near zero
will indicate a short circuit to ground. Touch ohmme-
ter leads to each slip ring as shown in Fig. 69. Ohm-
meter reading should be 2.6-2.9 ohms. A higher
reading will indicate an open circuit and a lower
reading will indicate an internal short. If rotor fails
to meet any test, renew rotor.
Measure the length of brushes protruding from the
brush holder. Renew brushes if the measurement is
0.270 inch (7.0 mm) or less. New brushes will pro-
trude 0.550 inch (14.0 mm). Brushes must work freely
in holder.
Unbolt rectifier bridge from rear housing, then
remove rectifier bridge (12) and stator (11). Pay par-
RETAINING NUT
AND WASHER
g. 66—Use special tool CAS'1375 to remove alterna-
tor pulley nut.
45
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 87 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

ticular attention when removing insulators from B+ diodes closest to the B+ terminal. Connect the nega-
and D+ terminals for aid in reassembly. Unsolder tive lead of the ohmmeter to the B+ terminal. Connect
stator leads from the connections on rectifier bridge. the positive lead of the ohmmeter to one of the leads
Tb test the positive diodes in the rectifier bridge, to the positive diodes and record the reading. Reverse
proceed as follows: The positive diodes are the seven the ohmmeter leads and check the ohmmeter reading.
There should be one high reading and one low read-
ing. If both readings are the same, renew rectifier
4 bridge. Check the other six positive diodes in the
same manner. To test the negative diodes, proceed as
follows: The negative diodes are the seven diodes on
the side of the rectifier bridge opposite the B+ termi-
nal. Connect the negative ohmmeter lead to the un-
painted surface of the diode plate. Connect the
positive lead of the ohmmeter to one of the leads to
the negative diodes and record the reading. Reverse
the ohmmeter leads and check the ohmmeter reading.
There must be a high reading and a low reading. If
both readings are the same, renew rectifier bridge.
Repeat the test for the other six negative diodes.
Measure the resistance of the stator windings by
connecting ohmmeter leads to stator leads. The resis-
tance in each coil should be 0.053-0.058 ohms. If not,
renew the stator. Tb check the stator for a short
circuit, connect one lead of ohmmeter to the stator
frame and the other lead to each of the four stator
leads. If the ohmmeter moves, there is a short circuit
in the stator and stator must be renewed.
Tb test the voltage regulator, use voltage regulator
tester CAS-10851 shown in Fig. 70. Connect the red
positive lead of tester to the D-n brush, the yellow field
lead to the DF brush and the black ground lead to the
D- terminal. See Fig. 71. Depress test switch to the
upper position. The green light must come on. Ob-
-15 serve the voltage reading for 20 to 30 seconds. The
Fig. 67—Exploded view of Robert Bosch alternator voltage must he in the regulated range of 13.7 to 14.5
used on all models. volts. If not, renew the voltage regulator.
1- Nut 10. Rear bearing
2. Washer 11. Stator
3. Pulley 12. Rectifier 87. REASSEMBLY. Reassemble the alternator by
4. Fan 13. Rear housing
5. Spacer 14. Capacitor reversing the disassembly procedure, keeping the
6. Front housing 15. Brush holder & following points in mind. Use rosin core solder when
7. Front bearing voltage regulator attaching stator leads to connections on rectifier
8. Plate 16. Brush spring (2)
9. Rotor 17. Brush (2)
bridge. It is recommended that bearings~(7 and 10—

SUP RINGS

Fig. 68—Using an ohmmeter, check for ground be* Fig. 69—Ohmmeter reading between slip rings should
tween slip rings and rotor frame. be 2.6-2.9 ohms.

46
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 88-89

Fig. 67) be renewed any time they have been removed.
Install three 0.008 inch (0.2 mm) feeler gages be-
tween rotor and stator to center the rotor, then
tighten the four through bolts evenly to a torque of
3-4 fl.-lbs. (4-5 N.m). Remove the feeler gages. When
installing the brush holder and voltage regulator,
make certain that the spring on rectifier bridge is in
contact with brush holder and voltage regulator.
Tighten pulley nut to a torque of 44-52 ft.-lbs. (60-70
N.m). .,,-
STARTING MOTOR
holder and field frame (22) for aid in reassembly.
Remove brush holder and washer (28).
Place alignment mark across drive housing (7),
center housing (17) and field frame (22). Unbolt and
remove drive housing (7) and seal ring (8). Remove
bolts (15) securing center housing (17) to field frame
(22), then remove center housing with drive clutch
(14) and armature (27) from field frame assembly.
Remove "O" ring (21) and remove pivot pin (16). Drive
collar (10) on armature shaft, then remove snap ring
(9) and the collar. Slide drive clutch (14), shift lever

All Models '

88. All models are equipped with a Nippondenso
starting motor #128000-5330. Starting motor is actu-
ated by a Nippondenso magnetic switch (solenoid).

89. DISASSEMBLY AND TESTING. Tb disas-

semble the starting motor, first remove terminal
cover (4—Fig. 72), then unbolt and remove terminal
connector (24), lead wire (3) and magnetic switch (2).
Remove end cover (34) and "O" ring (33). Remove the
four brush screws, pull upward on brush springs (29)
and remove brushes from brush holder (31). Remove
brush springs and place match marks across brush

31
32

Fig. 72—Exploded view of the Nippondenso starting

Fig. 70—Test voltage regulator using voltage regulator motor used on all models.
tester CAS-10851.
1. Boot 19. Oil seal
2. Magnetic switch 20. Washer
3. Switch lead wire 21. "O"ring
4. Terminal cover 22. Field frame
5. Drive housing bolt (6) 23. Field terminal
6. Needle bearing 24. Connector
7. Drive housing 25. Field coils
8. Seal ring 26. Pole shoe (4)
9. Snap ring 27. Armature
10. Collar 28. Washer
11. Shift lever 29. Brush spring (4)
12. Pad (2) 30. Brush (4)
13. Bolt (2) 31. Brush holder
BRUSH HOLDER AND 14. Drive clutch 32. Needle bearing
VOLTAGE REGULATOR 33. "O"ring
15. Bolt (4)
16. Pivot pin 34. End frame
Fig. 71—View showing location of D+ brush, DF brush 17. Center housing 35. Bolt (2)
and D- terminal. 18. Center bushing 36. Nut (2)

47

Paragraphs 90-92
(11) with pads (12), center housing (17) and washer
(20) from armature (27).
Using an ohmmeter, touch one probe to the field
terminal stud (23) and the other prohe to the brush
lead on field coils. If there is no continuity, field
winding has an open and must he repaired or re-
newed. Touch one ohmmeter probe to field terminal
stud and the other probe to the surface of field frame.
If there is continuity, the field coils have a ground and
must be repaired or renewed
Tbuch one probe of the ohmmeter to a commutator
segment and the other probe to the armature core. If
there is continuity, armature has a ground and must
he renewed. Tbuch the two ohmmeter prohes to two
commutator segments. If there is no continuity, arma-
ture winding has an open circuit and must be re-
newed. Commutator can be cleaned up using fine (No.
400 grit) sandpaper. Measure the diameter of the
TEST
SWITCH
BATTERY
Fig. 73—View showing connections when testing start-
Ing motor magnetic switch.
MULTIMETER
GROUND
Fig. 74—Use a multimeter as shown to check for conti-
nuity.
48
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
commutator. If commutator is worn to a diameter of
less than 1.81 inches (46 mm), renew the armature.
Inspect needle bearings (6 and 32) for damage or
roughness. Needle bearing (6) is available only in new
drive housing (7). Needle bearing (32) is available
only in new end housing (34). Measure inside diame-
ter of bushing (18) and outside diameter of corre-
sponding surface on armature. If clearance is more
than 0.013 inch (0.33 mm), renew center housing.
Bushing (18) and oil seal (19) are available only in
new center housing (17).
Measure length of brushes (30) and renew if worn
to a length of less than 0.5 inch (13.0 mm).
Inspect drive clutch (14) to make certain that the
pinion can rotate freely in direction of starter rotation
and that it will lock up in opposite direction.
90. REASSEMBLY. Using Fig. 72 as a guide, re-
assemble starting motor by reversing disassembly
procedure. Tightening torques are as follows:
Drive housing bolts (5) 18-22 ft.-lbs.
(25-30 N.m)
Center housing to field frame bolts (15) 11-15 ft.-lbs.
(15-20 N.m)
Magnetic switch bolts (13) 6-9 ft.-lbs.
(8-12 N.m)
End frame bolts (35) & nuts (36) 6-9 ft.-lbs.
(8-12 N.m)
Magnetic switch nuts 18-25 ft.-lbs.
(25-34 N.m)
Field terminal nut 12-16 ft.-lbs.
(17-22 N.m)
Brush lead screws 2-4 ft.-lbs.
(3-5 N.m)
SWITCH
All Models
91. TESTING. Tb test the magnetic switch for
proper operation, connect a 12 volt battery as shown
in Fig. 73. Remove terminal connector (24—Fig. 72)
between field terminal stud and magnetic switch.
When test switch (Fig. 73) is closed, the drive clutch
and pinion must move outward. When test switch is
opened, drive clutch and pinion must move inward. If
operation is incorrect, disconnect battery and wires.
With terminal connector removed, connect a mul-
timeter as shown in Fig. 74 and test for continuity. If
there is no continuity, renew magnetic switch.
WIRING
All models
92. When a problem is suspected in wiring harness,
follow an orderly, step by step check of the problem

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
circuit. Always check protective circuits (fuses and
circuit breakers) first, then locate the primary point
of current supply for circuit in question. Using a 12
volt test light or a voltmeter, check for adequate
voltage at this point. If voltage is present at this point,
continue to check for voltage at appropriate connec-
tions along harness working toward malfunctioning
unit until problem area is isolated. Harness connec-
tors (plugs), sockets and connection terminals being
corroded, loose or broken are most often the cause for
interruptions in power supply.
If voltage was not present at primary point of power
supply, check wiring moving toward battery until the
interruption of current is isolated. Repair as neces-
sary.
NOTE: Aitiiough most circuits are coior coded,
sometimes severai circuits may have the same
coior. However, each circuit is identified by circuit
number stamped on the wires.
PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS
All Models
93. FUSES. Fuses are installed in circuits to pro-
tect wiring from damage in event of shorted wiring.
When fuse is blown (fuse strip melted), a fuse of the
same size and amperage must be installed after lo-
cating and repairing the problem. Fuses and circuit
breakers are accessible after removing the cover
panel at the front of the side console.
94. CIRCUIT BREAKERS. Circuit breakers per-
form the same function as fuses. However, a circuit
breaker will cut off current fiow, then cool down and
reset automatically, re-establishing current flow.
Fig. 75—View showing location of some LED warning lights of Instrument cluster. Refer also to Fig. 76.
1. Air filter service 3. Coolant level
2. Engine oil pressure 4. Green systems normal
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 93-97
Usually used in lighting, cab wiring and gage circuits,
it eliminates complete failure allowing limited use of
systems considered necessary for safe operation.
Circtoit breakers will be in line with red wire con-
nected to positive cable connection. Under normal
operation with voltage at BAT connection of circuit
breaker, voltage should pass through breaker to re-
maining terminal.
ACCESSORY SYSTEMS
All Models
Accessory systems include lights, digital instru-
ment cluster warning systems, windshield wiper, cab
ventilating, heating and air conditioning system.
95. LIGHTS. Front and rear work lights and warn-
ing lights are standard equipment. However, addi-
tional front and rear work lights are available.
Single light failure is usually a bad light bulb, poor
ground or bad current connection. Multiple light fail-
ure is usually caused by a bad switch or power source
wiring problems. Check fuses and circuit breakers,
then check wiring as outlined in paragraph 92.
96. DIGITAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
WARNING SYSTEMS. Gage and warning systems
consist of three basic components: LCD (liquid crystal
diode) bar graph indicators or LED (light emitting
diode) warning lights, sending units or activating
switches and necessary wiring to connect all compo-
nents.
97. SYSTEMS NORMAL LIGHT. The Systems
Normal indicator (4—Fig. 75) is a green LED (light
emitting diode). It works in conjunction with most of
5. Transmission lube oil pressure
6. Altemator indicator
49

Paragraphs 98-99
the instrument cluster LEDs and LCDs. The Systems
Normal green light is usually ON. When it is ON, it
indicates that the critical tractor systems are func-
tioning properly and conditions are safe to operate the
tractor.
When a critical condition exists, a red LED warning
light comes on or an LCD bar graph indicator fiashes.
As soon as the critical condition warning appears, the
green Systems Normal light goes OFF. TTie critical
condition LEDs and LCDs are the following:
a. Engine oil pressure LED
b. Coolant level LED
c. Transmission Iub6 oil pressure LED
d. Alternator indicator LED
e. Transmission oil temperature LED
f. Transmission system pressure LED
g. Coolant temperature LCD
h. System voltage LCD
i. Exhaust temperature LCD
The green Systems Normal light will remain ON
when the following less critical system warning ap-
pears.
a. Air filter service LED
b. Hydraulic filter service LED
c. Fuel level LCD
98. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LIGHT Normal op-
eration of engine oil pressure warning light (2—Fig.
75) is to light when key switch is in ON position,
engine not running and to go out when engine is
running and adequate oil pressure is reached.
There are two pressure switches that monitor the
engine oil pressure. One switch monitors the oil pres-
sure at low idle speed and the other switch monitors
the pressure at rated speed (2200 rpm) or above.
When engine oil pressure is lower than 6 psi (41.4
kPa) at idle speed (825-875 rpm), low rpm pressure
switch closes and sends a ground signal to pin 29 on
instrument cluster. This causes the following results:
1. The engine oil service monitor (LED) comes ON.
2. The alarm sounds ON and OFF.
3. The green Systems Normal light goes OFF.
4. Stop engine indicator will go ON and OFF.
5. Thirty seconds after the stop engine indicator
goes ON, automatic shutdown is activated and engine
will stop.
If engine oil pressure is lower than 20 psi (138 kPa)
at engine speed of 2200 rpm or above, the high rpm
pressure switch will close and send a ground signal
to pin 24 on instrument cluster. Aground signal at pin
24 will cause the same five results as listed for the
low rpm switch.
If oil pressure is low and engine speed is less than
2200 rpm, high rpm pressure switch will close send-
ing a ground signal to pin 24. However, because
engine rpm is less than 2200, ground signal to pin 24
will not cause the five previously listed results.
50
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
If engine oil pressure monitor (warning light)
comes ON when engine is running, check low rpm
pressure switch as follows: Tum key OFF and stop
engine. Disconnect yellow wire #255 from low rpm
switch. Make sure wire does not touch any ground on
tractor. Tum key switch ON £ind check the oil pres-
sure warning light, which should be OFF. If light is
ON, check for grounded circuit between wire #255
and pin 29. If light is OFF, wiring is good and pressure
to the low rpm switch should be checked. The low rpm
switch is normally closed and switch opening and
closing pressures are as follows: Low rpm pressure
switch opens at 10 psi 68.9 kPa) in increasing pres-
sure and closes at 6 psi (41.4 kPa) on decreasing
pressure.
Tb check pressure to the low rpm switch, remove
the switch and install a 0-60 psi (0-414 kPa) test gage.
Start tractor and operate at 825-875 rpm, then check
gage pressure. If there is enough engine oil pressure,
10 psi (68.9 kPa), to open the low pressure switch,
renew the switch and connect wire #255. Check to
make certain that oil pressure warning light is OFF
at low idle speed.
After renewing low rpm switch, start engine and
operate at 2200 rpm or above. If warning light is ON,
disconnect yellow wire #256 from high rpm oil pres-
sure switch. Make sure wire #256 does not touch any
ground on tractor. Warning light should not be OFF
If light is ON, check for grounded circuits between
wire #256 and pin 24 of instrument cluster. If light is
OFF, wiring is good and pressure to the high rpm
pressure switch should be checked. Stop engine, re-
move high rpm switch and install the 0-60 psi (0-414
kPa) test gage. Start engine and operate at 2200 rpm
or above and check test gage reading. High rpm
pressure switch opens at 25 psi (172 kPa) on increas-
ing pressure and closes at 20 psi (138 kPa) on decreas-
ing pressure. If test gage reads 25 psi (172 kPa) or
higher, renew high rpm pressure switch.
After renewing high rpm pressure switch, connect
wire #256 £ind operate engine at 2200 rpm or above.
Check to make sure warning light is OFF. If not,
renew instnmient cluster.
The tractor is equipped with an automatic shut-
down system. If engine is being started in cold tem-
perature of 32° F (0° C) or colder, automatic shutdown
may occur after 30 seconds due to low engine oil
pressure. Tb prevent shutdown, depress the automat-
ic shutdown override switch located on right side of
the steering console.
99. AIR FILTER LIGHT. A vacuum switch monitors
the condition of the air filter system. The air restric-
tion switch is located on the right rear of the air
cleaner housing. When air filters need servicing dur-
ing operation, the vacuum switch closes sending a
ground signal to pin 17 on the instrument cluster.
This ground signal causes air filter warning (yellow

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
LED) light (1—Fig. 75) to come ON and a three second
alarm sounds. The green Systems Normal light will
stay ON.
NOTE: If air filter service light comes ON during
the work day, you can service the air fiiter elements
after the day's work is compieted. Faiiure to service
the air fiiter eiements within the next 24 hours of
operation can cause tractor to graduaily iose power
and possibly cause damage to engine components.
Check air filter elements and renew as necessary.
Start engine and observe warning light. If light stays
ON with engine operating, stop engine and discon-
nect yellow wire #266 from the vacuum switch. Start
engine and make certain the wire #266 does not touch
any ground on tractor. Warning light should be OFF.
If not, check yellow wire #266 from vacuum switch to
pin 17 on instrument cluster for shorts or grounds.
Repair as necessary. If warning light is OFF, wire is
good.
Ground the end of vacuum switch yellow wire #266
and if light comes ON, renew the vacuum switch.
100. COOLANT LEVEL LIGHT. A coolant probe
monitors the coolant level. The probe is mounted
through the rear wall of the radiator upper tank.
When end of probe is immersed in coolant, the coolant
completes a circuit path to ground and red LED light
(3—Fig. 75) will be OIF. When coolant level is down
to an unsafe level and probe tip is out of coolant, there
is no current path to ground. The circuit is open and
the resistance becomes very high (about 30K ohms).
After a few seconds, the red coolant level warning
light will come ON, a three-second alarm will sound
and the green Systems Normal light (4) will go OFF.
Check coolant level in radiator amd add coolant to
proper level. If light stays ON, with key switch ON
and coolant level correct, check for excessive moisture
at connections. Dry as necessary and reconnect the
connectors.
With key switch OFF, use an ohmmeter and check
resistance between harness pin 22 and ground. With
probe in coolant, resistance should be about lOK
ohms. If resistance is very high (more than 20K ohms)
or very low (less than 5K ohms), coolant probe is
defective and must be renewed.
For a final test, disconnect yellow level probe circuit
wire #231 and tum key switch ON. When end of wire
#231 is not touching a ground, the red LED warning
light must be ON. When end of wire #231 is touching
ground on tractor, light should be OFF.
101, ALTERNATOR LIGHT. Normal operation of
the red LED alternator warning light (6—Fig. 75) is
with key switch ON and engine not running, light
should be ON. With engine operating, light should be
OFF. At any time during engine operation, the alter-
nator does not supply enough power for the electrical
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 100-104
system, the red warning light will come ON and the
green Systems Normal light will go OFF. Refer to
paragraphs 81 and 82 for tests.
102. TRANSMISSION LUBE OIL PRESSURE.
Transmission lube oil pressure is regulated at 15-35
psi (103-241 kPa) by the cold oil relief valve in the
hydraulic filter base. Lube oil pressure is monitored
by a pressure switch located at top reair of rear main
frame. If at any time during tractor operation, trans-
mission lube oil pressure is too low, the following will
occur: The red LED warning light (5—Fig. 75) will
flash ON and OFF. The alarm will sound for three
seconds. The green LED Systems Normal light will
go OFF. Stop the engine, then locate and correct the
problem.
With engine stopped, connect ohmmeter leads to
pin 21 and pin 9 at instrument cluster. Ohmmeter
should show continuity. If no continuity is shown, it
would indicate a defective transmission lube pressure
switch or an open in the wiring. Disconnect the wiring
plug at the pressure switch. Connect ohmmeter
across switch leads. If continuity is now shown,
switch is good and wiring is faulty. If no continuity is
shown, switch is defective and must be renewed.
103. TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE. If
during tractor operation, the transmission oil be-
comes too hot, the following will occur:
1. The red LED warning light (8—Fig. 76) will come
ON and stay ON.
2. The alarm will sound ON and OFF.
3. The green Systems Normal light will go OFF.
4. The stop engine indicator will go ON and OFF.
5. The automatic engine shutdown will be activated
30 seconds after the stop engine indicator goes ON,
and engine will shut down.
The transmission oil temperature sender is located
in the hydraulic filter head. The temperature sender
is a resistor-t5^e switch activated by a probe im-
mersed in the transmission oil. Ib check the tempera-
ture sender, connect one lead of em ohmmeter to pin
15 at the instrument cluster and other lead to ground.
Ohmmeter reading should be 50-30K ohms. If not,
temperature sender is defective or yellow wire #239
is faulty.
Disconnect yellow wire #239 from temperature
sender and make certsdn end of wire does not touch
any ground on tractor. Depress automatic shutdown
b3^ass switch and start engine. Transmission oil tem-
perature light should now be OFF. If not, yellow wire
#239 is grounded. Repair as necessary. If light goes
OFF with wire removed from sender, momentarily
touch end of wire to a ground. If light comes ON, stop
engine and renew temperature sender switch.
104. TRANSMISSION SYSTEM PRESSURE. If at
any time during tractor operation, the transmission
51

Paragraphs 105-106
system pressure is not within normal operating
range, the following will occur:
1. The red LED warning light (9—Fig. 76) will come
ON and stay ON.
2. The alarm will sound ON and OFF.
3. The green Systems Normal light will go OFF.
4. The stop engine indicator will go ON and OFF.
5. The automatic engine shutdown will be activated
30 seconds after the stop engine indicator goes ON,
and engine will shut down.
The normally closed transmission system oil pres-
sure switch is located in upper front portion of the
speed transmission control housing. With engine
stopped, connect ohmmeter leads to pin 30 and pin 9
at instrument cluster. Ohmmeter should show conti-
nuity. If no continuity is shown, it would indicate a
defective transmission system oil pressure switch or
an open in yellow wire #265. Disconnect wiring plug
at the system pressure switch. Connect ohmmeter
leads to the switch leads. If continuity is now shown,
switch is good and wiring is faulty. If no continuity is
shown, switch is defective and must be renewed.
105. HYDRAULIC (TRANSMISSION) FILTER
LIGHT. When the hydraulic filter needs service dur-
ing operation of tractor, the following will occur:
1. The yellow LED warning light (10—Fig. 76) will
come ON and stay ON.
2. The alarm will sound for three seconds.
3. The green Systems Normal light will stay ON.
NOTE: If the hydraulic filter light is flashing ON
and OFF, change the filter within four hours of
operation. If the light stays ON, change the filter as
soon as possible.
With new hydraulic filter installed, start engine
and observe hydraulic filter warning light. If light
stays ON, disconnect yellow wire #267 at hydraulic
Ffg. 76—View showing iocation of some LED warning iights of instrument duster. Refer aiso to fig. 75.
7. Stop engine indicator 8. Transmission oil temperature
52
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
filter switch located in filter housing. If light now goes
OFF, wire is good and the filter switch is defective and
should be renewed. If light does not go OFF, check for
short or ground in yellow wire #267. Repair as neces-
sary.
106. COOLANT TEMPERATURE BAR GRAPH.
The coolant temperature LCD monitor (1—Fig. 77) is
a 12-segment bar graph. A thermistor is the sensor
for the coolant temperature. As the coolant tempera-
ture increases, thermistor resistance decreases and
the number of energized segments on bar graph in-
creases. See Fig. 78. When coolant temperature
reaches about 230'' F (110° C), the following will
occur:
1. Indicator bars 1 through 11 will flash ON and
OFF
2. The alarm will sound for three seconds.
3. Green SyTstems Normal light will go OFF.
If coolant temperature increases to about 240° F
(115° C), the following will occur:
1. All 12 bar graph segments will fiash ON and OFF.
2. The alarm will sound ON and OFF.
3. Green Systems Normal light will stay OFF.
4. The stop engine indicator will go ON and OFF.
5. The automatic shutdown will be activated 30
seconds after the stop engine indicator goes ON, and
engine will shut down.
If bar graph segments 1 through 11 flash ON and
OFF (indicating too high coolant temperature) and
radiator coolant level is good, check thermistor and
wiring as follows: Disconnect the yellow wire #235
from the thermistor and turn key switch ON. Check
coolant temperature bar graph. None ofthe segments
should be flashing. If any of the segments are flash-
ing, check the yellow wire #235 fi-om pin 13 at the
instrument cluster to the thermistor. If one segment
on bar graph fiashes ON and OFF, thermistor wire
9. Transmission system oil pressure 10. Hydraulic filter service
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 107-108

has an open. If all the segments fiash ON and OFF,
thermistor wire is grounded. Repair as necessary. If
none ofthe segments are fiashing, wiring is good and
thermistor should be checked. For an accurate check,
this test should be done right after warning appears.
With thermistor yellow wire #235 connected and key
switch in OFF position, use an ohmmeter to check the
resistance between connector pin 13 and to ground.
Check the chart in Fig. 78 for the amount of resistance
this test should indicate. For example, if segments 1
to 11 were fiashing, the resistance should read about
133 ohms. If resistance reading is not approximately
what it should be, as indicated on the chart, renew
the thermistor.
107. FUEL LEVEL BAR GRAPH. The fioat mecha-
nism, which is a variable resistor, is the sensor for the
fuel level bar graph (2—Fig. 77). Fuel level is indi-
cated by the number of bars showing on the bar graph
in relation to the ball symbols as follows:
A. No indicator bars showing at the all-black ball.
Tank is empty.
B. Six indicator bars showing at the one-half black
ball. Fuel tank is half full.
C. Twelve indicator bars showing at the all-white
ball. Fuel tank is full.
When fuel level is low, the following will occur:
1. First bar will fiash ON and OFF.
2. Bars 2 through 12 will also fiash ON and OFF,
but out of phase with first bar.
3. Alarm will sound for three seconds.
If the readings on the bar graph are not accurate,
the fioat mechanism and wiring should be checked. If
bar graph indicates a full tank, ground the fioat
mechanism input terminal. Tum key switch ON and
check bar graph reading. If it does not read empty, the
wiring from input terminal to pin 12 should be
checked for a loose connection or a broken wire. If it
does read empty, wiring is good and fioat mechanism
should be checked.
If the fuel level on bar graph indicated an empty
tank, disconnect wire from fioat input terminal and
make certain the wire does not touch any ground.
Tum key switch ON and check bar graph reading. It
should read full. If not, wiring from input terminal to
pin 12 should be checked for shorts or grounds. If it
does read full, wiring is good gind fioat mechanism
should be checked.
Remove the fioat mechanism from the fuel tank.
Check the assembly for damage and renew as neces-
sary. Connect an ohmmeter between input terminal
and ground terminal on main tank fioat or the input
terminal and output terminal on the auxiliary tank
fioat. The resistance readings should change as the
fioat arm is raised as follows:
Main fuel tank sender (tractors without auxiliary
tank):
Full tank 88.5-96.0 ohms
Half-full tank 42.0-48.0 ohms
Empty tank 0.0- 1.5 ohms
Main fuel tank sender (tractors with auxiliary
tank): i
Full tank .67.0-73.0 ohms
Half-full tank 20.0-26.0 ohms
Empty tank 0.0-1.5 ohms
Auxiliary tank sender:
Full tank 21.0-25.0 ohms
Empty tank 0.0- 1.5 ohms
If resistance does not vary as fioat arm is moved,
renew fioat mechanism. If wiring and fioat mecha-
nism test good, renew instrument cluster.
108. SYSTEM VOLTAGE LEVEL BAR GRAPH.
Voltage level is indicated by the number of energized
segments on the bar graph display (3—Fig. 77).

Fig. 77-'View stiowing iocation of LCD bar graph dispiays on instrument duster.
1. Coolant temperature 2. Fuel level 3. System voltage 4. Exhaust temperature

53
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraphs 109-111 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

If battery voltage level is too low, the bar graph will
display one bar segment (11.7 volts) and the green
Systems Normal light will go OFF.
If battery voltage level is too high, the bar graph
will display 12 bar segments (15.0 volts) and the
following will occur:
1. All 12 bars will fiash ON and OFF
2. The alarm will sound for three seconds.
3. The green Systems Normal light will go OFF.
Battery voltage level should be in the regulated
range of 13.7 to 14.5 volts. Refer to paragraphs 83 and
86 to test voltage regulator.
109. EXHAUST TEMPERATURE BAR GRAPH.
The sensor device that measures the exhaust tem-
perature is a pyrometer that is screwed into the
turbocharger exhaust elbow. The sensor is a voltage
generating device. When the temperature increases,
the pyrometer generated voltage increases. Because
the terminals on the pyrometer are connected to pins
1 and 2, any change in voltage between the pins will
cause different segments of exhaust temperature bar
graph (4—Fig. 77) to energize.
If exhaust temperature heats to 1250° F (677° C),
the pyrometer generates about 28.2 millivolts. See
Fig. 79. When 28.2 millivolts is sensed between pins
1 and 2, bar segments 1 through 11 will fiash ON and
OFF, a three-second alarm will sound and the green
Systems Normal light will go OFF. If temperature
climbs to 1350° F (732° C), about 30.5 millivolts are
generated by the pyrometer and all 12 bar segments
fiash ON and OFF.
If exhaust temperature bar graph segments 1 to 12
are fiashing (indicating hot) and engine is cold, the
pyrometer should be checked. Check the voltage be-
tween the wires at the pyrometer with engine run-
ning. Observe the voltmeter reading and check the
bar graph for number of energized segments. Com-
pare with chart in Fig. 79. If readings are not within
specifications, renew the pyrometer. If readings are
within specifications, renew instrument cluster.
110. DIGITAL DISPLAYS. The instrument clus-
ter displays are LCD (liquid crystal diodes) that dis-
play the operator's selections and contains several
message legends to indicate the selections.
After programming the cluster, the operator can
depress a function button and the desired informa-
tion will be shown on upper or lower digital display.
Engine rpm and standard ground speed function but-
tons (Fig. 80) depend upon sensors for their operation.
All other function buttons work strictly through cal-
culations of a microprocessor chip located in the clus-
ter box.
The function buttons are: Engine rpm, Pto rpm.
Area/hour, Total area and Ground speed are located
as shown in Fig. 80. Program buttons are: Equipment
width. Calibrate, Calibrate slip. Start, Stop and Re-
set.
Refer to the appropriate following paragraphs for
information on operation, tests and programming.
111. ENGINE RPM FUNCTION. A magnetic sen-
sor located in the hydraulic pump drive housing is
used to monitor engine rpm. The sensor is positioned
so that it almost touches the hydraulic pump drive
gear. The sensor generates a magnetic field. As the
gear rotates, the gear teeth cut through this magnetic
field. The sensor puts out one pulse signal for each
gear tooth that cuts through the magnetic field. As
the gear rotates more quickfy, the pulse frequency
increases.

THERMISTOR APPROXIMATE ENERGIZED

TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR SEGMENTS TEMPERATURE THERMOCOUPLE BAR GRAPH
TF) RESISTANCE ON BAR GRAPH C"F) VOLTAGE ENERGIZED
SEGMENTS
240° F 113 ohms 12
230^ F 133 ohms 11 1350" 30. 5 millivolts 12

149 ohms 1250° 28.2 millivolts 11

223°F 10
165 ohms 1150*" 25.8 millivolts 10
216°F 9
1046° 23.3 mllllyolts 9
209° F 187 ohms 8
943° 20.9 millivolts 8
203°F 206 ohms 7
839° 18.4 millivolts 7
196°F 234 ohms 6
736" 16.0 millivoU» 6
265 ohms 5
632° 13.6 miUivolts 5
183*'F 296 ohms 4
529° 11.3 millivolts 4
175°F 342 ohms 3
425° 8.9 millivolts 3
140*'F 668 ohms 2
313° 6.4 millivolts 2
1635 ohms 1
200° 3.8 millivolts 1
Fig. 78—Chart showing thermistor temperature and re-
sistance and energized segments on cooiant tempera- Fig. 79—Chart showing exhaust temperature, pyrome-
ture bar graph. Refer to text. ter voitage and energized segments on bar graph.

54

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
The two wire leads (yellow #216 and black #216)
from the magnetic sensor connect to pins 7 and 10 of
the cluster connector. As the pulse signals change, the
varying signals are sent to the cluster. When Engine
rpm button is depressed, the engine rpm will appear
on the upper digital display and will continue to be
displayed until another upper display button is de-
pressed.
The Engine rpm display has an engine overspeed
feature. Any time the engine speed is 2500 rpm or
above, the following will occur: The Engine rpm dis-
play will override other readouts on the upper display
screen, except the wheel slip bar graph. The push
buttons for the upper display screen will not work.
The Systems Normal light will stay ON and the alarm
will sound. The actual engine rpm will fiash ON and
OFF on the upper display screen until the overspeed
condition is corrected.
If the display shows zero rpm with the engine
running, check for disconnected wires or defective
sensor. Disconnect the wiring plug near the sensor.
Connect an ohmmeter between the two wires going
to the sensor. Resistance reading should be between
2925 and 3575 ohms. If resistance reading is higher
or lower, renew the magnetic sensor. If reading is
between 2925 and 3575 ohms, reconnect sensor wires
and check the wiring as follows: With key switch OFF,
disconnect the cluster connector. Connect an ohmme-
ter between pins 7 and 10 at the cluster connector.
Resistance reading should be between 2925 and 3575
ohms. If not, wiring and/or connections between sen-
sor and cluster connector are faulty. Repair as neces-
sary.
« ^ :s.
w •
C961ANT
B
RflEL
lEVa
Fig. 80—Digital Instrument cluster showing the digital displays, and the function and program buttons.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 112-113
112. PTO RPM FUNCTION. The pto speed is cal-
culated from the engine rpm. Depressing the Pto rpm
button will display the calculated pto speed on the
upper display screen. The pto speed reading will be
identified as 540 rpm or 1000 rpm to identify the type
of pto. On tractors equipped with both 540 and 1000
rpm pto, push the Pto rpm button alternately to
change from 540 rpm to 1000 rpm reading. On trac-
tors equipped with 1000 rpm pto onfy, the instrument
cluster will be programmed to display 1000 rpm pto
only.
113. GROUND SPEED FUNCTION (MAGNETIC
SENSOR). One of two sensors can be used to monitor
ground speed. One is called the true ground speed
sensor and the other is a transmission magnetic sen-
sor. The true ground speed sensor is an option and is
covered in paragraph 114.
The magnetic sensor is mounted in the top rear of
the range transmission housing. It is positioned so
that it almost touches the gear. The sensor generates
a magnetic field. As the gear rotates, the gear teeth
cut through the magnetic field. The sensor puts out
one pulse signal for each tooth that cuts through the
magnetic field. As the gear rotates more quick^, the
pulse frequency increases.
The two wire leads (yellow #215 and black #215)
from the magnetic sensor connect to pins 5 and 6 of
the cluster connector. As the pulse signals change, the
varying signals are sent to the cluster to compute the
ground speed. When ground speed button is de-
pressed, the tractor ground speed'will appear on the
lower digital display screen.
If the display shows zero reading (no display) when
the tractor is moving and button is depressed, check
oil TEMP smmmtm
55

Paragraphs 114-118
for disconnected sensor wires or a defective sensor.
Disconnect the wiring plug near the sensor. Connect
an ohmmeter between the two wires going to the
sensor. Resistance reading should be between 2925
and 3575 ohms. If resistance reading is higher or
lower, renew the magnetic sensor. If the reading is
between 2925 and 3575 ohms, reconnect sensor wires
and check the wiring as follows: With the key switch
OFF, disconnect the cluster connector. Connect an
ohmmeter between connector pins 5 and 6. Resistor
reading should be between 2925 and 3575 ohms. If
not, wiring and/or connections between sensor and
cluster connector are faulty. Repair as necessary.
NOTE: To provide accurate ground speed, the
tractor must be programmed with a ground speed
calibration number. Refer to paragraph 123. To
change from Engiish to Metric units, refer to para-
graph 122.
114. TRUE GROUND SPEED SENSOR. The true
ground speed sensor (Fig. 81) is an option. If tractor
is not equipped with this radar sensor, then ground
speed is monitored by the transmission magnetic
sensor. The true ground speed sensor is located on
right side of speed transmission housing, just rear-
ward from the hydraulic filter. The sensor must be
mounted at the correct angle. Use a carpenters level
to set mounting bracket lower edge at horizontal.
NOTE: The Wheel slip button witi not function
uniess the tractor is equipped with a true ground
speed sensor.
TD provide accurate ground speed and wheel slip,
the correct ground speed calibration number must be
programmed into the digital instrument cluster. Re-
fer to paragraph 123.
The true ground speed will be displayed on the
lower display screen any time the Ground speed
button is depressed. Keep the face ofthe radar sensor
clean. Scrape mud off with a plastic scraper. DO NOT
Fig. 81—View of true ground speed radar sensor. Refer
t6 text.
56
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
use a metal scraper. Wash face of sensor with soap
and water or steam clean. DO NOT disconnect wiring
harness from the sensor while cleaning.
114A. AREA/HOUR FUNCTION. Depress the
Area/hour button (Fig. 80) to display the number of
acres (or hectares) being done per hour. The readout
will be shown on the upper display screen. The read-
ing will be identified as Acres/hour or Hectares/hour
depending on the measurement system being used.
The instrument cluster must be programmed for
equipment width and ground speed input, in order to
calculate the Area/hour information.
115. TOTAL AREA FUNCTION. Depress the Ibtal
area button to display the total accumulation of acres
(or hectares) since the last reset of total area. The
reading will be shown on the upper display screen.
The reading will be identified as acres or hectares
depending on the measurement system being used.
The digital instrument cluster will automatically
accumulate area any time the tractor is operating and
has been programmed for equipment width and
ground speed. Area accumulation can be stopped or
started with the Stop and Start buttons. Tb stop
accumulation, push the Stop button. The area read-
out will fiash ON and OFF. Tb start the accumulation,
push the Start button.
The Start (up arrow) and Stop (down arrow) but-
tons can also be used to revise or preset the total area
readout. To change the readout, push and hold the
Tbtal area button. Push the Start button to increase
the readout or the Stop button to decrease the read-
out. The Total area reading can be reset to zero with
the Reset push button.
116. RESET BUTTON. Tb reset the Tbtal area
reading, depress the Reset button for three seconds.
Th^ Tbtal area reading will fiash ON and OFF on the
upper display screen and will then reset to zero read-
ing.
When the Reset button is released, the instrument
cluster will start accumulating Tbtal area again. Tbtal
area will be displayed until another upper push but-
ton is depressed.
117. START BUTTON (UP ARROW). The Start
button is used to increase the numerical value of
displayed numbers during various programming pro-
cedures. Instructions for using the Start button are
included in the appropriate individual programming
procedures.
. , • ' ,
118. STOP BUTTON (DOWN ARROW). The Stop
button is used to decrease the numerical value of
displayed numbers during various programming pro-
cedures. Instructions for using the Stop button are
included in the appropriate individual procedures.

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
119. EQUIPMENT WIDTH. Depress the Equip-
ment width button (Fig. 80) to display the width of
equipment currently programmed into the instru-
ment cluster. The unit of measurement will be in feet
or meters according to the measurement system be-
ing used.
The Area/hour and Tbtal area functions will not
operate correctly until an implement width has been
programmed into the instrument cluster. For the
most accurate information, program the effective
width of the implement (actual width less overlap).
For example, if you are using a 26-foot disk and a
1-foot overlap, the effective implement width is 25
feet.
NOTE: if metric mode has been seiected, width
measurement must be in meters.
Tb program Equipment width into the digital in-
strument cluster, turn the key switch ON, but do not
start the engine. The upper display screen will read
0 engine rpm and lower display will read .0 mph.
Depress Equipment width button to display equip-
ment width on the lower screen. This reading can be
0.0-149.9 feet (0.0-45.0 meters). Use the Start and
Stop buttons to change equipment width. Push Start
button to increase or Stop button to decrease the
numerical value.
The new Equipment width displayed on the lower
screen will be automatically entered in the instru-
ment cluster memory after two seconds. Tum key
switch OFF.
120. CALIBRATE BUTTON. Push the Calibrate
button to display the ground speed code number on
the lower display screen. The Calibration button is
also used for programming the instrument cluster.
Instructions for using the Calibrate button are in-
cluded in the appropriate individual programming
procedures.
121. CALIBRATE SLIP BUTTON. The Calibrate
shp button is used to calibrate the wheel sHp bar
graph shown on the upper display screen. Tractor
must be equipped with a true ground speed sensor in
order to calculate and display wheel slip. The instru-
ment cluster compares the transmission magnetic
sensor signal with the true ground speed sensor sig-
nal. After wheel slip has been calibrated, wheel slip
will be indicated anytime the tractor is in operation.
The wheel slip bar graph contains 15 segments.
Each segment represents 2 percent slip. The range of
the graph is 0 percent slip (all segments OFF) to 30
percent slip (all segments ON). When segments 5, 6,
7 and 8 ofthe wheel slip display are aligned with the
word BEST on the instrument panel decal, it repre-
sents an approximate wheel slip range of 9 to 16
percent. See Fig. 82.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 119-122
NOTE: if wheel siip has never been calibrated, aii
wheel slip segments will be ON when the true
ground speed sensor is operating and the tractor
is operating at speeds greater than 1 mph.
Tb calibrate the wheel slip bar graph for zero slip,
start driving the tractor across the field with imple-
ment raised in a no-load condition. Drive the tractor
at normal working speeds for a minimum of four
seconds. Continue driving tractor across the field,
then push and hold the Calibrate slip button for a
minimum of three seconds. At the end of three sec-
onds, all segments ofthe wheel slip bar graph will be
OFF, indicating zero percent slip. A short audible
signal will indicate that the zero slip reference has
been entered in the instrument cluster memory and
wheel slip calibration is complete.
122. PROGRAM ENGLISH OR METRIC UNITS.
The digital instrument cluster can be programmed to
display certain readouts in English or metric units of
measurement. Optional readouts are Ground speed.
Equipment width. Area/hour and Tbtal area. All clus-
ters are preset in English mode. Change to the metric
mode as follows: Push and hold the Calibrate button
with the key switch OFF. While holding the Calibrate
button, tum key switch to accessory position to enter
the program mode. The upper display screen will
show the permanent tractor model code number that
was programmed at the factory. The lower display
screen will show MPH or KMPH. Push the Ground
speed button alternately until the desired measure-
ment mode is displayed on the lower display screen.
MPH indicates English mode and KMPH indicates
metric mode.
Tb enter the selected mode into the instrument
cluster memoiy, push and hold the Calibrate button
until the audible alarm sounds (approximately three
seconds). The display will automatically return to
normal accessory mode and display engine hours on
WHEEL SUP
INDICATOR
Fig. 62—When segments 5,6, 7 and 8 on the wheei siip
indicator are aiigned with the word BEST on the instru-
ment panei decai, wheei slip range is 9 to 16 percent.
57
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraphs 123-128 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

the lower display screen. Turn key switch to OFF 125. Tb determine the static calibration code num-
position. ber, measure distance between center of rear axle
(1—Fig. 83) to bottom of rear tire (2). Use this meas-
123. GROUND SPEED CALIBRATION CODE urement and select the static calibration code number
NUMBER. A ground speed calibration code number fi:-om the chart (Fig. 83).
must be programmed into the digital instrument The procedure for entering the static calibration
cluster in order to calculate ground speed. Tb check code number is the same as the standard code number
the code number, tum the key switch to ACC position. as outlined in paragraph 124.
Push and hold the Calibrate button. The four-digit
code number will be displayed on the lower display 126. Tb determine the dynamic calibration code
screen until the button is released. number, measure a straight line course 400 feet (122
There are three types of code numbers that can be m) long. See Fig. 84. For best accuracy, choose a
used, depending on how the tractor is equipped and course surface of low grass crop or uniformly tilled
how much accuracy is needed. Different types of code ground. The next best surface, in order, is gravel,
numbers are as follows: blacktop or concrete.
1. Standard program calibration code number that Start the tractor, then push and hold the Calibrate
can be used only on tractor equipped with true ground and Ground speed buttons at the same time for three
speed sensor. seconds to enter the ground speed calibration mode.
2. Dynamic calibration code number (most accu- The calibration readout will fiash ON and OFF on the
rate) that is recommended for tractors with or with- lower display screen. At the end of three seconds, the
out true ground speed sensor. readout will stop fiashing and a short audible signal
3. Static calibration code nimiber that can be used will indicate that the ground speed calibration mode
for tractors with or without true ground speed sensor. has been entered.
Start driving the tractor toward the measured
124. Tb enter the Standard code number 6027 into course with the implement out ofthe ground to create
the digital instrument cluster, tum key switch to ACC a no-slip condition. As you pass the start mark, mo-
position. Push Calibrate and Ground speed buttons mentarily push, then release the Start button. The
at the same time for three seconds to enter the ground display will reset to zero and begin to accumulate. As
speed calibration mode. The calibrate readout will you pass the finish mark, momentarily push, then
fiash ON and OFF on lower display screen. At the end release the Stop button. The display will now show
of three seconds, readout will stop fiashing and a the dynamic calibration code number.
short audible signal will indicate that the ground The code number displayed on the lower screen will
speed calibration mode has been entered. Use the be automatically entered in the instrument cluster
Start button to increase or the Stop button to decrease memory after two seconds. Push the Ground speed
the calibration code number to 6027. The code num- button to exit the program mode and retum to opera-
ber will automatically be entered into the instrument tion mode.
cluster memory after two seconds. Turn key switch to
OFF position. 127. ENGINE HOUR INDICATOR. The instru-
ment cluster will record engine hours of operation any
time the key switch is ON and engine is running.
STATtC CALIBRATION CODE NUMBERS Tb display, total engine hours, tum key switch to
accessory position. The upper display screen will read
STATIC STATIC MEASURING
LOADED RADIUS CALIBRATION STATIC LOADED RADIUS ACC and the lower display screen will show the total
Inch mm
CODE NUMBER engine hours of operation.
28-1/2 724 7462
29 737 7334
128. GEAR READOUT. A gear readout display will
29-1/2 749 7210 be shown on the lower display screen when transmis-
30 762 7090
30-1/2 775 6973
31 787 6861
31-1/2 800 6752
32 813 6646
32-1/2 825 6544
MEASURE FROM CENTER
33 838 6445 OF AXLE (1) TO BOTTOM
33-1/2 851 6349 OF THE TIRE (2).
34 864 6255 START 400 FEET FINISH
34-1/2 876 6165
Fig. 84—To determine the dynamic caiibration code
Fig. 83—Chart showing method of seiecting static caii- number, tractor must be driven aiong a 400-foot (122
bration code numt>er. m) straight'iine course. Refer to text.

58

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
sion control lever is used to select a forward or reverse
speed. The gear readout is based on engine rpm and
ground speed inputs. Four indicators are used to
identify the gear, forward, creep and reverse selec-
tions.
129. WINDSHIELD WIPER. Normal operation of
the windshield wiper is with key switch ON, wiper
should operate when wiper switch is moved to LO and
HI positions. Move wiper switch to OFF position and
wiper should retum automatically to PARK position.
If wiper motor does not operate in one or all posi-
tions, check cab relay, circuit breaker and fuse. Use a
voltmeter and check for voltage at wiper switch ter-
minal for red wire #830. If voltage reading is 12 volts,
move wiper switch control to LO position and check
for voltage at switch terminal for orange wire #833.
Then, move switch control to HI position and check
for voltage at switch terminal for orange wire #832.
If no voltage is found at red wire #830 terminal, check
wiring, ignition switch and fuses. If voltage reaches
red wire #830 terminal, but does not reach orange
wire #833 or orange wire #832 terminals as switch is
operated, renew wiper switch. If voltage is present at
each terminal and switch is in proper position, test
for voltage in wires as close to wiper motor as possible.
If voltage is present at wiring, but motor does not run,
renew motor. If no voltage is present, check wiring
between switch and motor.
130. CAB FAN MOTOR. Cab fan (blower) motor
is used for cab ventilation, heater or air conditioning
system fan as models are equipped.
If motor fails to operate with key switch ON and
blower switch turned to low, high or purge position,
use a voltmeter and check for voltage at terminal for
red wire #820 at blower switch. If no voltage is pre-
sent, check wiring, ignition switch and circuit
breaker. Repair as necessary. If voltage is present at
red wire #820 terminal, check for voltage at orange
wires #822, #823 and #824 terminals at fan switch as
blower switch is turned to low, high and purge. If
voltage is not present at all locations with blower
switch turned to proper position, renew blower
switch.
If voltage is present at all terminals, unplug resis-
tor board connector. With key switch ON and blower
switch turned to purge position, use a 12 volt test
light and check for current at the orange wire #824 of
connector. Tarn switch to high position and check for
POWER SHIFT TRANSMISSION
All tractors are equipped with a full power shift
transmission. The full power shift design permits
shifting the transmission anj^ime without using the
inching (clutch) pedal. This includes changing speed
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 129-132
current at the orange wire #823 of connector. Tum
switch to low position and check for current at the
orange wire #822 of connector. If there is no current
present at any ofthe three tests, check for faulty wires
between blower switch and resistor board connector.
Repair as necessary.
If current is present at all the connector terminals,
reconnect the resistor board. If blower will operate in
purge position but not in high or low positions, renew
resistor board. If blower does not operate in any
position, make sure motor ground is good and renew
blower motor as required.
131. HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONING.
Heater and air conditioner blower motor is the same
blower as the cab ventilating blower. Refer to para-
graph 130 for test procedures. However, the air con-
ditioning system compressor clutch, high and low
pressure switches and temperature control switch
may be checked as individual units.
Before attempting to diagnose electrical problems
in air conditioning system, make sure compressor belt
is tight, that condenser and evaporator cores are
clean to ensure maximum air fiow and that system is
filled with correct amount of refrigerant.
132. COMPRESSOR CLUTCH CIRCUIT TEST.
With engine running, set temperature control switch
to coldest position and turn blower switch to low or
high position. Clutch should engage as blower switch
is turned ON. If clutch does not engage, use a voltme-
ter to check for voltage at compressor clutch. If volt-
age is present, renew compressor clutch.
If no voltage is present at clutch, disconnect the
wires at high-pressure switch and install a jumper
wire to bypass the switch. If compressor clutch en-
gages, check system pressure or renew high-pressure
switch as necessary. If clutch still fails to engage,
disconnect wires from low-pressure switch located in
cab roof and install jumper wire to b3rpass the switch.
If clutch engages, check system pressure and refrig-
erant level or renew low-pressure switch as neces-
sary.
If clutch still fails to engage, use a 12 volt test light
and check for current at temperature control switch.
If light fails to come on at either terminal and blower
motor is working, check the red wire #800 from
blower switch to the temperature control switch. Re-
pair as necessary.
selections when tractor is moving or stationary, or
when changing direction of travel.
A hydraulic actuated multiple disc, wet-tj^e mas-
ter clutch controlled by the inching pedal is used on
59

Paragraph 133
all models. The clutch assembly is mounted on the
range input shaft and is located between the speed
and range transmission housings.
Tractors may be equipped with a standard 18-speed
forward/2-speed reverse transmission or an 18-speed
forward/4-speed reverse transmission. These trans-
missions may be optionally equipped with a creeper
drive. The creeper drive provides an additional six
low-forward speeds and one or two low-reverse speeds
for a total of 24 speeds forward and 3 or 6 reverse
speeds. Refer to Figs. 85 and 86 for shift patterns.
OPERATION
All Models
133. The transmission control lever is used to select
the desired forward speed, reverse speed, neutral
position or park lock position. The transmission can
be shifted to any forward speed, reverse speed or
neutral when tractor is moving or stationary. When
changing direction of travel, always slow the tractor
speed before moving the control lever to the desired
direction of travel.
When selecting speeds with tractor moving, move
control lever through the speed range to the desired
speed selection. For smooth speed changes, move
control lever one speed at a time. When shifting from
forward to reverse or reverse to forward, hesitate in
neutral for approximately one second to allow master
clutch pressure to drop. Tb prevent excessive decel-
eration of tractor, always down shift one speed at a
time.
Fig. 85—Power shift transmission shift patterns for
tractors equipped with 18 forward/2 reverse or 24 for-
ward/3 reverse (with creeper) transmissions.
60
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
When selecting speeds with tractor stationary, trac-
tor motion can be started with or without using the
inching pedal as follows:
WITHOUT INCHING PEDAL, move transmission
control lever from neutral position to desired speed
selection. Tractor will immediately start moving in
the selected speed.
WITH INCHING PEDAL, push inching pedal
down and move transmission control lever to the
desired speed selection. The tractor will start moving
in the selected speed when inching pedal is released.
The inching pedal can be used to move the tractor
when operating in confined areas, for connecting im-
plements to the tractor and for stopping the tractor
without down shifting to neutral position.
CAUTION: Do not ride the inching pedai when
transmission Is under ioad. Reiease inching pedai
completely within five seconds for improved ciutch
service life.
Always place transmission control lever in park
position before leaving the tractor. Tractor must be
completely stopped before shifting to park position.
When disengaging the park lock, always move control
lever fully into neutral slot before trying to select 3rd
or 4th reverse speed.
Engage the creeper drive as follows: Place trans-
mission control lever in neutral or park position.
Move the creeper solenoid switch lever (SL—Fig. 87)
to the right (ON position). The switch lever will block
out transmission shift quadrant for forward speeds
13 through 18. With creeper clutch engaged, move
transmission control lever to regular speed position 1
or 2 for creeper speed 1, regular speed 3 or 4 for
Fig. 86—Power shift transmission shift patterns for
tractors equipped with 18 forward/4 reverse or 24 for-
ward/6 reverse (with creeper) transmissions.
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 134-135

creeper speed 2 and so on up to regular speed 11 or
12 for creeper speed 6. See Fig. 88.
CONTROL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
Ail Models
134. INCHING PEDAL. Tb adjust the inching
pedal linkage, refer to Fig. 89, loosen the locknut and
back off pedal stop bolt so it is clear of pedal in
released position. Loosen the locknut on the lower
end ofthe inching spool control cable. Loosen the two
bolts at the fiange so that sleeve will tum. Tum sleeve
counterclockwise until tension is removed from con-
trol cable. Push and hold the inching pedal tight
against the fire wall. Tum the sleeve clockwise until
you feel resistance, then tighten the fiange mounting
bolts. Tighten the locknut against the sleeve. Turn the
pedal stop bolt inward until it contacts the pedal, then
tum it inward an additional three or four full turns
and tighten locknut against the bracket. Check the
cable travel from fully engaged to fully disengaged.
The correct travel is Vs inch (20 mm). Measure the
cable travel at upper end of cable under engine hood
on the fire wall. If adjustment is not satisfactory,
disconnect linkage from valve £ind check valve spool
disengaged position. End of valve spool must be 1%
inch (41 mm) from face of valve in disengaged posi-
tion. Readjust control cable sleeve, if necessary.
135. FORWARD REVERSE SPOOL. To adjust
the forward-reverse spool linkage, refer to Fig. 90 and
loosen locknut at top of sleeve on the forward-reverse
spool. Loosen the two bolts for the sleeve fiange so the
sleeve will turn. Place the transmission control lever
in PARK position. Turn the sleeve clockwise or coun-
terclockwise as required to center the control lever in
the park slot ofthe shift quadrant. Tighten the fiange
bolts and tighten the locknut at the top ofthe sleeve.
Start the engine and operate at low idle speed. Hold
the inching pedal down in disengaged position. Move
the control lever about half way into the forward
speed slot. The lever must be in the center ofthe slot,
not touching either side. Move the lever to the second
speed reverse position. The lever must be in the
center ofthe slot, not touching either side. Readjust
linkage if necessary. If adjustment is still unsatisfac-
tory, stop the engine and disconnect linkage from
forward-reverse valve spool. The spool is spring
loaded to remain in neutral position. Measure the
distance from end of valve spool to valve face. Meas-
urement should be 1 Vs inch (29 mm).
RETURN SPRING

MASTER
CLUTCH PEDAL

FLAT WASHER

87—Creeper soienoid controi switch lever (SL) is

iocated in transmission quadrant as shown.

Regular Forward
1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12
Speed
Creeper Forward
1 2 3 4 5 6
Speed

Regular Reverse
1-2 3-4
Speed
Creeper Reverse
1 2
Speed

Fig, 88—Chart showing regular speed positions that 89—Exploded view of Inching pedai linkage. Refer
match creeper speed positions. to text for adjustment procedure.

61

Paragraphs 136-139
136. TRANSMISSION SHIFT LINKAGE. Tb ad-
just the transmission shift linkage, refer to Fig. 91
and proceed as follows: Disconnect the ball joint from
the transmission shift lever. Move transmission shift
lever on the valve, to the highest position, then move
it downward to the first detent position. Move trans-
mission control lever to the first speed forward posi-
tion on shift quadrant. Control lever must be centered
on the line for first speed forward. Adjust the linkage
so that the stud on ball joint is aligned with the hole
in transmission shift lever. Connect the ball joint to
the shift lever.
Start the engine and operate at low idle speed with
inching pedal fully depressed. Check for each of the
detent positions in all 18 speeds forward, all reverse
speeds and neutral position. The control lever must
have clearance at end of slot when in 18th speed
position. Readjust if necessary.
137. PARK LOCK LINKAGE. Tb adjust the park
lock linkage, refer to Fig. 92 and proceed as follows:
NOTE: Make sure transmission controi iinkage is
properiy adjusted as outlined in paragraph 136
before adjusting park iock iinkage.
Block tractor rear tires securely. Place transmis-
sion control lever in PARK position. Check position of
the bellcrank. Bellcrank must be tight against the
cover. Remove the lower clevis from the bellcrank and
r in Fig. 93. Use M6 bolts and a lift bracket on the
\ inching spool and forward-reverse spool housings.
OUTER
LOCK NUT _
\ and move control lever to rotate the cam assembly
LOWER
INNEn —
JAM BOLT
Ntrr
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL l£VE It
BELL CRANK
FLANOE ' ^
Fig. 90—Expioded view of forward-reverse vaive iinic-
age. Refer to text for adjustment procedure.
62
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
adjust length of control cable so that bellcrank is tight
against the cover.
When transmission control lever is moved from
forward to reverse, the control lever should not touch
either lip of the park lock control lever. If necessary,
loosen bulkhead nuts and move park lock cable to
help alignment. Then, tighten the nuts when adjust-
ment is complete.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL VALVE
All Models
138. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Although some
components which make up the control valve can be
removed without removing the control valve assem-
bly, the following paragraphs will outline the re-
moval, disassembly, reassembly and reinstallation of
the complete valve assembly.
Tb remove the transmission valve assembly, first
remove battery covers, then disconnect battery cables
and remove batteries. Unbolt and remove step assem-
bly from tractor. Remove drain plug and drain fiuid
from speed transmission. Disconnect neutral start
switch, transmission system pressure switch and if so
equipped, the creeper drive solenoid wires. Discon-
nect and remove control cables from inching spool
(master clutch) and forward-reverse spool. Discon-
nect hydraulic tubes from control valve assembly.
Remove the link rod from the speed shift lever. Re-
move the two MIO bolts (X—Fig. 93) and install two
MIO dowels that are approximately 9 inches (229
mm) long. Then, remove the 12 shaded bolts shown
Unbolt and remove the cover plate, refer to Fig. 94
until access holes in cam align with the three valve
mounting bolts. Remove the three Allen head bolts.
Using a hoist, remove valve assembly from tractor.
139. Tb remove the valve mounting plate, refer to
Fig. 95 and remove the bolt from the front and the
tube retainer from behind the mounting plate. If so
equipped, remove the tube nut for the creeper clutch
feed tube at back side of plate. Remove the four other
retaining bolts and lift off mounting plate. Remove
the four oil feed tubes from plate to transmission.
Remove the plate mounting gasket.
Tb reinstall the mounting plate, first install new
"O" rings on the three range clutch feed tubes. Using
a new gasket, install the mounting plate. Install the
four plate retaining bolts and hand tighten. Install
the three range clutch oil feed tubes in valve mount-
ing plate bores. Install the tube retainer (Fig. 95) and
secure with bolt. Install new "O" rings on the four
speed clutch oil feed tubes and coat "O" rings with
petroleum jelly. Install the two 5.3 inch (134.0 mm)

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
tubes in the top two bores. Install the 5.8 inch (148.0
mm) tube in the third bore and the 7.0 inch (178.9
mm) tube in the bottom bore. Push tubes inward until
they are fully seated. Tighten the four plate retaining
bolts and the tube retainer bolt to a torque of 38-45
ft.-lbs. (52-61 N.m). Connect creeper clutch feed tube,
if so equipped.
140. Tb remove the control housing, refer to Fig. 96
and remove the transmission pressure switch. Re-
move the range (upper) accumulator and the speed
(lower) accumulator. Remove both detent plugs and
detent springs. Remove the last control housing re-
taining bolt (just above control lever shaft). Use a pry
bar at the upper right and lower left corners to pry
control housing loose from valve bo<fy, then lift off
control housing and gasket.
TRANSMISSION
Fig, 91—Expioded view of transmission shift iiniiage. Refer to text for adjustment procedure.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraph 140
Drive out retaining pin and remove control lever.
Remove selector control gear and shaft assembly.
Refer to Fig. 97 and remove plug with "O" ring, spring
and shuttle spool. Remove detent assemblies from
inside. Unbolt and remove cover and gasket, then
remove the outer relief spring and ball. Remove con-
trol shaft oil seal and bearing.
Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing
excessive wear or other damage. Internal parts of
shuttle spool are not serviced separately. Outer relief
spring should have a free length of 1.25 inches (31.75
mm) and should test 7.25-8.0 lbs. (32.24-35.64 N)
when compressed to a length of 0.6 inch (15.19 mm).
Shuttle spool spring free length should be 2.90 inches
(73.67 mm) and should test 20.0 lbs. (89.96 N) when
compressed to a length of 0.98 inch (25.0 mm). Detent
springs should have a free length of 2.21 inches (56.15
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL
LEVER
nnnnn
TRANSMISSION /
CONTROL LEVER / o
IN FIRST SPEED
FORWARD POSITION
63

Paragraphs 141-142
mm) and should test 4.6 lbs. (20.46 N) when com-
pressed to a length of 1.26 inches (32.0 mm).
Using new gasket, oil seal, beeiring and "O" ring,
reassemble control housing, but do not install detent
springs and plugs. Tighten the seven control housing
COTTER PW BELLCflANK UNK
Fig. 92—Exploded view of park lock linkage. Refer to
text for adjustment procedure.
iO
Fig. 93—Remove the two MiO bolts (X) and instail two
dowei rods, then remove the 12 shaded boits shown.
84
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
bolts to a torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs. (26-31 N.m). Tighten
shuttle spool plug to a torque of 60-70 ft.-lbs. (81-95
N.m). Lay control housing aside for later installation.
141. Refer to Fig. 96 and remove the cam control
shaft spacer, then remove the cam assembly and cam
shaft. Remove the pin stop and reverse stop pin.
Remove bearing and spacer from the three cam spool
pins.
142. Remove the three forward-reverse spool hous-
ing bolts and strap. See Fig. 98. Tap the housing
lightly to loosen, then remove housing and gasket.
Remove range blocker pin from bottom of spool hous-
ing, oil seal, plug and "O" ring from top and safety
start switch with "O" ring from side of housing. Re-
move detent spring and seal insert with "O" ring, then
withdraw forward-reverse spool with stop washer.
Slide stop washer from spool. Remove range blocker
plunger from valve body.
Remove two Allen head bolts and one hex head bolt,
then remove clutch spool housing and gasket. Re-
move plug, "O" ring and oil seal from spool housing.
Withdraw master clutch spool assembfy. Master
Fig. 94—With cover piate removed, move controi iever
to rotate cam assembiy untii access hoies in cam aiign
with the three vaive mounting boits.
Fig. 95—Unboit and remove tube retainer as shown.

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
clutch spool is available only as an assembly. Using a
magnet, remove clutch override spool and spring.
Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing
excessive wear or other damage. Clutch override
spring should have a free length of 2.14 inches (54.36
mm) and should test 16.2 lbs. (72.06 N) when com-
pressed to a length of 1.08 inches (27.51 mm). For-
ward-reverse detent spring should have a free length
of 2.22 inches (56.50 mm) and should test 25.3-26.6
lbs. (112.6-118.6 N) when compressed to a length of
0.67 inch (17.0 mm).
Identify and lay all parts aside in a clean area for
later assembly.
143. Refer to Fig. 99, turn valve body over and
remove the six lower cover retaining bolts. Remove
cover and gasket. Remove inner and outer springs,
inner and outer shims and modulating guide. Using
a magnet, remove piston spring and clutch control
piston. Remove the flow sensor spool and spring and
the piston dump spool and spring.
CAM
ASSEMBLY
96—Removal and disassembly of transmission control housing and relative components.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraph 143
Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or
other damage. Piston dump spring should have a free
length of 2.66 inches (67.6 mm) and should test 26.0
lbs. (115.6 N) when compressed to a length of 0.98
inch (25.0 mm). Flow sensor spring should have a free
length of 2.21 inches (56.04 mm) and should test 50.0
lbs. (222.4 N) when compressed to a length of 0.93
inch (23.5 mm). Control piston spring should have a
free length of 2.75 inches (69.74 mm) and should test
17.5-19.3 lbs. (77.79-85.79 N) when compressed to a
length of 0.98 inch (25.0 mm). Inner modulating
spring should have a free length of 2.91 inches (74.03
mm) and should test 65.0-69.0 lbs. (289.0-307.0 N)
when compressed to a length of 1.54 inches (39.0 mm).
Outer modulating spring should have a free length of
3.03 inches (77.08 mm) and should test 93.0-99.0 lbs.
(413.7-440.3 N) when compressed to a length of 1.54
inches (39.0 mm).
Identify and lay all parts aside in a clean area for
later assembly.
TTW4SMISSI0N
PRESSURE SWITCH
SPEED
ACCUMULATOB
65

Paragraphs 144-146
144. On models equipped with creeper drive, the
creeper valve body assembly (Fig. 100) is used in
place ofthe lower cover in Fig. 99. Ib disassemble the
creeper valve, remove the two screws from retaining
ring (Fig. 100) and remove retaining ring and sole-
noid valve. Remove the plug with "O" ring, spring and
spool.
Inspect spool and bore for scoring. The valve spring
should have a free length of 2.56 inches (65.0 mm)
and should test 56.0 lbs. (249.0 N) when compressed
to a length of 1.34 inches (34.0 mm).
Use all new "O" rings when reassembling. Lubri-
cate spool with new Hy-Tran Plus fluid and install in
valve body. Install spring and plug with "O" rings.
Install "O" rings on solenoid valve and install solenoid
and retainer ring. Secure retainer ring with screws.
145. Refer to Fig. 101 and remove the 1-3-5, odd-
even and L-M-H spools as follows: See Figs. 102 and
103 and insert the short end of a small Allen wrench
or other suitable tool through end of spool and into
hole in cam pin. Use a screwdriver to push Allen
wrench inward to disengage the lock pin from the cam
pin. Pull cam pin upward and release pressure on
Allen wrench. Pull cam pin from 1-3-5 spool. Remove
the 1-3-5 spool from the valve, then remove lock pin
and lock spring from spool.
Insert the short end ofthe Allen wrench in the cam
pin lock hole of the odd-even spool. Use the L-M-H
spool to push inward on Allen wrench and disengage
lock pin. Pull upward on cam pin and release pressure
PLUG
BOLT
SEAL
Fig. 97—Shuttie spooi and detent assemblies removed from controi housing.
66
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
on Allen wrench. Remove cam pin, then remove odd-
even spool. Remove lock pin and spring from spool.
Install the odd-even spool, without lock pin and
spring, back into the bore. Install the cam pin back
into the odd-even spool. Insert the short end of Allen
wrench in the cam pin lock hole of the L-M-H spool.
Use the odd-even spool to push inward on Allen
wrench and disengage the lock pin. Pull upward on
the cam pin and release pressure on the Allen wrench.
Remove the cam pin from the L-M-H spool. Remove
cam pin from the odd-even spool. Remove Allen
wrench, then remove the spools. Remove lock pin and
lock spring from L-M-H spool.
Inspect spools and bores for scoring or other dam-
age. Lock pin springs should have a free length of 1.25
inches (31.75 mm) and should test 2.59 lbs. (11.52 N)
when compressed to a length of 0.61 inch (15.44 mm).
Remove relief valve cup plug (Fig. 101), spring and
check ball. Relief spring should have a free length of
1.25 inches (31.75 mm) and should test 7.25-8.01 lbs.
(32.24-35.64 N) when compressed to a length of 0.6
inch (15.19 mm).
Use a suitable bearing puller to remove the control
shaft bearing from valve body, if necessary.
146. TD remove the reducing spool (Fig. 104), first
remove the five Allen head retaining bolts (Fig. 105)
and remove valve plate and gasket (Fig. 104). Use a
screwdriver to move spring and washer away fi:'om
retainer ring, then use needlenose pliers to remove
PLUG
0-RiNG

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
retainer ring. Remove reducing spool from port in
bottom of valve body. Remove spring and washer.
Inspect reducing spool and bore for scoring or other
damage. Spring should have a free length of 2.48
inches (62.89 mm) and should test 5.15-5.73 lbs.
(22.9-25.5 N) when compressed to a length of 0.81
inch (20.5 mm).
147. Tb remove the check valves (Fig. 106), first
note the direction of installation. See Fig. 107. If valve
is installed as in left view, thread a MIO x 1.25 x 20
nmi long bolt into base of the valve. Cool the valve by
spraying with liquid freon. While protecting the plate
surface, use a roll bar under bolt head to pry out check
valve.
ALLEN BOLT
-BOLT
CLUTCH
OVERRIDE-
SPOOL
SPRING-
Fig. 96—Master clutch and forward-reverse spool assemblies removed from transmission valve body.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 147-148
WARNING: Always wear safety goggles and pro-
tective gloves when working with liquid freon.
If valve is installed as in right view, remove the
valve cage, spring and check plate. Thread a MIO x
1.25 X 20 mm long bolt into center of check valve base.
Cool valve base by spra3dng with liquid freon. Protect
plate surface and use a roll bar under bolt head to pry
out check valve base.
When installing check valves in left view, use a seal
driver or in right view, use a piece of V2 inch (12.7 mm)
thin wall conduit. Drive valve inward until base is
seated in the bore.
148. When reassembling, use new "O" rings, seals
and gaskets and reverse the disassembly procedures.
STRAP
GASKET
VALVE BODY
67

Paragraph 148 (Cont.)
Lubricate all internal parts with clean Hy-Tran Plus
fluid. Before installing the gear selector cam, refer to
Fig. 108 and move the 1-3-5, odd-even and L-M-H cam
pins to fully down position. Install the gear selector
cam so that reverse blocker tab is at 7 o'clock position
as shown in Fig. 109. Use a screwdriver to move the
L-M-H spool cam pin upward until the cam is fully
engaged. The cam must rotate approximately 360
degrees from stop to stop. Install the shaft spacer and
control selector gear assembly. Align timing marks on
the cam gear and the control selector gear as shown
in Fig. 110.
Push the two cam detents back into their bores and
install the control housing assembly. Install detent
springs and plugs. Tighten plugs to a torque of 25-30
ft.-lbs. (34-41 N.m). Install speed (lower) accumulator
and tighten to a torque of 25-30 ft.-lbs. (34-41 N.m).
CLUTCH
CONTROL
PISTON
OUTER
SPRING
LOWER
COVER
Fig. 99—Lower cover, clutch control piston, flow sensor spool, piston dump spool and relative components removed
from control valve body.
68
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Install the range (upper) accumulator and tighten to
a torque of 60-70 ft.-lbs. (81-95 N.m).
Using a hoist, reinstall control valve assembly.
Move control lever to rotate cam until holes in cam
align with the three valve mounting bolt holes. Refer
to Fig. I l l and install bolts. Tighten the two M8 bolts
to a torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs. (26-31 N.m) and the M6
bolt to a torque of 8-10 ft.-lbs. (10.5-12 N.m). Refer to
Fig. 112 and install bolts in locations shown. Tighten
M8 bolts to a torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs. (26-31 N.m) and
MIO bolts to a torque of 38-45 ft.-lbs. (52-61 N.m).
Reconnect hydraulic tubes and refill transmission
with Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Adjust control linkage as
outlined in paragraphs 134 through 137. Connect the
neutral start switch, transmission system pressure
switch and if so equipped, the creeper drive solenoid
wires.
BOLT
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 149

PRESSURE TESTS ter clutch supply tube. Cap fitting on control valve
and place a drain pan under open end of tube. Place
transmission shift lever in PARK position, then dis-
All Models connect park lock cable clevis from park lock, using a
CAS-10753 seven gage bar, connect gages to the seven
149. To check the transmission valve and clutch ports shov^n in Fig. 113.
pressures, first refer to Fig. 113 and disconnect mas-
Connect a flowmeter (CAS-10283 or equivalent) to
a remote valve circuit. With engine operating at 1000
rpm, close load valve to partially restrict oil flow.
Warm the transmission oil to a temperature of 150°
F (65.5° C) and remove flowmeter.
With engine operating at 1100 rpm, use the trans-
mission clutch pressure check chart (Fig. 114) to
record the pressure gage readings required for each
speed selection. If regulated pressure is below 260-
280 psi (1793-1931 kPa) refer to paragraph 185 and
adjust regulated pressure at pto control valve.
With regulated pressure correct, engine operating
at 1100 rpm and inching pedal up, start in first speed
and record pressure readings. Proceed to each for-
Fig. 100—Exploded view of creeper drive vaive assem-
bly. ward speed up through eighteenth speed. Then, all
LOCK PIN
reverse speeds. If so equipped, check pressures in six
forward creeper speeds and reverse creeper speeds.
LOCK SPRING
If master clutch pressure is not within specifica-
tions, adjust as follows: If equipped vdth a creeper
drive, disconnect solenoid wire and creeper clutch
tube, then unbolt and remove creeper valve. See Figs.

CAM PIN
SPOOL

CUP
PLUG

LOCK PIN

Fig. 102—View showing method of securing cam pin in

spool. Loci< pin engages hoie in cam pin.

Fig. 103—Engage short end of small Allen wrench In

Fig. 101—View of 1-3-5, L-M-H and odd-even spoois re- hole in cam pin to disengage ioci( pin on 1-3-5 spooL
moved from transmission controi vaive body. Odd-even and L-M-H are simiiar.

69

Paragraph 150
99 and 100. If not equipped with creeper drive, unbolt
and remove lower cover. Remove clutch control pis-
ton, piston spring, inner and outer springs, shims and
guide. Remove flow sensor spool and spring, and
piston dump spool and spring. Count the inner and
outer shims on the shim guide. An approximate 5 psi
(34 kPa) pressure change will result by adding or
subtracting one inner and one outer shim. Add or
subtract shims as required to bring pressure within
specifications. Always change shims in pairs (one
inner and one outer). Using a new gasket, reinstall
clutch control piston, piston spring, guide, inner and
outer shims, inner and outer springs, flow sensor
spool and spring, and the piston dump spool and
spring. Install cover and tighten bolts to a torque of
19-23 ft.-lbs. (26-31 N.m).
If all clutch pressure readings are within specifica-
tions, the test is completed. If low pressure is indi-
cated in an odd-even, L-M-H or 1-3-5-R clutch,
depress the inching pedal and retest. By depressing
the inching pedal, you are checking only the 1-3-5-R
clutch. Arise in pressure indicates a leaking odd-even
or L-M-H clutch. By shifting from sixth through
twelfth speed, low and high range can be isolated. The
odd-even clutches can be capped off to isolate them
from the system.
When pressure recording is completed, compare
each actual reading with the specified pressure. Place
an 'X" in the box with low pressure. Using this
information, match 'X" marks to the clutch packs
with low pressure to determine the failed clutch pack
or packs.
VALVE
"BODY
Fig, 104^-Valve body plate and reducing spool removed from valve body.
70
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Check all clutch combinations to determine the
faulty clutch or clutches by process of elimination.
Residual pressure should be 3 psi (21 kPa) maximum.
If residual pressure is too high in transmission con-
trol valve, speed and range clutch life will be short-
ened. High residual pressure can be caused by
leaking seal rings, improper spool timing or restricted
drain or lube passages. Maximum lube pressure is
controlled by the cold oil relief valve in the hydraulic
filter base. Minimum lube pressure is controlled by
the size of the orifices in the lube distribution system.
Low lube pressures can be caused by leaks in the
system.
When pressure checks have been completed, recon-
nect park lock cable clevis, remove gages and com-
plete balance of tractor reassembly.
Drive the tractor, shifting through all speeds to
check operation of the transmission valve.
SPEED TRANSMISSION
The speed transmission contains the countershaft
and gears and if so equipped, the creeper drive clutch;
the input shaft and gears and the odd-even clutches;
and the output shaft and gears and the 1-3-5-R
clutches.
All Models
150. R&R AND OVERHAUL. To remove the
speed transmission assembly for service, proceed as
follows: Place transmission shift lever in PARK posi-
tion and block rear wheels securely. Remove front end
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 150 (Cont.)

weights, if so equipped. Remove drain plug and drain

transmission fluid. Close heater valves at engine and
disconnect heater hoses.
On left side of tractor, disconnect the lower oil
cooler hose from bulk head fitting. Remove cab floor
mat, then unbolt and remove access cover from floor.
Unbolt the bulk head fi^om cab support brackets.
Disconnect upper oil cooler hose at tee fitting under
cab. Disconnect the pto drain tube at the pto valve.
Remove the lube manifold supply tube and the trans-
mission lube tube from tractor. Remove front upper

Fig. 106—Before instailing cam assembly, move 1-3-5,

odd-even and L-M-H cam pins to their fuiiy down posi-
tion.

Fig. 105—Remove the five Men head bolts to remove

the valve body piate.

Fig. 109—Install the gear selector cam so the reverse

blocker tab Is at 7 o 'clock position.

VALVE BODY
Fig. 106—View showing iocation of check valves in Fig. 110—View showing timing marks on cam gear and
valve plate and valve body. controi seiector gear.

Fig. 107—Views showing the different directions of check vaive Instailation. Refer to text for removal and instailation
procedures,

^; 71
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 150 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

cab retaining nuts. Raise hood £ind make certain hood
hinge lock is engaged. Remove left hood strut. Discon-
nect Avirefi^omair conditioning compressor. Remove
compressor mounting bolts and drive belt. Remove
condenser pivot bolt and wing screws fi:'om radiator
support. Carefully lay condenser and compressor
with hoses attached, in the tractor cab. Remove hose
routing clamp from left side rail. Unbolt tool box from
left side rail. Remove fuel return line and throttle
cable from injection pump. Identify and disconnect
steering hoses fi^om hand pump. Disconnect wires
from starter solenoid on the firewall. Disconnect bat-
tery cables and remove batteries. Remove battery box
and cab steps. Clamp off the fuel hose between the
main tank and the auxiliary fuel tank. Disconnect the
hose from the auxiliary tank. Close the fuel tank
shut-ofT valve and disconnect fuel line and wiring
harness from auxiliary tank. Place a floor jack under
auxiliary tank support. Unbolt and remove auxiliary
tank and support. Remove shift linkage from lever on
control valve and disconnect inching pedal and for-
ward-reverse cables from top of control valve. Discon-
nect electrical connector at harness under left cab
door.

On right side of tractor, remove lower cab trim,

transmission filter cover and cover supports from
tractor. Disconnect wiring, then unbolt and remove
true ground speed sensor. Disconnect engine wiring
I harness and positive lead from bottom of cab floor.
Fig. 111—Move controi lever to rotate cam assembiy Remove oil cooler return line from hydraulic oil filter
until access holes in cam aiign with the three valve base and tee fitting under cabfloor.Unbolt hydraulic
mounting bolt holes. filter base from support bracket. Disconnect brake

Fig. 112—View showing location of the various size and iength of control valve and cover retaining bolts.
A. M8x 1.25 X 25 mm C. MlOx L5x 175 mm E. MlOx 1.5 X 55 mm
B. M8x 1,25 X 120 mm D. M8x 1.25 X 140 mm E MlOx 1.5 X 50 mm

72

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
valve return hose from brake valve. Loosen mounting
bolts and remove transmission filter screen housing
cover, filter screen locator plug and the suction
screen. Unbolt and remove filter screen housing, fil-
ter screen container, gasket and "O" ring from the
transmission housing. Working through the filter
screen opening, disconnect the three internal range
transmission clutch supply tubes at the 90 degree
elbows. Remove drawbar pivot pin and drawbar. In-
stall a splitting stand (17-526A or equivalent) on
tracks under the tractor. Bolt adapter plates to the
side rails. Use a jack on the splitting stand to support
the speed transmission housing. Install a cab support
(17-528-2) under each front rail of the cab. Adjust
supports to raise cab to clear the mounting studs.
Rotate square plate on each stud to lower studs out
of cab frame. Attach a rear housing handler (17-527)
under rear frame of tractor. Remove bolts securing
the speed transmission to the range transmission and
install two guide studs. Move front half of tractor
from rear half. Cab will remain with rear section.
151. With speed transmission separated from
range transmission, proceed as follows: If so
equipped, remove front drive shaft and shield as
TRANSMISSION VALVE
REGULATED MASTER
PRESSURE CLUTCH
SUPPLY SUPPLY
1. Regulated Pressure Port
2. Master Clutch Pressure Port
3. Odd/Even Pressure Port
4. 1.3,5,R Pressure Port
5. Low, Med, High Pressure Port
6. Residual Pressure Port
7. Lube Pressure Port
NOTE: Number 3 port is also used for creeper dutch
pressure wheri engaged if equipped. Ports 3A arrd 3B
are for isolating the odd/even clutch pressures.
Fig. 113—View showing location of gage instailation for pressure tests of transmission control valves and clutches.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraph 151
outlined in paragraph 12. Unbolt and remove the
drive guard from front of transmission housing. In-
stall a lifting bracket to rear of speed transmission
housing. Fasten a chain to lifting bracket and cab
mounts, then attach chain to a hoist. Raise hoist until
there is tension on lift chain. Refer to Fig. 115 and
remove the odd clutch supply tube, even clutch supply
tube, master clutch supply tube and if so equipped,
the creeper clutch supply tube. Remove the transmis-
sion shift link from the control valve lever. Disconnect
the neutral start switch wires, transmission system
pressure switch wire and the creeper drive clutch
solenoid wire, if so equipped. Disconnect the oil cooler
return tube from the hydraulic tee fitting. Unbolt and
separate speed transmission from flywheel housing.
Attach right side of speed transmission to an engine
stand. Remove left cab mount.
Refer to paragraphs 138 and 139 and remove trans-
mission control valve, valve mounting plate and the
four oil distributor tubes. Remove the lube manifold
and the three oil distributor tubes. Remove oil pres-
sure tube from countershaft rear bearing cage. Re-
move snap ring from rear of front drive £ixle drive
shaft, then remove the drive shaft from front of speed
transmission housing. Refer to Fig. 121 or 122 and
ODD/EVEN MANIFOLD LUBE MANIFOLD
ODD
3A
LUBE
73
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 151 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

o
Fig. 114~~Transmission clutch pressure check chart used in transmission pressure tests.

74

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
remove damper driven shaft (1) and coupling (2).
Remove the creeper clutch supply tube (70), if so
equipped. Unbolt and remove fii'ont bearing support
(5). With front of speed transmission housing facing
upw£ird, raise input shaft (IS—Fig. 116) about 1^/4
inches (45 mm) then remove countershaft assembly
(CS). Remove input shaft assembly (IS) and then
output shaft assembly (OS).
152. If so equipped, refer to Fig. 117 and disassem-
ble countershaft and creeper drive clutch as follows:
Remove the two seal rings (32) from rear end of shaft
(30). Using a press, remove front bearing cone (2) and
creeper driven gear (6) with thrust washers (3) and
thrust bearing (4). Remove needle bearing (5), thrust
washers (7) and thrust bearing (8). Remove snap ring
(13), backing plate (14), eight friction discs (15), seven
separator discs (16), reaction plate (17) and three
Belleville washers (18). Using compression sleeve
CAS-1903-3 or equivalent and a press, compress the
Belleville washers (11) and remove snap ring (10).
Remove the thirteen Belleville washers and snap ring
(12). Use a press to remove carrier assembly (24),
spacer (25) and 2nd-4th-6th driven gear (26). Remove
gear key (31) and snap rings (27 and 34). Turn shaft
over and use a press to remove rear bearing cone (40)
and lst-2nd drive gear (39). Remove gear key (31),
thrust washer (38) and snap ring (37). Press lst-3rd-
5th driven gear (35) and 3rd-4th drive gear (36) off
rear end of countershaft (30). Bump front (open) end
of clutch carrier (24) on a wood block to remove piston
(19). Remove teflon ring (21) and "O" ring (20) from
piston and teflon ring (22) and "O" ring (23) from
clutch carrier.
Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing
excessive wear or other damage. If end plug (28),
dowel pin (33), slotted spring pin (29) and coiled
spring pin have been removed, install as shown in
Fig. 118. If removed, install center gear key (31—Fig.
117). Install snap ring (34). Heat lst-3rd-5th driven
gear (35) to a temperature of 350° F (117° C) in a
CREEPER CLUTCH
SUPPLY
Fig, 115—Remove the supply tubes shown from trans-
mission control valve.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraph 152
bearing oven and install over rear of shaft until
seated against snap ring.
WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves
when handling heated parts.
Heat the 3rd-4th drive gear (36) to a temperature
of 350° F (177° C) and install against lst-3rd-5th
driven gear. Install snap ring (37). Flat side of snap
rings (34 and 37) should face away from the gears.
Install thrust washer (38) and gear k ^ . Heat lst-2nd
drive gear (39) to a temperature of 350° F (177° C)
and install against the thrust washer. Heat rear
bearing cone (40) to a temperature of 250° F (121° C)
and install against the gear. Install snap ring (27) so
that flat side will face away from gear (26) and so that
snap ring opening will be 180 degrees away from key
groove. Install gear key (31) for gear (26). Heat 2nd-
4th-6th driven gear (26) to a temperature of 350° F
(177° C) and install against snap ring. Install spacer
(25). Install "O" rings (23 and 20) in grooves of carrier
(24) and piston (19). Soak teflon rings (21 and 22) in
hot water to expand the rings, then install over the
"O" rings. Allow teflon rings to cool and contract.
Apply petroleum jelly to the rings and install piston,
flat side first, into the clutch carrier. Install the car-
rier on the shaft so the oil hole in the shaft is aligned
with the hole in the carrier. Install snap ring (12).
Install the 13 piston return Belleville washers (11) as
follows: Refer to Fig. 119 and install first washer
concave side down, second washer concave side up,
third washer concave side down and so on until all 13
washers are installed. Install a centering sleeve CAS-
1903-4 over the shaft. Install snap ring (10—Fig. 117)
over the centering ring. Align the opening in snap ring
with slotted spring pin (29) in the shaft. Install the
washer compression sleeve CAS-1903-5 over the
CS
Fig, 116—Front view of speed transmission showing
iocation of shafts.
CS. Countershaft IS. Input shaft OS. Output shaft
75
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 152 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

10
11

Fig. 117—Exploded view of countershaft and creeper clutch assembly and related parts.
1. Bearing cup
2. Front bearing cone
3. Thrust washers 12. Snap ring 22. Teflon ring 31. Gear keys 40. Rear bearing cone
4. Thrust hearing 13. Snap ring 23. "O"ring 32. Seal rings (2) 41. Bearing cup
5. Needle hearing 14. Backing plate 24. Clutch carrier 33. Dowel pin 42. Shims
6. Creeper driven gear 15. Friction discs (8) 25. Spacer 34. Snap ring 43. Rear hearing cage
7. Thrust washers 16. Separator discs (7) 26. 2nd-4th-6th driven 35. lst-3rd-5th driven 44. Bolt (6)
8. Thrust bearing 17. Reaction plate gear gear 45. Union
9. Seal ring 18. Belleville washers (3) 27. Snap ring 36. 3rd-4th drive gear 46. "0" rings
10. Snap ring 19. Piston 28. Plug 37. Snap ring 47. Connector
11. Belleville washers 20. "O"ring 29. Slotted spring pin 38. Thrust washer 48. "O"ring
(13) 21. Teflon ring 30. Countershaft 39. lst-2nd drive gear 49. Pressure tube

76
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 153-154

shaft and centering sleeve and on top ofthe snap ring.
Install compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 over the
shaft. Use a press to press the sleeves down until snap
ring is positioned in its groove. Install the three
Belleville washers (18) with concave sides facing up.
Install reaction plate (17), flat side up. Soak all fidc-
tion discs in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid, then starting
with a friction disc (15) and alternating with separa-
tor discs (16), install the 8 friction discs and 7 sepa-
rator discs. Install hacking plate (14), flat side down
and install snap ring (13). Install two thrust washers
(7) with thrust bearing (8) between washers. Install
needle bearing (5) and install new seal ring (9) on
creeper driven gear (6). Install creeper driven gear so
that splines of gear engages all of the friction discs.
Top of needle bearing (5) will be even with top of gear
hub when all discs are engaged on gear splines.
Install thrust washers (3) with thrust bearing be-
tween the washers. Heat front bearing cone (2) to a
temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install against
thrust washer. Install new seal rings (32). Lay coun-
tershaft with creeper drive clutch assembly aside in
a clean area for later installation.
154. Disassembly and reassembly of the speed
transmission input shaft for tractors with or without
creeper drive are similar. Any differences v^ll be
noted. Damper driven shaft (1—Fig. 121 or 122),
coupling (2) and front bearing support (5) were re-
moved in paragraph 151.
Ib disassemble the input shaft, first remove the five
seal rings (60). Then, using a suitable puller, remove
rear bearing cone (58). Remove spacers (52) and re-
taining rings (53). Remove thrust washers (50) and
thrust bearing (51). Remove lst-3rd-5th drive gear
(48) and needle bearing (49). Remove thrust washers
(46) and thrust bearing (47). Remove snap ring (45),
backing plate (44), seven friction discs (42), six sepa-
Fig. 119—View showing correct stacicing of Beiieviiie
washers.

153. On models without creeper drive, refer to Fig.

120 and disassemble and reassemble countershaft
assembly. Use a press to remove bearing cones and
gears. Heat bearing cones to a temperature of 250° F
(121° C) and gears to a temperature of 350° F (177°
C) before installing on countershaft. Lay countershaft
assembly aside in a clean area for later installation.

SLOTTED SPRING PIN (1) -

PRESS FLUSH WITH SHAFT OD

COILED SPRING PIN (1)-

PRESS FLUSH WiTH
HAFT 18
3.00 mm
(0.118 iNCH)

Fig. 120—Expioded view of countershaft and reiative

parts used on tractors without creeper drive.
1. Bolt (6) 10. Gear keys
2. Bearing cage 11. Countershaft
DOWEL PIN - PRESS
3. Shim 12. lst-3rd-5th driven gear
IN FLUSH AS SHOWN PLUG - PRESS IN 4. Bearing cup 13. Snap ring
PLACE AS SHOWN 5. Rear bearing cone 14. Snap ring
6. lst-2nd drive gear 15. 2nd-4th-6th driven gear
Fig. 118Sectionai view showing correct instaiiation 7. Thrust washer 16. Snap ring
ofpiug, doweipin, siotted spring pin and coiled spring 8. Snap ring 17. Front bearing cone
pin in creeper drive countershaft. 9. 3rd-4th drive gear 18. Bearing cup

77
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 154 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

1. Damper driven shaft

2. Coupling
3. Oil seal
4. Bolt (11)
5. Front bearing
support
6. Bearing cup
7. Front bearing cone
8. Thrust washers
9. Thrust bearing
10. Needle bearing
11. Spacer
12. Needle bearing
13. 2nd-4th-6th drive
gear
14. Thrust washers
15. Thrust hearing
16. Seal ring
17. Snap ring
18. Bacldng plate
19. Friction discs (9)
20. Separator discs (8)
21. Reaction plate
22. Snap ring
23. Belleville washers
(3)
24. Belleville washers
(13)
25. Snap ring
26. Piston
27. "O"ring
28. Teflon ring
29. Teflon ring
30. "O"ring
31. Clutch carrier
32. "O"ring
33. Teflon ring
34. Teflon ring
35. "O^'ring
36. Piston
37. Snap ring
38. Belleville washers
(13)
39. Belleville washers
(3)
40. Snap ring
41. Reaction plate
42. Friction discs (7)
43. Separator discs (6)
44. Backing plate
45. Snap ring
46. Thrust washers
47. Thrust hearing
48. lst-3rd-5th drive
gear
49. Needle bearing
50. Thrust washers
51. Thrust bearing
52. Spacers
53. Retaining rings
54. Coiled spring pin (5)
55. Slotted spring pin
(2)
56. Input shaft
57. Dowel pin (4)
58. Rear hearing cone
59. Bearing cup
60. Seal rings (5)
61 61.
62.
Shim
"O" rings (6)
64 63. Oil distributor tubes
(3)
Fig. 121—Expioded view of speed transmission input shaft and the odd and even clutches 64. Rear bearing cage
used on tractors not equipped with creeper speed. 65. Bolt (4)

78
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 154 (Cont.)

rator discs (43) and reaction plate (41). Remove the
three Belleville washers (39).
Use a puller £uid remove front bearing cone (7). If
so equipped, use a puller to remove creeper drive gear
(67—Fig. 122) and snap ring (66). On all models,
remove thrust washers (8) and thrust bearing (9).
Remove 2nd-4th-6th drive gear (13) and needle bear-
ings (10 and 12) with spacer (11). Remove thrust
washers (14) and thrust bearing (15). Remove snap
ring (17), backing plate (18), nine friction discs (19),
eight separator discs (20) and reaction plate (21).
Remove the three Belleville washers (23). Using com-
pression sleeve CAS-1903-3 or equivalent and a
press, compress the Belleville washers (24) and re-
move snap ring (22). Remove the thirteen Belleville
washers and snap ring (25). Remove snap rings (40
and 37) and thirteen Belleville washers (38) from
opposite side of carrier (31) in same manner. Press
carrier off front end of input shaft (56). Bump clutch
carrier (31) against a wood block to remove pistons
(26 and 36). Remove teflon rings (28, 29, 33 and 34)
and "O" rings (27, 30, 32 and 35) from pistons and
carrier.
Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing
excessive wear or other deimage. If dowel pins (57),
slotted spring pins (55) or coiled spring pins (54) have
been removed, install as shown in Fig. 123. Install
new "O" rings (27, 30, 32 and 35—Fig. 121 or 122) in
grooves in carrier and pistons. Soak teflon rings (28,
29, 33 and 34) in hot water to expand them. Install

"54

Fig. 122—Expioded view of speed transmission input shaft and odd and even dutches used on tractors with creeper
drive. Refer to Fig. 121 for iegend except for the foiiowing:
66. Retaining ring
67. Creeper drive gear 69. Elbow fitting 71. Seal ring
68. "O"ring 70. Creeper clutch supply tube 72. Seal ring

79

Paragraphs 155-156
teflon rings over the "O" rings. Allow rings to cool and
contract. Apply petroleum jelly to the rings and in-
stall pistons, flat side first, into carrier. Install snap
ring (37) in its groove on input shaft (56). Then,
aligning etch mark on face of carrier (31) and etch
mark on front end of input shaft, press carrier on
shaft until seated against snap ring. Turn unit over
and install snap ring (25) against carrier. Install the
13 piston return Belleville washers (24) as follows:
Refer to Fig. 119 and install first washer concave side
down, second washer concave side up, third washer
concave side down and so on until all 13 washers are
installed. Install centering sleeve CAS-1903-4 over
the shaft. Install snap ring (22—Fig. 121 or 122) over
the centering sleeve. Align opening in snap ring with
slotted spring pin in the shaft. Install the washer
compression sleeve CAS-1903-5 over the shaft and
centering sleeve and on top of the snap ring. Install
compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 over the shaft. Use a
press to press the sleeves down until snap ring is
positioned in its groove. Install Belleville washers
(38) and snap ring (40) in opposite side of clutch
carrier in same manner. Install the three Belleville
washers (23) with concave side facing up. Install
reaction plate (21), flat side up. Soak all friction discs
in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid, then starting with a
friction disc (19) and alternating with separator discs
(20), install the nine friction discs and eight separator
discs. Install backing plate (18), flat side down and
install snap ring (17). Install the three Belleville
washers, clutch pack and snap ring (39 through 45)
in the same manner. Rear clutch pack uses seven
friction discs and six separator discs. Install thrust
washers (14) and thrust bearing (15) between the
washers. Install needle bearing (12), spacer (11) and
second needle bearing (10). Install new seal ring (16)
on 2nd-4th-6th drive gear (13). Install 2nd-4th-6th
drive gear so that splines of gear engages all of the
friction discs (19). Install thrust washers (8) with
SLOTTED SPRING PIN (2) -
PRESS FLUSH WITH SHAFT OD
COILED SPRING PIN (5) -
PRESS FLUSH WITH SHAFT OD
\ 5th-6th driven gear (42), needle bearing (43), thrust
DOWEL PIN (4)-PRESS
IN FLUSH AS SHOWN
Fig. 123—Sectionai view showing correct installation
of dowei pins, slotted spring pins and coiled spring
pins in speed transmission Input shaft.
80
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
thrust bearing (9) between the washers. On models
so equipped, install snap ring (66—Fig. 122) and
install creeper drive gear (67), long hub first on the
shaft. Press gear into position. On all models, heat
front bearing cone (7—Fig. 121 or 122) to a tempera-
ture of 250° F (121° C) and install on shaft.
WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves
when handling heated parts.
Install thrust washers (46) with thrust bearing
between the washers. Install needle bearing (49) and
install a new seal ring on lst-3rd-5th drive gear (48).
Install the lst-3rd-5th drive gear so that splines of
gear engages all of the friction discs (42). Install
thrust washers (50) with thrust bearing (51) between
the washers. Install first spacer (52), two retaining
rings (53) and second spacer (52). Heat rear bearing
cone (58) to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and
install on shaft. Install the five new seal rings (60).
Lay input shaft assembly aside in a clean area for
later installation.
155. Ib disassemble the speed transmission output
shaft front clutches (reverse and 5th clutches), refer
to Fig. 124 and proceed as follows: Remove the four
seal rings (46) from front of output shaft (51). Using
a suitable puller, remove reverse driven gear (6) with
thrust washers (3) thrust bearing (4) and front bear-
ing cone (2). Remove needle bearing (5), thrust wash-
ers (7) and thrust bearing (8). Remove snap ring (10),
backing plate (11), seven friction discs (12), six sepa-
rator discs (13), reaction plate (14) and three
Belleville washers (16). Using compression sleeve
CAS-1903-3 or equivalent and a press, compress
Belleville washers (17) and remove snap ring (15).
Remove the eleven piston return Belleville washers
and snap ring (18). Use a screwdriver to remove snap
ring (38) out of its groove in rear of clutch carrier (24).
Then, using a suitable puller as shown in Fig. 125,
remove front clutch carrier assembly (24—Fig. 124).
Remove the three Belleville washers (32), backing
plate (34), seven friction discs (35), six separator discs
(36), reaction plate (37) and snap ring (38). Using a
compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 or equivalent and a
press, compress Belleville washers (31) and remove
snap ring (33). Remove the thirteen piston return
Belleville washers and snap ring (30). Remove the
thrust washers (40) and thrust bearing (41). Remove
bearing (44) and spacer (45). Bump open ends of
clutch carrier (24) on a wood block to remove pistons
(19 and 29). Remove teflon rings (21, 22, 26 and 27)
and "O" rings (20, 23, 25 and 28) from pistons and
carrier.
156. Tb disassemble the speed transmission output
shaft rear clutches (1st speed and 3rd speed), refer to
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 156 (Cont.)

Fig. 126 and proceed as follows: With front clutches
removed as in paragraph 155, remove the 3rd-4th
driven gear (45) with seal ring (42). Remove needle
bearing (46), thrust washers (43) and thrust bearing
(44). Remove snap ring (41), backing plate (40), eight
fi:iction discs (39), seven separator discs (38), reaction
plate (37) and three Belleville washers (35). Using
compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 or equivalent and a
press, compress Belleville washers (34) and remove
snap ring (36). Remove the thirteen Belleville wash-
ers and snap ring (33). Turn shaft over and use a
puller to remove rear bearing cone (5). Remove thrust
washers (6) and thrust bearing (7). Remove lst-2nd
driven gear (9) with seal ring (12), needle bearing (8),
thrust washers (10) and thrust bearing (11). Remove
snap ring (13), backing plate (14), ten friction discs

42

Fig. 124—Expioded view of speed transmission output shaft and front dutches (reverse and 5th speed). Refer also to
Fig, 126 for exploded view of rear clutches.
1. Bearing cup
2. Front bearing cone 13. Separator discs (6) 22. Tfeflonring 32. Belleville washers 42. 5th-6th driven gear
3. Thrust washers 14. Reaction plate 23. "O"ring (3) 43. Needle bearing
4. Thrust bearing 15. Snap ring 24. Front clutch carrier 33. Snap ring 44. Thrust bearing
5. Needle bearing 16. Belleville washers 25. "O"ring 34. Reaction plate 45. Spacer
6. Reverse driven gear (3) 26. Ifefionring 35. Friction discs (7) 46. Seal rings (4)
7. Thrust washers 17. Belleville washers 27. Tbflon ring 36. Separator discs (6) 47. Dowel pin (1)
8. Thrust bearing (11) 28. "Oaring 37. Backing plate 48. Dowel pins (3)
9. Seal ring 18. Snap ring 29. Piston 38. Snap ring 49. Coiled spring pins (5)
10. Snap ring 19. Piston 30. Snap ring 39. Seal ring 50. Slotted spring pins
11. Backing plate 20. "O"ring 31. Belleville washers 40. Thrust washers (4)
12. Friction discs (7) 21. Teflon ring (13) 41. Thrust bearing 51. Output shaft

81

Paragraphs 157-158
(16), nine separator discs (15), reaction plate (17) and
three Belleville washers (19). Using compression
sleeve CAS-1903-3 or equivalent and a press, com-
press piston return Belleville washers (20) and re-
move snap ring (18). Remove the thirteen Belleville
washers and snap ring (21). Press rear clutch carrier
(27) off rear end of output shaft (51). Bump open ends
of clutch carrier on a wood block to remove pistons (22
and 32). Remove teflon rings (24, 25, 29 and 30) and
"O" rings (23, 26, 28 and 31) from pistons and carrier.
Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing
excessive wear or other damage. If dowel pins, slotted
spring pins or coiled spring pins were removed from
output shaft, reinstall as shown in Fig. 127.
157. To reassemble the output shaft rear clutches,
refer to Fig. 126 and install new "O" rings (23, 26, 28
and 31) in grooves in pistons (22 and 32) and rear
clutch carrier (27). Soak teflon rings (24, 25, 29 and
30) in hot water to expand the rings, then install them
over the "O" rings. Lubricate the rings with petro-
leum jelly and install piston assemblies, flat side first,
in carrier. Install snap ring (33) in the third snap ring
groove from rear end of output shaft (51). Position the
snap ring so the slotted spring pin is between ends of
snap ring. Align the etch mark on front face of rear
clutch carrier with the etch mark on rear end of
output shaft and install carrier from rear of shaft,
against the installed snap ring. Install snap ring (21)
against rear side of carrier. Install the 13 piston
return Belleville washers (20) as follows: Refer to Fig.
119 and install first washer concave side down, sec-
ond washer concave side up, third washer concave
side down and so on until all 13 washers are installed.
Install centering sleeve CAS-1903-4 over the shaft.
Install snap ring (18—Fig. 126) over the centering
sleeve. Align opening in snap ring with slotted spring
pin in the shaft. Install the washer compression
Fig. 125—View showing front clutch carrier being re-
moved from speed transmission output shaft.
82
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
sleeve CAS-1903-5 over the shaft and centering
sleeve and on top of the snap ring. Install compression
sleeve CAS-1903-3 over the shaft. Use a press to press
the sleeve down until snap ring is positioned in its
groove. Install the three Belleville washers (19) con-
cave side up and the reaction plate (17) flat side up.
Soak all friction discs in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid.
Starting with a friction disc (16) and alternating with
separator discs (15), install the ten friction discs and
nine separator discs. Install backing plate (14) flat
side down and install snap ring (13). Install thrust
washers (10) vdth thrust bearing (11) between wash-
ers and install needle bearing (8). Using new seal ring
(12) on lst-2nd driven gear (9), install gear so that
splines of gear engages all of the friction discs (16).
Install thrust washers (6) with thrust bearing (7)
between washers. Heat rear bearing cone (5) in a
bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and
install bearing.
WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves
when handling heated parts.
Using the special tools, install front 13 piston re-
turn Belleville washers (34) and snap ring (36) in
same manner as rear set. Install three Belleville
washers (35) concave side up and reaction plate (37)
flat side up. Soak all friction discs (39) in clean Hy-
Tran Plus fluid. Starting with a friction disc (39) and
alternating with separator discs (38), install the eight
friction discs and seven separator discs. Install back-
ing plate (40) flat side down and install snap ring (41).
Install thrust washers (43) with thrust bearing (44)
between washers and install needle bearing (46).
Using new seal ring (42) on 3rd-4th driven gear (45),
install gear so that splines of gear engages all of the
friction discs (39).
158. With rear clutches installed on output shaft as
outlined in paragraph 157, refer to Fig. 124 and
assemble front clutches (reverse and 5th speed). In-
stall new "O" rings (20, 23, 25 and 28) in grooves in
pistons (19 and 29) and front clutch carrier (24). Soak
teflon rings (21,22, 26 and 27) in hot water to expand
the rings. Install the rings over the "O" rings and
allow to cool and contract. Lubricate the rings v^th
petroleum jelly and install pistons flat side first in the
clutch carrier. Install spacer (45), thrust bearing (44)
and needle bearing (43) over front end of shaft. Using
a new seal ring (39) on 5th-6th driven gear (42),
install the gear over the needle bearing (43). Install
thrust washers (40) with thrust bearing (41) between
washers. Install snap ring (33) in groove next to
thrust washer (40) so that gap in snap ring is centered
over slotted spring pin in shaft. Install the 13 piston
return Belleville washers (31) as follows: Install first
washer concave side up, second washer concave side
down, third washer concave side up and so on until
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 158 (Cont.)

all 13 washers are installed. Install snap ring (30)
over shaft so snap ring lays on top of last Belleville
washer (31). Install the washer compression sleeve
CAS-1903-5 over the Belleville washers. Install com-
pression sleeve CAS-1903-3 over the previously in-
stalled sleeve. Use a press and apply down pressure
on sleeves until snap ring (30) is positioned in its
groove. Place snap ring (38) over shaft and lay it on
gear (42). Install backing plate (37) flat side up. Soak
all friction discs in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Starting
with a friction disc (35) and alternating with separa-
tor discs (36), install the seven friction discs and six
separator discs over splines of gear (42). Install reac-
tion plate (34) flat side down and install the three
Belleville washers (32) concave side down. Align the
etch mark on front face of front clutch carrier (24)
with the etch mark on front end of output shaft (51)
and install the carrier. Aligning the etch marks will
align the oil holes in shaft and carrier. Use a screw-
driver to install snap ring (38) in its groove inside the
carrier. Install snap ring (18) over the shaft. Using
washer compression sleeve CAS-1903-5 and compres-

51

10

Fig, 126—Exploded view of speed transmission output shaft rear dutches (1st speed and 5th speed). Refer to Fig. 124
for exploded view of front dutches.
1. Bolt (4) 12. Seal ring
2. Bearing case 13. Snap ring 21. Snap ring 31. "O"ring
3. Shim 14. Backing plate 22. Piston 32. Piston 39. Friction discs (7)
4. Bearing cup 15. Separator discs (9) 23. "O"ring 33. Snap ring 40. Backing plate
5. Rear bearing cone 16. Friction discs (10) 24. Teflon ring 34. Belleville washers 41 Snap ring
6. Thrust washers 17. Reaction plate 25. Teflon ring (13) 42. Seal ring
7. Thrust bearing 18. Snap ring 26. "O"Hng 35. Belleville washers 43 Thrust washers
8. Needle bearing 19. Belleville washers 27. Rear clutch carrier (3) 44. Thrust bearing
9. lst-2nd driven gear (3) 28. "(F ring 36. Snap ring 45. 3rd-4th driven gear
10. Thrust washers 20. Belleville washers 29. Teflon ring 37. Reaction plate 46. Needle bearing
11. Thrust bearing (13) 30. Ti»non ring 38. Separator discs (8) 51. Output shaft

83
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 159 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

sion sleeve CAS-1903-3 and a press, apply down
pressure on sleeves until snap ring is installed in its
groove. Install the 11 piston return Belleville washers
(17) as follows: Install first washer concave side down,
second washer concave side up, third washer concave
side down and so on until all 11 washers are installed.
Install centering sleeve CAS-1903-4 over the shaft.
Install snap ring (15) over the centering sleeve. Align
opening in snap ring with slotted spring pin in the
shaft. Install the washer compression sleeve CAS-
1903-5 over the shaft and centering sleeve and on top
COILED SPRING PIN (5) -
PRESS FLUSH .WITH SHAFT OD
^ =
DOWEL PIN (4) - PRESS
IN FLUSH AS SHOWN
SLOTTED SPRING PIN (4) -
PRESS FLUSH WITH SHAFT OD
Fig. 127—Sectionai view showing correct Instailation
of dowei pins, coiied spring pins and slotted spring
pins in output shaft.
of the snap ring. Install compression sleeve CAS-
1903-3 over the shaft. Use a press and apply down
pressure on sleeves until snap ring (15) is positioned
in its groove. Install the three Belleville washers (16)
concave sides up and reaction plate (14) flat side up.
Soak all friction discs in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid.
Starting with a friction disc (12) and alternating with
separator discs (13), install the seven friction discs
and six separator discs. Install backing plate (11) flat
side down and install snap ring (10). Install thrust
washers (7) with thrust bearing (8) between washers
and install needle bearing (5). Using new seal ring (9)
on reverse driven gear (6), install gear so that splines
of gear engages all of the friction discs (12). Install
thrust washers (3) with thrust bearing (4) between
washers. Heat front bearing cone (2) in a bearing oven
to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install on
shaft.
WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves
when handling heated parts.
Install the four seal rings (46) in grooves in output
shaft.
159. To air check the clutches on input shaft, output
shaft and countershaft, apply compressed air with an
air gun to the various oil ports in shafts. If a clutch
fails to move under air pressure, it would indicate

3R0 SPEED HYDRAULIC

CLUTCH PACK - (8) FRICTIOI^
DISCS,{7) SEPARATOR DISCS
AND (13) BELLEVILLE RETURN
SPRINGS..
1ST SPEED HYDRAULIC
CLUTCH PACK - (10) FRICTION
DISCS.fQ) SEPARATOR DISCS AND
(13) BELLEVILLE RETURN SPRINGS.
REVERSE SPEED HYDRAULIC
CLUTCH PACK - (7) FRICTION
DISCS,(6) SEPARATOR DISCS
AND (11) BELLEVILLE RETURN
SPRINGS.
5TH SPEED HYDRAULIC
CLUTCH PACK - (7) FRICTION
DISCS.(6) SEPARATOR DISCS
AND (13) BELLEVILLE RETURN
SPRINGS.

SPEED TRANSMISSION
OUTPUT SHAFT

FRONT BEARING CONE

REAR BEARING CONE

(5TH-6TH) SPEED
DRIVEN GEAR REVERSE SPEED
(1ST-2ND) SPEED DRIVEN GEAR
DRIVEN GEAR
FRONT CLUTCH
(3RD-4TH) SPEED PLATE CARRIER
DRIVEN GEAR
Fig, 126Sectional view ofassembied speed transmission output shaft and 1st, 3rd, 5th and reverse dutches.

84
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 160

leaking seals on that clutch piston. Disassemble and
reseal as required.
160, Before installing the speed transmission
shafts, renew bearing cups (15,16 and 20—Fig. 129)
infi:'ontbearing support (19 or 20). Do not install new
oil seal (18) at this time. Unbolt and remove rear
bearing cages (2, 6 and 10), keeping shim packs (3, 7
and 11) with their respective cage. Renew bearing
cups (4,8 and 12) as required. Inspect needle bearing
(13) for fi'ont drive axle drive shaft and renew if
necessary.
Reinstall bearing cages (2, 6 and 10) with original
shim packs (3, 7 and 11), but do not tighten bolts (1,
5 and 9) at this time. Install the output shaft assem-
bly in transmission bousing. Lubricate seal rings on
rear of input shaft and inside of bearing cage (6), then
install input shaft assembly if equipped with creeper
drive, lubricate seal rings on rear of countershaft,
then on all models, install countershaft assembly.
NOTE: Raise the input shaft approximately IV4
inches (45 mm), install countershaft so gears are
engaged, then lower both shafts into position.
Apply Loctite 515 gasket eliminator to flange of
fi:-ont bearing support (19 or 20). Install support and
tighten bolts (17) to a torque of 69-78 ft.-lbs. (94-106
N.m). Lubricate lips of new oil seal (18) and carefully
install seal over end of input shaft with lips of seal
facing inward. Drive seal in until flush with top of
bore in bearing support.

14

Fig. 129—Speed transmission with front bearing support and rear bearing cages removed.
1. Bolt (4)
2. Bearing cage 6. Bearing cage 10. Bearing cage 14. Speed transmission 19. Front hearing
(output shaft) (input shaft) (countershaft) 15. Bearing cup support (w/creeper)
3. Shim 7. Shim 11. Shim 16. Bearing cup 20. Bearing cup
4. Bearing cup 8. Bearing cup 12. Bearing cup 17. Bolt (11) 21. Front bearing
5. Bolt (4) 9. Bolt (6) 13. Needle hearing 18. Oil seal support (w/o creeper)

85

Paragraph 160 (Cont.)
Turn speed transmission so rear end is facing up-
ward. Remove bearing cages (2, 6 and 10) and shims
(3,7 and 11). Install bearing cages without shims and
install two opposite bolts in each bearing cage.
Tighten the two opposite bolts in each cage alter-
nately to a torque of 4.0 ft.-lbs. (5.6 N.m). Rotate shaft
while tightening bolts. Using a feeler gage, measure
clearance next to each of the two bolts. Average the
two measurements and add the following dimension
to determine shim pack thickness for each shaft.
Input shaft without creeper drive 0.009 in.
(0.229 mm)
Input shaft with creeper drive 0.008 in.
(0.203 mm)
Countershaft without creeper drive 0.014 in.
(0.356 mm)
Countershaft with creeper drive 0.008 in.
(0.203 mm)
Output shaft 0.014 in.
(0.356 mm)
Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.003, 0.004,
0.005,0.012 and 0.030 inch (0.08,0.10,0.12,0.30 and
0.76 mm). Remove cages, select correct shim packs
and reinstall cages with shims. Tighten retaining
bolts to a torque of 40-45 ft.-lbs. (54-61 N.m). Check
end play of shafts with a dial indicator, use a pry bar
to raise and lower the shaft. End play of shafts must
be within the range of 0.0012-0.005 inch (0.03-0.13
mm). If not, add or remove shims to obtain the correct
end play.
Install the creeper clutch supply tube at front and
oil pressure tube at rear of speed transmission if
equipped with creeper drive. On models so equipped,
check the front drive axle drive shaft bearings (Fig.
130) as follows: Remove oil seal (13), then remove
U (335-375 N.m)
Fig. 130—Exploded view of front drive axle drive shaft
removed from speed transmission.
1. Shaft
2. "O"ring 8. Bearing cup
3. Cage 9. Front bearing cone
4. Spacer 10. Shim
5. Rear bearing cone 11. Spacer
6. Bearing cup 12. Snap ring
7. Retaining ring 13. Oil seal
86
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
snap ring (12), spacer (11) and shims (10). Press shaft
(1) out through rear of cage (3). Remove bearing cone
(9) from front of cage. Use a puller to remove bearing
cup (8), then remove retaining ring (7). Drive bearing
cup (6), be£iring cone (5) and spacer (4) out front of
cage.
Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or
other damage and renew as necessary. Reassemble as
follows: Install spacer (4) over front end of shaft. Heat
bearing (5) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250°
F (121° C) and install bearing cone on shaft.
WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves
when handling heated parts.
Install shaft through front of cage. Press bearing
cup (6) in position on bearing cone (5). Install retain-
ing ring (7), then press shaft forward to seat bearing
cup against retaining ring. Press bearing cup (8) in
against retaining ring. Press the front bearing cone
(9) into the cup until a rolling torque of 13.0-19.5
in.-lbs. (1.5-2.2 N.m) is reached. Install snap ring (12),
flat side toward inside. Measure the distance from
front face of bearing cone to front face of snap ring.
This measurement minus 0.008 inch (0.2 mm) will be
the correct overall measurement of spacer (11), snap
ring (12) and shim pack (10) to be installed. Shims
are available in thicknesses of 0.010, 0.012 and 0.016
inch (0.25,0.30 and 0.41 mm). Install new oil seal (13)
with lips toward inside of cage. Front face of seal must
be flush with front face of cage. Install the shaft and
cage assembly into the speed transmission housing.
Install snap ring on rear of shaft.
Install input shaft coupling and damper driven
shaft, long splined end flrst. Using new "O" rings on
the three oil distributor tubes, lubricate "O" rings
with petroleum jelly and install in input shaft rear
bearing cage. Apply Loctite 515 gasket eliminator on
mounting flange of lube manifold. Install lube mani-
fold and tighten retaining bolts to a torque of 40-45
ft.-lbs. (54-61 N.m).
Apply a light coat of molydisulfide grease on splines
of damper driven shaft. Attach a hoist to transmission
housing and remove from engine stand. Reinstall
speed transmission to flywheel housing. Tighten bolts
to the following torques:
12 mm diameter (grade 10.9) 99-111 ft.-lbs.
(134-151 N.m)
16 mm diameter (grade 8.8) 173-192 ft.-lbs.
(235-260 N.m)
16 mm diameter (grade 10.9) 247-277 ft.-lbs.
20 mm diameter (grade 10.9) 479-538 ft.-lbs.
(650-730 N.m)
22 mm diameter (grade 10.9) 653-734 ft.-lbs.
(885-995 N.m)
Refer to paragraph 150 and reassemble tractor by
reversing the disassembly procedures. Reinstall con-

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
trol valve assembly as outlined in paragraph 148. Use
a new gasket between speed and range transmission
housings. Use guide studs to align the transmission
housings. Tighten M16 x 55 mm bolts to a torque of
173-192 ft.-lbs. (235-260 N.m) and M20 x 60 mm bolts
to a torque of 420-476 ft.-lbs. (570-645 N.m).
When attaching front of cab, rotate square plates
on cab mounting studs until plates bottom on studs.
Tighten inside nut on lower part of studs to a torque
of 35-45 ft.-lbs. (47-61 N.m). Tighten jam nut to inside
nut to a torque of 136-153 ft.-lbs. (184-207 N.m).
Lower cab onto cab mounts. Install upper nuts and
washers on the studs. Tighten upper nuts to a torque
of 140-180 ft.-lbs. (190-244 N.m).
Remove split stands and rear housing handler.
\N^th tractor reassembled, fill transmission to correct
level with Hy-Tran Plus fluid. System capacity is 202
U.S. quarts (191 L). Bleed fuel system as in para-
graph 55 and adjust linkage to transmission as out-
lined in paragraphs 134, 135, 136 and 137. Check
transmission pressures as in paragraph 149.
RANGE TRANSMISSION
The range transmission contains the input shaft
with high and medium range clutches, countershaft
with low range clutch and if so equipped, front drive
axle shaft and clutch. The master clutch is also lo-
cated at front end of input shaft.
All Models
161. R&R AND OVERHAUL. To remove the
range transmission assembly for service, proceed as
follows: Place transmission shift lever in PARK posi-
tion and block rear wheels securely. Remove front end
weights, if so equipped. Remove drain plug £uid drain
transmission fluid. Remove battery cover and discon-
nect battery cables. Remove cab floor mat, then un-
bolt and remove access panel from cabfloor.Remove
speed transmission lube supply tube and lube mani-
fold supply tube. Disconnect shift control valve tube,
brake tube and drain tube from pto valve. If so
equipped, disconnect creeper lube tube from top of
range transmission. Disconnect oil cooler tube and
steering supply tube from bulkhead fittings. Discon-
nect left and right brake supply tubes from bulkhead
fittings.
On left side of tractor, remove batteries, then unbolt
and remove battery box and cab steps as an assembly.
Clamp off fuel hose between main tank and auxiliary
fuel tank. Drain auxiliary tank, place a floor jack
under tank, then unbolt and remove auxiliary tank
and support. On right side of tractor, unbolt and
remove lower cab trim, transmission filter cover and
cover supports. Disconnect true ground speed wiring
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraph 161
harness, then unbolt and remove the sensor from
transmission housing. Loosen bolts and remove
transmission filter screen cover, locator plug and fil-
ter screen. Unbolt and remove filter screen housing,
container, gasket and "O" ring. Working through the
filter screen opening, disconnect the three internal
range transmission clutch supply tubes at the 90
degree elbows. Disconnect wiring from oil filter pres-
sure switch and oil temperature sending unit. Re-
move hose from gear pump to hydraulic filter base.
Disconnect oil cooler return tube from hydraulic filter
base. Remove hose from remote valves to filter base
and reservoir return tube to filter base. Disconnect
inlet tube from hydraulic pump. Unbolt and remove
hydraulic filter and pump inlet tube. Disconnect and
remove steering signal tube from bulkhead and con-
nector under hydraulic pump. Disconnect wiring from
engine rpm sensor on gear pump. Disconnect the park
brake cable, variable flow and control cables from
remote control valves. Disconnect the pto control
valve cable. Disconnect cab ground strap from hy-
draulic pump and wiring harness from cab floor.
Remove nuts from rear cab mounting studs. Remove
drawbar pivot pin and drawbar.
Install splitting stands (17-526A or equivalent) un-
der tractor and bolt adapter plates to the frame side
rails. Use a jack and wood block to support speed
transmission housing. Raise hood and lock in raised
position. Install cab supports and raise rear of cab to
clear cab mount studs. Place rear housing handler
under rear housing and bolt to drawbar support.
Unbolt range transmission housing from speed trans-
mission housing and install guide studs. Separate
front half of tractor from rear half. Cab will stay with
front half.
NOTE: The master clutch can be removed at this
time if desired.
Remove the pximp signal tubes, pump drive lube
tube, pto valve inlet tube, gear pump to oil cooler tube,
left and right brake tubes to rear housings and differ-
ential lock supply tube. Remove the pto valve with
regulated supply lines to transmission control valve,
hitch control valve and front drive axle solenoid valve.
Attach a lifting strap and hoist to pump assembly,
unbolt Eind remove the pumps and drive assembly.
Remove valve tubes, then remove remote valves and
the steering priority valve. Unbolt and remove park
lock assembly. Remove lube tubes as required, then
unbolt and remove lube manifold. Disconnect wires
from transmission speed sensor, differential lock so-
lenoid valve and front drive axle solenoid valve. Dis-
connect tubes, then unbolt and remove hitch valve.
On left side of housing, unbolt and remove access
cover, bracket and solenoid valve.
Working through park lock opening, move snap
ring and spacer forward on bevel drive pinion shaft.
87
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 162 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Attach a lift chain at both rear sides and to front of aid in installation. Install teflon seal rings over "O"
range transmission housing. Attach chains to a hoist rings. Lubricate seal rings with petroleum jelly and
and support the transmission. Unbolt range trans- install piston (16), tang side out. Apply petroleum
mission from rear frame and move constant mesh jelly to clutch springs (15) and install springs over
gear forward on bevel pinion shaft as housings are guide pins on spring plate (13). Install plate and
separated. With range transmission removed, remove spring assembly into carrier and against the piston.
constant mesh gear through park lock cover opening. Put snap ring (12) on top end of the carrier, flat side
Attach right side of range transmission housing to an up. Use a bridge plate and press to compress springs
engine stand. Remove the transmission speed sensor (15). Install snap ring (12) into groove in carrier.
from the housing. Install new seal ring (6) inside clutch hub. Place snap
ring (7) inside clutch hub. Install thrust washers (8)
with thrust bearing (9) between washers and install
retaining ring (11) on clutch hub. Install retaining
162. Ib remove the master clutch, first remove ring (10) on clutch carrier and install clutch hub into
lubrication tube from inside the range transmission clutch carrier. Working through hole in clutch hub,
input shaft. Remove the Allen screw and clutch re- install snap ring (7) into groove on clutch carrier. Soak
tainer from front end of shaft. Refer to Fig. 131 and all friction discs in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Install
remove master clutch as shown. a separator disc (4), then a friction disc (3) and alter-
Ib disassemble the master clutch, refer to Fig. 132 nating the discs, install all discs. Install reaction
and remove snap ring (1). Remove reaction plate (2), plate (2) flat side down and install snap ring (1). Lay
nine friction discs (3) and nine separator discs (4).
Move snap ring (7) out of groove in clutch carrier, then
remove clutch hub (5). Remove retaining ring (10)
from clutch carrier. Remove retaining ring (11) from
inside clutch hub (5), then remove thrust washers (8)
and thrust bearing (9). Remove snap ring (7) and seal
ring (6) from inside the clutch hub. Use a bridge plate
and press to compress springs (15) and remove snap
ring (12) from its groove. Release the press and re-
move the snap ring. Remove spring plate (13) with
guide pins (14), then remove springs (15). Remove
clutch piston (16). Remove teflon seal rings (18 and
20) and "O" rings (17 and 19) from clutch carrier.
Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other
damage and renew parts as required. Guide pins (14)
are only available with spring plate (13). Springs (15)
should have a free length of 1.41 inches (35.28 mm)
and should test 25 lbs. (111.25 N) when compressed
to a length of 0.91 inch (23.12 mm).
Ib reassemble the master clutch, install new "O"
rings (17 and 19) in grooves in carrier (21). Soak teflon
seal rings (18 and 20) in hot water to expand them for

Fig. 132—Exploded view of master dutch used on all

models.
1. Snap ring
2. Reaction plate 12. Snap ring
3. Friction discs (9) 13. Spring plate
4. Separator discs (9) 14. Guide pins (16)
5. Clutch hub 15. Springs (16)
6. Seal ring 16. Piston
7. Snap ring 17. "O*'ring
8. Thrust washers 18. Ifeflon ring
9. Thrust bearing 19. "O**ring
Fig. 131—View showing removal of master dutch from 10. Retaining ring 20. Teflon ring
front of range transmission. 11. Retaining ring 21. Clutch carrier

88

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
master clutch assembly aside in a clean area for later
installation.
163. Tb remove the range transmission shafts, refer
to Fig. 133 and proceed as follows: Turn transmission
housing so that front end is pointing upward. Remove
snap ring from front end of input shaft and remove
seal ring (7) from bearing cage (5). Remove retaining
bolts (6) and remove input shaft bearing cage (5) with
bearing cup (4) and shims (3). Remove bolts (15), then
remove countershaft bearing cage (16) with bearing
cup (17) and shim (18). Pump drive gear (10) and
bearing (13) will also be removed with bearing cage
(16). Keep shims (3 and 18) with their bearing cages.
Unbolt and remove front bearing support (1). Using
a lift strap and hoist, remove countershaft assembly
first, then the input shaft assembly. Remove the bevel
pinion constant mesh gear from the housing.
If so equipped, remove front drive axle drive clutch
and shaft assembly as follows: Remove inlet fitting
and inlet tube for the clutch shaft bearing cage (34—
Fig. 134). Unbolt and remove clutch shield from rear
cover (19), then unbolt and remove front and rear
upper gear shields for gear (24). Unbolt bearing cage
(34) from range transmission housing and withdraw
front drive axle drive shaft and clutch assembly.
164. TD disassemble the front drive axle drive shaft
and clutch assembly, refer to Fig. 134 and remove "O"
ring (35) from bearing cage (34). Remove snap ring
(39) and back-up ring (38). Unbolt front gear shield
(22) and remove snap ring (20) from its groove. Move
gear (24) forward on shaft (26) and unbolt rear gear
shield (33). Using a suitable puller, remove bearing
cage (34) and rear bearing cone (37). Remove rear
gear shield (33) and two seal rings (40). Use a puller
to remove center bearing cone (30) and backup ring
(29). Remove gear retaining snap ring (28). Turn shaft
assembly over and remove clutch carrier (1). Remove
retaining ring (3), then remove hub (8) with clutch
assembly. Remove clutch shield rear cover (19) and
gear retaining snap ring (20). Remove front gear
shield (22) and driven gear (24). Remove two seal
rings (25) from shaft. Place compression sleeve CAS-
1903-3 over piston spring retainer (16). Use a press
and apply down pressure on sleeve to compress
Belleville washer (14). Working through slot in com-
pression sleeve, remove retaining ring (18) from its
groove in hub (8). Remove compression sleeve and
snap ring. Remove shims (17), spring retainer (16)
with steel "O" ring (15), Belleville washer (14) and
piston (13). Turn unit over and remove snap ring (4),
backing plate (5), eight friction discs (6) and seven
separator discs (7).
Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or
other damage and renew as required. If screw (27)
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 163-164
was removed to clean ports in shaft (26), apply Loctite
262 to threads of screw and tighten screw to a torque
of 20-25 ft.-lbs. (30-35 N.m). If needle bearing (2) is
being renewed in carrier (1), press new bearing in
from inside of carrier to a depth of 0.256 inch (6.5 mm)
below flush with face of bore.
Th reassemble the shaft and clutch assembly, in-
stall new "O" rings (9 and 12) in grooves in hub (8).
Soak teflon seal rings (10 and 11) in hot water to
expand them, then install them over "O" rings. Soak
all friction discs (6) in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid.
Starting with a friction disc and alternating with
separator discs (7), install all eight friction discs and
separator disc. Install backing plate (5) and snap ring
(4). Lubricate teflon rings (10 and 11) with petroleum
jelly, then install piston (13) on the hub. Install snap
ring (28) and driven gear (24) over front of shaft so
that long side of gear hub is to front. Install gear
shield (22) and snap ring (20). Install the hub, clutch
plates and piston assembly in carrier so piston is
facing up. Do not install belleville washer (14) at this
time. Install piston spring retainer (16) with steel "O"
ring (15) on piston with steel "O" ring down. Install
retaining ring (18). Place assembly in a press with
clutch carrier down. Use a cross block and spacers on
spring retainer and apply down pressure of 2090-
Flg. 133—Exploded view of front bearing support and
bearing cages removed from range transmission.
1. Front bearing support
2. Bolt (6) 11. Seal ring
3. Shims 12. Snap ring
4. Bearing cup 13. Ball bearing
5. Input shaft bearing cage 14. Snap ring
6. Bolt (3) 15. Bolt (4)
7. Cage seal ring 16. Countershaft bearing cage
8. Clutch tube (medium) 17. Bearing cup
9. Clutch tube (high) 18. Shim
10. Pump drive gear 19. Clutch tube (low)
89
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 164 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

2610 lbs. (9300-11600 N) on cross block to compress
the clutch pack. Measure the distance from top of
spring retainer to top of retaining ring (18). This
(^stance minus 0.065 inch (1.65 mm) is the total
thickness of retaining ring (18) and shim pack (17) to
be installed. Remove cross block, retaining ring (18)
and piston spring retainer (16). Install clutch plate
aligning tool CAS-1908 through clutch hub from pis-
ton side until seated. Install Belleville washer (14)
with concave side toward piston. Install spring re-
tainer (16) steel "O" ring side down. Install selected
shim pack (17) and position retaining ring (18) on top
of clutch hub. Use cross block and press to compress
clutch plates and install retaining ring in groove in
hub. Remove aligning tool. Install the two seal rings
(25) on the shaft and lubricate the rings with petro-
leum jelly. Remove carrier (1) from hub assembly,
carefully install hub assembly, piston side first, on the

Fig. 134^-Exploded view of front drive axle drive clutch and shaft assembly used on models so equipped.
1. Clutch csurrier
2. Needle bearing 10. Ifeflon ring 18. Retaining ring 25. Seal rings 33. Rear gear shield
3. Retaining ring 11. Ifeflon ring 19. Clutch shield 26. Shaft 34. Bearing cage
4. Snap ring 12. "Oaring rear cover 27. Allen head screw 35. "O"ring
5. Backing plate 13. Piston 20. Snap ring 28. Snap ring 36. Bearing cup
6. Friction discs (8) 14. Belleville washer 21. Nut (2) 29. Back-up ring 37. Rear bearing cone
7. Separator discs (7) 15. Steel «0" ring 22. Front gear shield 30. Center bearing cone 38. Back-up ring
8. Clutch hub 16. Spring retainer 23. Screw (5) 31. Bearing cup 39. Snap ring
9. "Oaring 17. Shim 24. Driven gear 32. Bolt (5) 40. Seal rings

90
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 165

shaft and secure with retaining ring (3). Install clutch (38). Remove the 13 piston return Belleville washers
carrier over clutch plates. Install back-up ring (29) (39). Use a puller and remove rear bearing cone (52).
over rear end of shaft. Heat center bearing cone (30) Remove snap ring (51) and high range clutch carrier
in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) (50). Remove snap ring (44) and seal ring (53). Bump
and install on shaft. carriers (4 and 50) on a wood block to remove pistons
(7 and 47). Remove teflon rings (5 and 9) and "O" rings
(6 and 8) from piston (7) and ceurier (4) and teflon
WARNiNG: Aiways wear heat protective gloves rings (46 and 48) and "O" rings (45 and 49) from piston
when handiing heated parts. (47) and carrier (50).
Install new bearing cups (31 and 36) in bearing
cage (34) as required. Install rear gear shield (33) on
bearing cage. Install the five bolts and tighten to a
torque of 27-32 ft.-lbs. (37-43 N.m). Install new seal
rings (40) on rear end of shaft. Install bearing cage
assembly on shaft, then bolt gear shields together.
Place shaft assembly in a press and position rear
bearing cone (37) on end of shaft. Press bearing cone
on shaft while rotating bearing cage until a rolling
torque of 1.55-2.35 ft.-lbs. (2.1-3.19 N.m) is obtained.
Measure distance from back face of rear bearing cone
(37) to outside face of snap ring groove. This distance
minus 0.0067 inch (0.169 mm) will be total thickness
of snap ring and back-up ring to be installed. Back-up
rings are available in thicknesses of 0.123, 0.126,
0.130, 0.133, 0.137 and 0.141 inch (3.12, 3.21, 3.30,
3.39,3.48 and 3.57 mm). Install selected back-up ring
(38) and snap ring (39). Install new "O" ring (35) on
bearing cage. Lay shaft and clutch assembly aside in
a clean area for later installation.

165. Ib (Hsassemble the range input shaft and high

range and low range clutches, refer to Fig. 135 and
proceed as follows: Remove the four seal rings (1).
Fig. 135~-Expioded view of range transmission Input
Using a puller, remove low range drive gear (3) and shaft with high range and medium range dutch
front bearing cone (2). Use a screwdriver to move snap assemblies.
ring (15) out of its groove in carrier (4). Use a suitable 1. Seal rings (4)
puller to remove medium clutch carrier (4) with pis- 2. Front bearing cone 28. Seal ring
ton assembly from shaft. Remove the three Belleville 3. Low range drive gear 29. Needle bearing
washers (10), reaction plate (11), ten friction discs 4. Clutch carrier ^ 30. Snap ring
5. Tfeflonring 31. Backing plate
(12), nine separator discs (13), backing plate (14) and 6. "O"ring 32. Friction discs (10)
the snap ring (15). Use compression sleeve CAS-1903- 7. Piston 33. Separator discs (9)
3 and a press to compress Belleville washers (17) and 8. "O"ring 34, Reaction plate
9. Tfeflonring 35. Belleville washers (3)
remove snap ring (16) from its groove in shaft. Re- 10. Belleville washers (3) 36, Thrust washers
move sleeve and snap ring. Remove the 13 Belleville 11. Reaction plate 37. Thrust bearing
washers (17), snap rings (18 and 19), thrust washers 12. Friction discs (10) 38. Snap ring
(20) and thrust bearing (21). Remove medium range 13. Separator discs (9) 39. Belleville washers (13)
14. Backing plate 40. Dowel pins (3)
drive gear (23) with seal ring (22), needle bearing (24), 15. Snap ring 41, Input shaft
thrust bearing (25) and spacer (26). Remove high 16. Snap ring 42. Coiled spring pin (5)
range drive gear (27) with seal ring (28) and needle 17. Belleville washers (13) 43. Slotted spring pin (1)
18. Snap ring 44. Snap ring
bearing (29). Remove snap ring (30) from groove in 19. Snap ring 45, «0" ring
high range clutch carrier (50). Remove backing plate 20. Thrust washers 40. Ifeflonring
(31), ten friction discs (32), nine separator discs (33), 21. Thrust bearing 47^ Piston
22. Seal ring 43. ifeflon ring
reaction plate (34), three Belleville washers (35), 23. Medium range drive gear 49. "O" ring
thrust washers (36) and thrust bearing (37). Use 24. Needle bearing 50* Clutch carrier
compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 and a press to com- 25. Thrust bearing 51. Snap ring
press Belleville washers (39) and remove snap ring 26. Spacer 52. Rear bearing cone
27. High range drive gear 53. Seal ring

91

Paragraph 165 (Cont.)
Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or
other damage £ind renew as required. If dowel pins
(40), coiled spring pins (42) or slotted spring pin (43)
have been removed to clean oil ports in input shaft
(41), refer to Fig. 136 and reinstall as shown.
Ib reassemble range input shaft and clutches, refer
to Fig. 135 and proceed as follows: Install new "O"
rings (6, 8,45 and 49) in grooves in pistons (7 and 47)
and carriers (4 and 50). Soak teflon rings (5,9,46 and
48) in hot water to expand them, then install them
over the "O" rings. Allow teflon rings to cool and
contract, lubricate them with petroleum jelly and
SLOTTED SPRING PIN - DOWEL PIN (3) - PRESS
PRESS FLUSH WITH SHAFT OD IN FLUSH
Fig, 136—Sectional view showing correct installation of
dowel pins, coiied spring pins and siotted spring pin in
range input shaft
Fig. 137—View showing correct stacking of Belleviiie
washers for high range dutch.
REAR BEARING CONE
HIGH RANGE CLUTCH
PLATE CARRIER
Fig, 136—Sectional view of assembied range transmission input shaft and high range and low range clutches.
92
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
install pistons flat side first into carriers. Install snap
ring (44) over rear end of shaft (41) and into the
second groove in splines. Install high range clutch
carrier (50) against snap ring (44) so that oil hole in
carrier is aligned with hole in shaft. Install snap ring
(51). Heat rear bearing cone (52) in a bearing oven to
a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install on shaft.
WARNiNG: Aiways wear heat protective gioves
when handiing heated parts.
Install first piston return Belleville washer concave
side down, second washer concave side up, third
washer concave side down and so on until all 13
Belleville washers are installed as shown in Fig. 137.
Install centering sleeve CAS-1903-4 over the shaft.
Install snap ring (38—Fig. 135) over the centering
ring so that opening in snap ring is aligned with
slotted spring pin in the shaft. Install compression
sleeve CAS-1903-5 over the centering sleeve and on
top of snap ring. Install compression sleeve CAS-
1903-3 and using a press, apply down pressure on
sleeves until snap ring is positioned in groove. Re-
move the sleeves. Install thrust washers (36) with
thrust bearing (37) between the washers. Install the
three Belleville washers (35) concave side up and
reaction plate (34) flat side up. Soak all finction discs
(32) in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Starting with fi:iction
disc and alternating with separator plates (33), in-
stall all ten friction discs and nine separator discs.
Install backing plate (31) flat side down, then install
snap ring (30). Install needle bearing (29) and using
a new seal ring (28), install high range drive gear (27)
so that splines of gear engage all friction discs (32).
Install spacer (26), thrust bearing (25), needle bear-
ing (24) and medium range drive gear (23) with new
seal ring (22). Install thrust washers (20) with thrust
bearing (21) between the washers, then install snap
rings (18 and 19). Install first piston return Belleville
FRONT BEARING CONE
MEDtUM RANGE CLUTCH
PLATE CARRIER
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 166

washer (17) concave side up, second washer concave
side down, third washer concave side up and os on
until all 13 Belleville washers are installed. Install
centering sleeve CAS-1903-4 over the shaft. Install
snap ring (16) over the centering ring and install
compression sleeve CAS-1903-5 over the centering
sleeve and on top of snap ring. Install compression
sleeve CAS-1903-3 and using a press, apply down
pressure on sleeves until snap ring is positioned in
groove in shaft. Remove sleeves. Place snap ring (15)
over shaft and lay it on gear (23). Install backing plate
(14) flat side up. Soak all finction discs in clean Hy-
Tran Plus fluid. Starting with a fidction disc (12) and
alternating with separator discs (13), install all 10
fi:iction discs and nine separator discs. Install reac-
tion plate (11) flat side down and install the three
Belleville washers (10) concave side down. Install
medium range clutch carrier (4) so that oil hole in
carrier is aligned with oil hole in shaft. Working
through slots in carrier (4), use a screwdriver to
install snap ring (15) in groove inside the carrier.
Install low range drive gear (3). Heat front bearing
cone (2) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F
(121° C) and install on shaft.
remove piston. Remove teflon rings (8 and 10) and "O"
rings (7 and 9) from piston (11) and carrier (6). Install
new "O" rings (7 and 9) in grooves in piston and
carrier. Soak teflon rings (8 and 10) in hot water to
expand them, then install them over the "O" rings.
Lubricate rings with petroleum jelly, then install
piston.
When reassembling, drive new roller bearing (23)
in rear end of countershaft until bearing is 0.810 inch
(20.64 mm) below flush with top of bore. Install first
piston return Belleville washer (20) concave side up,
second washer concave side down, third washer con-
cave side up and so on until all 13 Belleville washers
are installed. Install thrust washers (18) with thrust
bearing (19) between the washers. Install snap ring
(17) against thrust washers. Use compression sleeve

WARNING: Aiways wear heat protective gioves

when handiing heated parts.

Install four new seal rings (1) on front of shaft and

new seal ring (53) on rear of shaft. Lay input shaft
assembly aside in a clean area for later installation.

166. To disassemble the countershaft and low

range clutch, refer to Fig. 139 and proceed as follows:
Using a suitable puller, remove constant mesh gear
(35) and rear bearing cone (36). Remove spacer (34),
high range driven gear (33) and medium range driven
gear (32) with seal ring (31). Remove snap ring (30),
backing plate (29), 15 fiiction discs (27), 14 separator
discs (28), reaction plate (26) and three Belleville
washers (25). Remove snap ring (24). Turn unit over
and press the shaft assembly out through low range
driven gear and carrier (6), removing front bearing Fig. 139—Exploded view of range transmission coun-
cone (1), spacer (2), thrust washers (3) and thrust tershaft and iow range clutch assembly.
1. Front bearing cone
bearing (4). Remove seal rings (5) from gear (6). 2. Spacer 19. Thrust bearing
Remove needle bearing (12), spacer (13), needle bear- 3. Thrust washers 20. Belleville washers (13)
ing (14), thrust washers (15) and thrust bearing (16). 4. Thrust bearing 21. Countershaft
Use compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 and a press to 5. Seal rings 22. Coiled spring pin (3)
6. Low range driven gear & 23. Roller bearing
compress Belleville washers (20) and remove snap clutch carrier 24. Snap ring
ring (17) from its groove in shaft. Remove sleeve and 7. "O"ring 25. Belleville washers (3)
snap ring. Remove thrust washers (18), thrust bear- 8. Tfeflonring 26. Reaction plate
9. "O" ring 27. Friction discs (15)
ing (19) and the 13 Belleville washers (20). Use an 10. Teflon ring 28. Separator discs (14)
inside puller to remove roller bearing (23) from rear 11. Piston 29. Backing plate
of countershaft. 12. Needle bearing 30. Snap ring
1^. Spacer 31. Seal ring
Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or 14. Needle bearing 32. Medium range driven gear
other damage and renew as required. If coiled spring 15. Thrust washers 33. High range driven gear
pins (22) were removed, press new pins in uritil flush 16. Thrust bearing 34. Spacer
17. Snap ring 35. Constant mesh gear
with top of bores. Bump carrier (6) on a wood block to 18. Thrust washers 36. Rear bearing cone

93

Paragraphs 167-169
and press to compress Belleville washers, then install
snap ring in its groove in shaft. Install thrust washers
(15) with thrust bearing (16) between washers. In-
stall needle bearing (14) spacer (13) and needle bear-
ing (12). Install two new seal rings (5) on hub of low
range driven gear (6), then install gear and carrier on
shaft. Install thrust washers (3) with thrust bearing
(4) between washers. Install spacer (2). Heat front
bearing cone (1) in a bearing oven to a temperature
of 250° F (121° C) and install bearing.
WARNING: Aiways wear heat protective gioves
when handiing heated parts.
Turn shaft over and install snap ring (24) in its
groove. Install the three Belleville washers (25) con-
cave side up and reaction ring (26) flat side up. Soak
all firiction discs (27) in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid.
Starting with a friction disc and alternating with
separator discs (28), install all 15 firiction discs and
14 separator discs. Install backing plate (29) flat side
down, then install snap ring (30) in groove in clutch
carrier. Using new seal ring (31) on medium range
driven gear (32), install gear so that splines on gear
engage all friction discs (27). Install high range
driven gear (33), spacer (34) and constant mesh gear
(35). Heat rear bearing cone (36) to a temperature of
250° F (121° C) and install on shaft.
WARNING: Aiways wear heat protective gioves
when handiing heated parts.
Lay countershaft assembly aside in a clean area for
later installation.
MEDIUM RANGE
DRIVEN GEAR
REAR BEARING CONE
RANGE TRANSMISSION
COUNTERSHAFT
Fig. 140—Sectional view of assembled countershaft and low range clutch.
94
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
167. Before reassembling the range transmission,
renew rear bearing cups in transmission housing and
front bearing cups in bearing cages as required. If
desired, check hydraulic pump drive gear bearing as
follows: Working through slots in front side of gear
(10—Fig. 133), use snap ring pliers and remove snap
ring (12) out of its groove in bearing cage (16). Remove
hydraulic pump drive gear from bearing cage. Re-
move snap ring (14) from gear and drive bearing (13)
from gear. Tb reinstall gear and bearing, place new
seal ring (11) inside gear and lay snap ring (12) inside
the gear and over the hub, flat side down. Install
bearing (13) and secure with snap ring (14). Install
on countershaft bearing cage and working through
slot in gear, install snap ring (12) in its groove in
bearing cage.
168. To install the front drive axle drive shaft and
clutch assembly, lubricate seal ring (35—Fig. 134) on
bearing cage (34). Install the shaft and clutch assem-
bly into the range housing. Align oil hole bearing cage
with hole in housing. Apply Locktite 262 to threads
of retaining bolts and tighten bolts to a torque of 38-45
ft.-lbs. (52-61 N.m). Install clutch shield over clutch
assembly and bolt to rear clutch cover (19). Use new
"O" rings on bolts and bolt clutch shield bracket to
housing. Place bevel pinion constant mesh gear, long
hub forward, in range housing. Use new "O" rings and
install oil inlet tube through range housing and into
front drive axle drive shaft bearing cage (34).
169. To install the range input shaft and clutches,
lubricate seal ring (53—Fig. 135) with petroleum jelly
and install the assembly. Tilt the input shaft to the
side so the countershaft can be installed.
LOW RANGE DRIVEN GEAR
AND CLUTCH PLATE CARRIER
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 170

Install the countershaft assembly in range hous-
ing. Lubricate seal rings (5—Fig. 139) on low range
driven gear (6). Install bearing front support (1—Fig.
133) and secure with the six bolts (2) tightened to a
torque of 66-79 ft.-lbs. (90-107 N.m).
The end play for the countershaft is 0.0005-0.004
inch (0.013-0.100 mm) and end play for the input
shaft is 0.001-0.005 inch (0.03-0.13 mm). Tb set the
end play, install the bearing cage (16—Fig. 133) and
pump gear assembly without shims (18). Install bolts
(15) loosely. Tighten two opposite bolts alternate^, in
three steps until tightened to a torque of 6.6 ft.-lbs.
(9.0 N.m). Rotate shaft while tightening. Measure the
gap between bearing cage (16) and front support (1)
next to the tightened bolts. Take an average of the
two readings and add 0.011 inch ().279 mm). This will
be the correct shim pack thickness to be installed.
Apply petroleum jelly to the four seal rings (1—Fig.
135) on front of input shaft, then install bearing cage
(5—Fig. 133) without shims (3). Install bolts (6)
loosely. Tighten two opposite bolts alternately, in
three steps, to a torque 4.0 ft.-lbs. (5.6 N.m). Rotate
shaft while tightening. Measure the gap between
bearing cage (5) and front support (1) next to the
tightened bolts. Take an average of the two readings
and add 0.009 inch (0.241 mm). This will be the
LUBRICATION
MANIFOLD
BOLT
GASKET
O-RING
O-RING
correct shim pack thickness to be installed. Shims (3
and 18) are available in thicknesses of 0.003, 0.004,
0.005,0.012 and 0.030 inch (0.08,0.10,0.13, 0.30 and
0.76 mm).
Remove bearing cages and install selected shim
packs. Tighten bolts to a torque of 40-45 ft.-lbs. (54-61
N.m). Install new seal ring (7) on bearing cage (5).
Connect all oil tubes.
Tb install the master clutch on front end of input
shaft, install the clutch positioning snap ring in
groove on input shaft. Place clutch assembly on shaft
and tap in place using a soft hammer. Install clutch
retainer flat side to front and secure with the Allen
screw tightened to a torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs. (26-31
N.m). Install lubrication tube in end of range input
shaft.
Tb install the lubrication manifold (Fig. 141), in-
stall new "O** rings on pressure tubes. Lubricate "O"
rings and install tubes in lube manifold. Use new
gasket and install manifold assembly. Lower ends of
tubes must go into holes in range input shaft bearing
cage. Tighten manifold retaining bolts to a torque of
38-45 ft.-lbs. (52-61 N.m).
170. When reinstalling the range transmission,
attach lifting chains and hoist, then remove from
engine stand. As transmission housing is guided to
rear frame, install constant mesh gear, spacer and
snap ring over the bevel drive pinion shaft. When
housings are together, install and tighten bolts to a
torque of 173-192 ft.-lbs. (235-260 N.m). Move con-
stant mesh gear and spacerfiiUyrearward and install
snap ring in its groove. Use Loctite 515 gasket elimi-
nator when installing park lock and hydraulic pump
assemblies on right side and access cover on left side.
Tighten bolts to a torque of 38-45 ft.-lbs. (52-61 N.m).
The balance of reassembly is the reverse of disas-
sembly procedure.

PRESSURE TUBE PRESSURE TUBE

O-RING
O-RING

INPUT SHAFT FRONT

BEARING CAGE
Fig, 141—View showing iubrication manifold, pressure Fig, 142—View showing constant mesh gear, spacer
tubes and range input shaft bearing cage. and snap ring instailed on bevel drive pinion shaft.

95

Paragraph 171
MAIN DRIVE BEVEL GEARS
AND DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
All Models
171. R&R AND OVERHAUL. To remove the dif-
ferential assembly, disconnect battery cables and
drain rear frame and axle housings. Drain, discon-
nect and remove main fuel tank and mounting plat-
form. Remove rear frame cover as outlined in
paragraph 222. Attach rear housing handler 17-527
to support rear frame. Remove rear axle housings
with planetaries as outlined in paragraph 176. Re-
move brake cylinders as in paragraph 179. Remove
the pto drive gear lube line from rear frame. Remove
the differential lock supply line, then unbolt and
remove the pto drive gear assembly. Remove the pto
drive shaft and couplers. Remove pinion shaft lube
line. Attach a differential lifting tool CAS-1952 or
equivalent on the differential and connect to a hoist.
Raise hoist to support the differential. Unbolt and
remove bearing retainers (3 and 38—Fig. 143) and
shims (7). Tag shims as to their location. Remove lock
slip ring (33) from retainer (38). Remove ring gear
and differential assembly and lay on bench. Remove
the 12 bolts (8) and lift off ring gear. Turn assembly
over and remove cover (9). Remove thrust washer
(11), four separator plates (12) and three friction
plates (13). Remove the differential lock side gear (17)
and six dowel pins (10) from case (28). Turn case
piston side down and using compressed air in supply
port, remove piston (15). Remove "O" rings (14 and
16) from piston and case. Remove the two bolts (29)
securing short shafts (23) in case (28). Thread an M8
bolt into short shafts £ind pull short shafts (23) from
case. On Model 7110, remove thrust washers (18) and
pinion gears (20) for short shafts (23). Remove long
shaft (25) and long spacer (24), then remove thrust
washers and pinion gears for long shaft (25). On
Models 7120, 7130 and 7140, remove thrust washers
(18), thrust rings (19), pinion gears (20), needle roll-
ers (21) and short spacers (22) for short shafts (23).
Remove long shaft (25) and long spacer (24), then
remove thrust washers, thrust rings, pinion gears
and needle rollers for long shaft (25). On all models,
remove side gear (26) and thrust washer (27) from
case (28). Remove bearing cups (6 and 31) from dif-
ferential case and cover. Remove oil seals (1 and 40),
seal rings (4 and 36) and bearing cones (5 and 32) from
bearing retainers (3 and 38). Remove seal rings (30)
from case. Clean and inspect all parts for excessive
wear or other damage and renew as necessary.
NOTE: If carrier bearings (5 and 32) or differential
case (28) or cover (9) have been renewed, bearing
96
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
preioad must be adjusted. Reassembie as foiiows,
but do not instaii seai rings (4 and 36), iocic siip ring
(33) or bevei ring gear.
Heat bearing cones (5 and 32) in a bearing oven to
a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install on
bearing retainers (3 and 38).
WARNiNG: Aiways wear heat protective gioves
when handiing heated parts.
Install oil seals (1 and 40) into retainers (3 and 38)
so rubber lips face outside. Install seals until they are
0.032 inch (0.8 mm) below flush with top of bore.
Install new bearing cups (6 and 31) in cover (9) and
case (28). Install thrust washer (27) and side gear (26)
in differential case (28). On Model 7110, lubricate
thrust washers (18) and inside of pinion gears (20)
with petroleum jelly and install in case. Insert long
shaft (25) through case, pinion gears and long spacer
(24). Install short shafts (23) through case and gears
so small end of shafts are inserted into hole in long
spacer and shaft. Secure short shafts in case with
bolts (29). On Models 7120, 7130 and 7140, apply
petroleum jelly to the four thrust washers (18). Install
the two washers for the long shaft (25). Apply petro-
leum jelly to inside the four pinion gears (20) and
install 28 needle rollers (21) inside each gear. Install
thrust rings (19) on top of needle rollers. Install two
pinion gear assemblies for the long shaft in the case
against the thrust washers. Place long spacer (24)
between the gears. Insert long shaft through the case,
gears and spacer. Install the other two thrust washers
into the case, then install the two pinion gear assem-
blies. Install the short spacers (22) and two short
shafts so that small ends of shafts are inserted into
hole in long spacer and shaft. Secure short shafts with
bolts (29). On all models, lubricate new "O" rings (14
and 16) and install in grooves on piston (15) and
inside of case (28). Install piston flat side up in case
and install the six dowel pins (10) in the case. Install
differential lock side gear (17). Install one separator
plate (12) so that notches engage dowel pins, then one
friction plate (13) so it will mesh with lock side gear.
Alternate plates until three friction plates and four
separator plates are installed. Use grease to stick
thrush washer (11) in position on cover (9) and install
cover on differential case. Use bolts and nuts to secure
cover to case. Do not install ring gear at this time.
Install differential assembly into rear frame. Install
two aligning dowel pins (2 or 39) in each side of rear
frame. Install left bearing retainer (3) without shims
(7) and install three retainer bolts equally spaced
around retainer. Tighten bolts to a torque of 85 ft.-lbs.
(115 N.m). Install right bearing carrier (38) without
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 171 (Cont.)

shims. Install and tighten three retaining bolts (41)
evenly in steps of 25 in.-lbs. (2.82 N.m) until 100
in.-lbs. (11.3 N.m) is reached. Rotate differential
while tightening. Install a rolling torque adapter
CAS-1902-2 into differential assembly and loosen
right carrier bolts evenly until finger tight. Now re-
torque the bolts evenly and equally until a rolling
torque of 45 in.-lbs. (5.08 N.m) is reached. Using a
depth micrometer, measure the distance from right
bearing retainer face to the rear frame through the
three jackscrew holes. Average the three measure-
ments and record the dimension. Support differential

28

33 /
37
38
Fig. 143—Exploded view of differentlai assembly, insets show different types of pinions and shafts used.
1. Oil seal
2. Dowel pin (5) 8. Bolt (12) 15. Piston 22. Short spacer 29. Bolt (2)
3. Left bearing 36. Seal ring
9. Cover 16. "Oaring 23. Short shaft 30. Seal rings 37. Dowel pin (3)
retainer 10. Dowel pin (6) 17. Side lock gear 24. Long spacer
4. Seal ring 31. Bearing cup 38. Right bearing
11. Thrust washer 18. Thrust washer 25. Long shaft 32. Bearing cone retainer
5. Bearing cone 12. Separator plate 19. Thrust ring 26. Side gear
6. Bearing cup 33. Lock slip ring 39. Dowel pin (5)
13. Friction plate 20. Pinion gears 27. Thrust washer 34. Pressure tube 40. Oil seal
7. Shims 14. "O** ring 21. Needle rollers 28. Differential case 35. "Oaring 41. Bolt (6)

97

Paragraph 172
and remove both bearing retainers (3 and 38). Meas-
ure the thickness of the right bearing retainer as
shown in Fig. 144. Subtract this dimension from the
recorded dimension. The difference will be the total
shim pack thickness to be installed. Split total shim
pack evenly and install half with each bearing carrier.
Tighten carrier bolts to a torque of 85 ft.-lbs. (115
N.m) while rotating differential. Check differential
rolling torque which should be 40-70 in.-lbs. (4.5-7.9
N.m) for new bearings or 20-35 in.-lbs. (2.26-3.95
N.m) for used bearings. Desired setting is in the
upper half of ranges. Tb increase rolling torque, re-
move shim thickness of 0.002 inch (0.05 mm). Tb
decrease rolling torque add to shim thickness.
With bearing preload set, remove differential and
keep shim packs with their respective bearing carri-
ers. Unbolt cover (9--Fig. 143) from case (28), then
install ring gear on right side of case. Install the
twelve bolts (8) securing ring gear, case and cover
together and tighten to a torque of 230 ft.-lbs. (310
N.m). Install new seal rings (30) on the case, making
sure ends of rings are locked together. Install new seal
MEASURE RETAINER THICKNESS
Fig. 144^Measure bearing retainer thickness as shown.
Fig. 145—Exploded view of ring gear and bevel drive
pinion assembly used on aii modeis. Items 13, 14 and
15 will remain in range housing.
1. Ring gear 6. Snap ring 11. Bearing cone
2. Drive pinion 7. Shim 12. Snap ring
3. Plug 8. Bearing cage 13. Constant mesh gear
4. Bearing cone 9. Bolt (6) 14. Spacer
5. Bearing cup 10. Bearing cup 15. Snap ring
98
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
rings (4 and 36) on carriers (3 and 38, making sure
ends are locked together. Install differential lock slip
ring (33) on right retainer (38). Lube hole in retainer
must be near the differential lock tube hole in the lock
slip ring. Install both bearing carriers with the deter-
mined shim packs, aligning lube passages in rear
frame with slots in shims and bearing retainers.
Using a dial indicator against a tooth on ring gear,
check ring gear to bevel drive pinion backlash which
should be 0.007-0.011 inch (0.179-0.279 mm). Tb
change backlash, move shims from one side of differ-
ential to the other. Moving a 0.010 inch (0.254 mm)
shim from one side to the other will change backlash
approximately 0.006 inch (0.169 mm).
Using new "O" rings, install the pinion shaft lube
tube and differential lock supply tube. Install pto
drive shaft and bolt the pto drive gear assembly in
place. Install pto drive assembly oil lube tube.
The balance of reassembly is the reverse of disas-
sembly procedure.
BEVEL GEARS
All Models
172. The main drive bevel pinion (2—Fig. 145) and
ring gear (1) are a matched set and must be renewed
as such. Tb remove bevel pinion and ring gear, proceed
as follows: Tractor must first be split between range
transmission housing and rear frame as outlined in
paragraph 161. Remove rear frame cover as outlined
in paragraph 222 and rear axle housings and plane-
taries as outlined in paragraph 176. Remove pto
shaft, differential bearing carriers and differential
with ring gear as outlined in paragraph 171. Remove
mounting bolts (9—Fig. 145) from bearing cage (8),
then withdraw bevel pinion assembly from rear
frame. Remove and measure thickness of shim pack
(7). Record thickness.
Tb disassemble bevel pinion, remove snap ring (12),
then press bevel pinion shaft and bearing cone (4)
from front bearing cone (11) and bearing cage assem-
bly. Press bevel pinion from rear bearing cone (4).
Remove bearing cup (5), snap ring (6) and bearing cup
(10) from bearing cage. Clean and inspect all parts
and renew any showing excessive wear or other dam-
age and renew as necessary. Make certain that hole
in plug (3) is open.
Tb reassemble pinion shaft and adjust bearings,
proceed as follows: Press rear bearing cup (5) in cage
until seated. Install snap ring (6) in groove in cage.
Press front bearing cup (10) in cage until seated
against snap ring. Heat rear bearing cone (4) in a
bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and
install in place on bevel pinion shaft.
WARNING: Aiways wear heat protective gloves
when handiing heated parts.

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
Install bearing cage assembly on shaft and bearing
cone, then press front bearing cone in place while
rotating bearing cage. Hold cage flange in a vise and
using a dial indicator, measure pinion shaft end play
which should be at least 0.0005 inch (0.013 mm).
Apply a force of approximately 50-100 lbs. (222-445
N) to one end, then the other when measuring end
play. Measure the distance from bearing cone (11) to
front of snap ring groove. Select a snap ring with a
thickness from 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) less to 0.0025
inch (0.07 mm) more than your measurement. Install
snap ring (12) in its groove. Back seat bearing (11)
against snap ring with 10000-15000 lbs. (44480-
66720 N) of force. Using a dial indicator, check pinion
shaft end play again. End play must be 0.0005-0.004
inch (0.013-0.102 mm). If end play is incorrect, select
a thicker or thinner snap ring as required. Snap rings
are available in thicknesses of 0.146, 0.149, 0.152,
0.155 and 0.158 inch (3.70, 3.78, 3.86, 3.94 and 4.02
mm).
173, Tb adjust pinion mounting distance, record the
+ or - reference number etched in hundredths of a
millimeter on the end of pinion shaft (Fig. 146). Add
or subtract the reference niimber from the standard
nominal dimension of 33.92 mm. The result will be
the desired dimension. Install bevel drive pinion and
cage assembly into rear frame without shims and
secure with mounting bolts. Install pinion depth set-
ting tool CAS-1902-1 as shown in Fig. 147 so that bar
is centered on pinion shaft. Hold pinion shaft forward
to remove all bearing end play, then measure distance
between rear face of pinion shaft and front face of bar
in millimeters. This is your measured dimension.
Subtract this measured dimension from the pre-
viously calculated desired dimension. The result will
be the correct thickness shim pack (7—Fig. 145) to be
installed. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.003,
0.004,0.005 and 0.012 inch (0.076,0.10,0.13 and 0.30
Fig, 146—The plus or minus reference number (1) Is
etched in face of bevel pinion in hundredths of a mllll'
meter as shown.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 173-175
mm). Remove pinion shaft assembly and install the
selected shim pack on bearing cage.
If ring gear (1) or carrier bearings are renewed,
adjust bearing preload as in paragraph 171. Install
bevel drive pinion assembly with shim pack and
tighten retaining bolts to a torque of 87-98 ft.-lbs.
(118-133 N.m). Adjust ring gear to bevel pinion back-
lash, if necessary, as outlined in paragraph 171.
174. When attaching range transmission to rear
frame, install a new gasket over dowel pins on rear
frame. As transmission housing is guided to rear
frame, install constant mesh gear, spacer and snap
ring (13, 14 and 15—Fig. 145) over the bevel drive
pinion shaft. When housings are together, install and
tighten bolts to a torque of 173-192 ft.-lbs. (235-260
N.m). Move constant mesh gear and spacer fully
rearward and install snap ring in its groove. The
balance of reassembly is the reverse of disassembly
procedure.
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
All Models
175, The differential lock clutch pack and actuating
piston are located within the differential case. When
operator depresses differential lock switch, an elec-
tric solenoid controlled hydraulic valve directs pres-
surized oil to actuate clutch assembly. The clutch
locks one differential side gear to the differential case
which prevents differential action and causes both
final drive sun gear shafts to rotate at the same speed.
When switch is turned off or foot brake applied (auto-
matic switch activated), actuating piston hydraulic
pressure is relieved and clutch pack disengages.
Removal and installation of clutch pack and piston
is outlined in paragraph 171 covering differential
service. Solenoid control valve is located on right side
of tractor rear frame and removal is obvious. Refer to
Fig. 148 and remove jam nut (1) and solenoid coil (2).
Fig, 147—Bevel pinion shaft setting tool CAS'1902'1 In-
stalled in differential bearing retainer bores In rear
frame.
99

Paragraph 176
Unscrew and remove cartridge (3) from body (9).
Remove all "O" rings and back-up rings from car-
tridge. A seal kit consisting of "O" rings (4, 6 and 8)
and back-up rings (5 and 7) are available to reseal the
unit. All other parts are available only as a complete
valve assembly.
FINAL DRIVES
The final drive assemblies used on all models con-
sist of rear axle, planetary reduction unit and axle
housing. The final drive is removed from tractor as a
unit.
All Models
176. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Drain oil from
rear frame and axle housing. Remove drawbar pivot
pin and drawbar. Move rear frame handler under
tractor and bolt to drawbar support. Raise tractor and
remove rear wheel and tire assembly. Raise hood and
lock in raised position. Remove top nut from rear cab
mounts. Install rear cab supports and raise rear of
cab. LfOosen cab mount center plate and remove cab
mount stud and isolators from mounting bracket.
Unbolt and remove mounting bracket from rear axle
housing. Remove a bolt from front and rear of axle
housing and install guide studs. Attach lift brackets
and chain hoist to axle housing. Remove remaining
bolts and lift off axle housing and planetary assembly.
Be careful not to drop the sun gear shaft if it is
removed with planetary.
Tb reinstall final drive, first use tool 89-581-5 and
align brake discs. Install sun gear shaft into brake
housing, then remove brake alignment tool.
NOTE: A iocator pin is used in inner end of right
sun gear shaft oniy on Modeis 7130 and 7140. Use
petroieum jeiiy to stick iocator pin in piace.
Fig. 146—Exploded view of differential lock solenoid
control valve.
1. Jam nut 4. "O"ring 7. Back-up rings
2. Solenoid coil 5. Back-up rings 8. "O"ring
3. Cartridge 6. «O"ring 9. Valve body
100
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Lubricate "O" rings and back-up rings with petro-
leum jelly when reassembling. Tighten cartridge in
valve body to a torque of 180 in.-lbs. (20 N.m). Tighten
jam nut to a torque of 30-40 in.-lbs. (3.4-4.5 N.m).
Install sun gear shaft alignment tool CAS-1902-5
for Models 7110 and 7120 or CAS-1902-3 for Models
7130 and 7140. See Fig. 149. Apply Loctite 515 gasket
eliminator on mounting surface, then recouple axle
housing to rear frame. When sun gear shaft and
planetary gears are engaged, remove alignment tool.
Push axle housing into final position and install bolts.
Tighten bolts to a torque of 173-192 ft.-lbs. (235-260
N.m).
Install cab mounting bracket and tighten bolts to a
torque of 247-276 ft.-lbs. (335-375 N.m). Install
mounting stud and isolators. Tighten inside nut on
lower part of stud to a torque of 35-45 ft.-lbs. (47-61
N.m) and tighten jam nut to inside nut to a torque of
136-153 ft.-lbs. (184-207 N.m). Lower the cab onto the
cab mounts and install mounting nuts and washers.
Tighten nuts to a torque of 140-180 ft.-lbs. (190-244
N.m). Install rear wheel and tire and remove rear
frame handler. Install drawbar and refill transmis-
sion with Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Repeat operation for
opposite side if necessary.
Fig. 149Speciai tool CAS'1902'5 (Models 7110 and
7120) or CAS 1902-3 (Models 7130 and 7140) instailed
to hoid sun gear shaft in alignment^^when Installing fi-
nal drive.
1. Sim gear shaft
2. Aligning dowel 4. Adjusting holt
3. Locating screws 5. Alignment tool
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 177

177. OVERHAUL. With final drive removed, pro-
ceed as follows: Remove sun gear shaft from brake or
planetary and lay aside. Remove planetary ring gear
from axle housing as shown in Fig. 150. Remove snap
ring (1—Fig. 151), then lift off planetary unit (2).
Remove nylon wear insert (13) from end of axle shaft
(14). Remove snap ring (3), thrust ring (4) and shims
(5). Using a bridge 89-525-18 and a 30 ton ram CAS-
10030 as shown in Fig. 152, push axle out of axle
housing. Remove oil seal (15—Fig. 151), then press
axle (14) from bearing cone (10). Remove "O" ring (11)
and press axle from spacer bushing (12). Using a
suitable puller, remove bearing cups (7 and 9) from
axle housing (8).
Before disassembling the planetary unit, index
planet gears (3—Fig. 153) to carrier (9) so gears can
be installed in their original positions, if reused.
Drive roll pin (8) into shaft (10), then drive gear shaft
from planetary carrier. Remove planet gear (3) and
bearings. Remove bearing cones (1 and 7) and bearing
cups (2 and 6) noting spacer (5) (Models 7130 and
7140 only) and snap ring (4) between the cups. Repeat
operation for other two planet gears.

Tb reassemble planetary unit, assemble bearing

Flg. 150—Remove planetary ring gear from axie hous-
ing as shown.
cups and cones into planet gears. If planet gears are
being reused, match index marks made during disas-
sembly. Align pin holes in carrier and shaft, then
press shaft into carrier and planet gear. Install the

1 2

Fig. 152—Using a bridge, 69-525-16, and a 30-ton ram,

CAS-10030, to push axle from axie housing.

Fig. 153—Exploded view of typicai final drive planetary

Fig. 151—Exploded view of typicai final drive unit used reduction unit. Spacer (5) is used oniy on Modeis 7130
on all models. and 7140.
1. Snap ring 6. Bearing cone 11. "O"ring 1. Bearing cone 6. Bearing cup
2. Planetary unit 7. Bearing cup 12. Spacer bushing 2. Bearing cup 7. Bearing cone
3. Snap ring 8. Axle housing 13. Axle wear insert 3. Planet gear (3) 8. Roil pin
4. Thrust ring 9. Bearing cup 14. Axle shaft 4. Snap ring 9. Planetary carrier
5. Shim 10. Bearing cone 15. Oil seal 5. Spacer 10. Shaft (3)

101

Paragraph 177 (Cont.)
roll pin until flush with carrier. Lay unit aside for
later installation.
Tb disassemble the sun gear shaft, refer to Fig. 154
and remove snap ring (2). Remove washer (3) and
adaptor hub (4). On models so equipped, remove shaft
locator pin (1) only if pin is excessively worn or
damaged. Inspect sun gear shaft for any damaged
splines and renew as necessary. Reassemble sun gear
shaft by reversing the disassembly procedure.
Tb reassemble the final drive, heat spacer bushing
(12—Fig. 151) in a bearing oven to a temperature of
375-400° F (191-204° C) and install until seated
against shoulder on axle shaft. Lubricate new "O"
ring (11) with Hy-Tran Plus fluid and install in groove
in spacer bushing. Heat bearing cone (10) to a tem-
perature of 250° F (121° C) and install against spacer
bushing.
WARNING: Always wear heat protective gioves
when handiing heated parts.
Fig, 154—Exploded view of typical sun gear shaft.
Shaft iocator pin (1) is used only on right sun gear
shaft on Models 7130 and 7140.
1. Locator pin
2. Snap ring 4. Brake adaptor hub
3. Washer 5. Sun gear shaft
AXLE HOUSING
AXLE SHAFT
RAM
Fig. 155—Use a 30-ton ram, spacer and M20 threaded
rod as shown to force Inner bearing cone onto axle
shaft.
102
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Apply antiseize compound on the outside diameter
of bearing cups (7 and 9) and drive cups into axle
housing until seated. Install axle shaft assembly in
axle housing. Apply a light coat of oil to inside diame-
ter of bearing cone (6) and place bearing on inner end
of axle shaft. Use a 30 ton ram, spacer and M20
threaded rod as shown in Fig. 155 to press inner
bearing cone on axle shaft. Press bearing until read-
ing on pressure gage is 4000 psi (27580 kPa) for 3.5
inch (88.9 mm) axles or 5000 psi (34474 kPa) for 4.0
inch (101.6 mm) axles. Remove the ram and spacer
without rotating the axle shaft. Install thrust ring
(4—Fig. 151 and snap ring (3). Measure gap between
thrust ring (4) and bearing cone (6). Select a shim
pack (5) equal to the measurement. Remove snap ring
and thrust ring, then install shim pack, thrust ring
and snap ring. Back press inner end of axle shaft imtil
snap ring is tight against its groove, then check
rolling torque of axle shaft which should be as follows:
Rolling torque for 96 and 112 inch axles—
New bearings,
3.5 inch axle 100-170 in.-lbs.
(11.3-19.2 N.m)
4.0 inch axle 140-210 in.-lbs.
(15.8-23.7 N.m)
Used bearings,
3.5 inch axle 50-85 in.-lbs.
(5.6-9.6 N.m)
4.0 inch axle 70-105 in.-lbs.
(7.9-11.9 N.m)
I
Rolling torque for 120 inch axle—
New bearings 160-210 in.-lbs.
(18.1-23.7 N.m)
Used bearings 80-105 in.-lbs.
(9.0-11.9 N.m)
Rolling torque can be adjusted by adding or remov-
ing shims. Changing shim pack thickness by 0.001
inch (0.025 mm) will change rolling torque approxi-
mately 20 in.-lbs. (2.3 N.m) for the 3.5 inch axle or 25
in.-lbs. (2.8 N.m) for the 4.0 inch axle. Shims are
available in thicknesses of 0.003, 0.004, 0.005, 0.012
and 0.030 inch (0.076, 0.10, 0.13, 0.30 and 0.76 mm).
Fill the two inner grooves of a new oil seal (15—Fig.
151) approximately half full with CASE IH 251H EP
grease.
Apply Loctite 515 gasket maker on the outside
diameter of the seal, then install seal until flush with
axle housing. Install planetary carrier unit (2) and
secure with snap ring (1). Install new nylon wear
insert (13) in axle shaft. Apply Loctite 515 gasket
eliminator on axle housing side of ring gear and
install ring gear on axle housing.
Reinstall sun gear shaft and final drive assembly
as outlined in paragraph 176.

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
BRAKES
All models use multiple disc, wet-t5rpe brakes lo-
cated between final drives and rear frame housing.
Brakes are power actuated, self-adjusting and self-
equalizing. Brake hydraulic pressure is regulated at
260 psi (1793 kPa). A one-way check valve is used in
brake inlet port elbow to close the brake hydraulic
circuit when pressure ceases. Brakes then can be
operated manually using fluid trapped in the circuit
when engine is inoperative.
WARNING: Service (foot) braices iVIUST NOT be
used for parking or any other stationary job that
requires tractor to be heid in position. Even a smaii
amount of fiuid seepage wouid resuit in brakes
ioosening and severe damage to equipment or in-
jury to personnei couid resuit. USE PARK LOCK
when parking tractor.
ADJUSTMENT
All Models
178. The only external adjustments that can be
made on brakes are brake pedal alignment, pedal
height, differential lock release switch adjustment
and control valve linkage adjustment.
To make brake pedal adjustments, disconnect
brake pedals from brake valve spools. Make certain
that timing marks on pedals and valve levers are
ALIGN TIMING MARKS
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
SWITCH
3/8 TO 7/16 INCH
(9.5 TO 11.1 MM)
BOLT MUST
EXTEND
1/4 INCH
(6.3 MM)
FROM
SUPPORT
Fig. 156—View showing brake pedal and differential lock release switch adjustment.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraph 178
aligned as shown in Fig. 156. Adjust pedal stop bolts
so that bottom of bolts extend V4 inch (6.3 mm) from
support. Check to see that top of brake valve contacts
the alignment bar. If not, loosen valve mounting bolts,
push brake valve upward agednst the alignment bar,
then retighten valve bolts. Check to see that pedal
lock plate on left pedal will freely engage slot in right
pedal. If not, adjust one pedal stop bolt to align the
pedals.
With brake pedals aligned, measure the distance
that valve spool is screwed into yoke. See Fig. 157.
This distance must be at least V2 inch (12.7 mm).
Loosen the yoke clamp bolt and hold the yoke from
turning. Using a pin through the hole in spool, rotate
spool until holes in yoke and link are aligned. Install
pin through yoke and link. Tum spool counterclock-
wise until pin is tight, then tum spool clockwise V4
turn. Secure pin with flat washer and cotter pin.
Tighten yoke clamp bolt. Repeat adjustment on the
opposite spool.
Tb adjust differential lock release switch position,
depress one brake pedal. Refer to Fig. 156 and loosen
jam nuts on switch. Move the switch as required until
the extended tip of plunger on switch is % inch (16
mm) from switch mounting bracket. Tighten jam
nuts. Release brake pedal and measure distance fi'om
switch mounting bracket to brake pedal. This dis-
PEDAL LOCK PLATE
ALIGNMENT BAR MUST
CONTACT BRAKE VALVE
103
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 178 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

YOKE

Fig. 157—Side and front views of brake vaive iinkage. Refer to text for adjustment.

PISTON

O-RING

O-RING

SUN GEAR SHAFT

ASSEMBLY Qs.

/
LOCATING PIN

USE FOUR PER SIDE IN 7130, 7140 TRACTORS'^

USE THREE PER SIDE IN 7110, 7120 TRACTORS

USE FOUR PER SIDE IN 7130. 7140 TRACTORS

USE THREE PER SIDE IN 7110. 7120 TRACTORS

ADJUSTER RETURN
PUTE

Fig, 156—Exploded view of brake assembiy used on Models 7130 and 7140, Brake used on Models 7110 and 7120 are
the same except for number of friction discs and separator discs used.

104

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
tance must be %-Vi6 inch (9.5-11.1 mm). Repeat the
adjustment on the other switch.
BRAKE ASSEMBLIES
All Models
179. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove brake
from either side, first remove rear axle housing and
planetary as outlined in paragraph 176. Disconnect
brake and lubrication lines and fittings from rear
main frame housing, then remove jumper tubes and
"O" rings. See Fig. 158. Remove two mounting bolts
and install guide studs. Remove remaining bolts and
withdraw brake cylinder assembly. Remove adjuster
return plate, friction and separator discs from rear
frame. Remove the three brake adjusting tubes and
five locating pins. Use compressed eiir to remove
brake piston from brake cover. Remove the large "O"
ring and small "O" ring from brake cover. Inspect
separator discs for burning or uneven wear and renew
as needed. Inspect friction discs for burning or uneven
wear or if all the grooves are worn off, renew the
friction discs. Minimum thickness for brake friction
discs is 0.136 inch (3.45 mm). If desired, sun gear
shaft oil seal in bearing retainer can be renewed at
this time.
Lubricate new "O" rings and install in grooves in
brake cover. Carefully install piston fully into brake
cover. Install the five locating pins. If new friction
discs and separator discs are being installed, reset
brake adjusters to dimension shown in Fig. 159. In-
stall type 1 adjusters with button end out. Install type
2 adjusters with Belleville washers into bearing car-
rier. Starting with a separator disc, then a friction
disc as shown in Fig. 158, install four separator discs
and four frictions discs on Models 7130 and 7140 or
three separator discs and three friction discs on Mod-
els 7110 and 7120. Install adjuster return plate so
that plate tabs contact the adjuster tubes. Fill brake
cylinder with clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid through brake
BRAKE ADJUSTER TYPE 1
1.00 INCH
(25.4 mm)
Fig, 159—Views showing two types of brake adjusters used. If new friction discs and separator discs are installed, set
adjusters to the dimension shown.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 179-180
inlet opening before installing. Install brake cylinder
over guide studs and push into position. Install re-
taining bolts and tighten to a torque of 172-194 ft.-lbs.
(233-263 N.m). Lubricate new "O" rings with petro-
leum jelly and install on jumper supply tubes. Install
jumper supply tubes through rear frame and into
brake cylinder. Install fittings and the brake pressure
and lubrication lines.
Reinstall final drive as outlined in paragraph 176
and bleed brakes as in paragraph 181.
BRAKE CONTROL VALVE
All Models
180. R&R AND OVERHAUL. The brake valve is
located on the right side of firewall inside the engine
compartment. Tb remove the brake valve, tag hydrau-
lic hoses with their port locations on brake valve for
aid in reassembly. Disconnect the hoses and remove
pins from brake spool yokes. Remove the two mount-
ing bolts and remove brake control valve.
Tb disassemble the brake valve, remove yokes from
spool ends. Remove body cap mounting screws and
remove cap (15—Fig. 160) and gasket (14). Withdraw
valve spool and piston assemblies from valve body (3).
NOTE: Mark spoois and pistons so they can be
reinstaiied in their originai bores.
Use a pin through hole in spool to hold spool sta-
tionary and remove locknut (13). Remove small pis-
ton (10). Inspect valve body bores and valve spools (8)
for scratching or scoring and renew as required. Valve
spools and body are a matched set and cannot be
serviced separately.
Inspect pistons for scoring or scratches. Renew all
gaskets and "O" rings. Be sure inlet orifice (2) is clean
and that inlet elbow check valve is operating cor-
rectly.
BRAKE ADJUSTER TYPE 2
1.00 INCH- BELLEVILLE
(25.4 mm) WASHERS
105
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 181 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Reassemble valve by reversing disassembly proce- BLEED BRAKES

dure. Tighten valve spool locknuts (13) to a torque of
12-18 ft.-lbs. (16.2-24.4 N.m). Tighten valve cap bolts
to a torque of 9-11 ft.-lbs. (12.2-14.9 N.m). When
installing brake valve, push valve upward against the
alignment l)ar. Tighten valve mounting bolts to a
torque of 35-42 ft.-lbs. (47.5-57.0 N.m).
After brake valve is reinstalled, adjust linkage as
outlined in paragraph 178 and bleed air from brakes
as in paragraph 181.
All Models
181. Tb bleed air from brake system, place shift
lever in PARK position. Start engine and operate at
low idle speed. Press brake pedals several times to
remove air from brake valve. Depress and hold brake
pedal down. Loosen brake line nut at inlet fitting on
rear main frame. When a solid flow of fluid appears,
tighten the nut. Repeat the operation for opposite
brake. If brake pedal operation feels spongy rather
than having a solid feel, repeat bleeding operation.

15
11 13

Fig. 160—Exploded view of brake control valve used on all modeis. Vaive spooi assembiies are identical. However,
they are matched to valve body bores and are not interchangeable.
4. Small spring 7. "O"ring 10. Small piston 13. Locknut
2. Orifice plate 5. Large spring 8. Valve spool 11. "Oaring 14. Gasket
3. Valve body 6. Large piston 9. Retaining ring 12. Piston retainer 15. Cap

SPRING PtN

PAWL LEVER
COVER

WASHER
LONG STRIP
BEARING
ILSEAL SHORT STRIP
I WASHER
WASHER BEARING CLEVIS P 1 N \ |

i I WASHER \ BELLCRANKX ^ ^
PAWL LEVER SHAFT
BOLT- 1 COTTER PIN
SPRING PIN<
P U a LEVER ROD
CLEVIS PIN

CLEVIS PIN OVER CENTER

COTTER PIN LOCK UNK

WASHER
Fig. 161—Exploded view of the park lock unit used on ail models.

106
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 182-183

PARK LOCK
All Models
182. LINKAGE ADeJUSTMENT. Before adjust-
ing park lock linkage, make sure transmission link-
age is correctly adjusted as outlined in paragraph
136. Then, adjust park lock linkage as outlined in
paragraph 137.
183. R&R AND OVERHAUL PARK LOCK. Tb
remove the park lock assembly, first remove remote
control valves and steering priority valve as outlined
in paragraphs 198 and 225. Then, disconnect linkage
and unbolt and remove park lock unit.
NOTE: To remove park lock gear, refer to para-
graph 161 and split tractor between range transmis-
sion housing and rear main frame.
Tb disassemble the park lock unit, refer to Fig. 161
and using a "C" clamp compress pawl lever against
cover. Remove spring pin from pull lever rod. Remove
"C" clamp, then remove hold down spring. Remove
the spring pin from pawl lever and remove pawl lever
shaft and pawl lever. Remove the three clevis pins,
flat washers and cotter pins. Remove over center lock
link, bellcrank, pull lever rod and flat washer. Then,
pry out oil seal.
Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or
other damage and renew as required. Hold down
spring should have a free length of 3.541 inches (89.95
mm) and should test 100 lbs. (444.8 N) when com-
pressed to a length of 2.34 inches (59.44 mm).
Install new oil seal and strip bearings and reassem-
ble by reversing the disassembly procedure. Apply
Loctite 515 gasket eliminator to mounting flange on
range transmission. Install park lock unit and
tighten retaining bolts to a torque of 38-45 ft.-lbs.
(52-61 N.m).
Reinstall steering priority valve and remote control
valves, then refer to paragraph 182 for linkage ad-
justment information.

POWER TAKE-OFF
All models are equipped with an independent operated multiple disc clutch. Models 7110 and
power take-off that is controlled through a ca- 7120 are available with a two-speed (540 and
ble-operated hydraulic valve to a hydraulically 1000 rpm) unit. Models 7120, 7130 and 7140 are

GAP BETWEEN LEVER AND SLOT-1/4 INCH (6 mm)

BULKHEAD NUTS

FLANGE

SPACER
Fig. 162—View showing pto control valve linkage adjustment.

107
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraphs 184-185 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

available with a single speed (1000 rpm) unit. gage to the test port. Stait tractor engine and warm
Pto speeds are based on 2200 rpm engine hydraulic oil to a temperature of 150° F (65.5° C)
speeds. before making adjustments. With engine operating at
1000 rpm, loosen locknut (23—Fig. 164) and tum
regulated pressure plug (25) as required to set regu-
lated pressure at 265-275 psi (1827-1896 kPa). Stop
LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT engine and tighten the locknut to a torque of 30-40
ft.-lbs. (41-54 N.m). Remove test gage and install plug
All Models in test port.
184. Adjust pto linkage with engine OFF and trans- Check the pto detent adjustment as follows: Start
mission shift lever in PARK position. Move pto control the engine and engage the pto. Engage and disengage
lever rearwsird to end of slot in console. Remove the the transmission several times. The pto must stay
access panel from cab floor. Refer to Fig. 162 and engaged during the shifts. Stop the engine. The pto
loosen locknut at cable sleeve. Loosen the two flange
mounting bolts and turn sleeve counterclockwise un-
til the sleeve no longer contacts spacer. Tum sleeve
clockwise until sleeve contacts spacer, then tighten
sleeve V4 turn more. Tighten flange mounting bolts.
Install locknut tight against sleeve. Adjust bulkhead
nuts until there is V4 inch (6 mm) between lever and
rear end of slot, then tighten nuts.
Start engine and check to see that pto shaft is not
turning. Push pto lever forward into engaged position
and check to see that pto shaft is turning. If the
adjustment does not work, disconnect linkage from
valve spool and check the disengaged (spool ex-
tended) position. The end of the valve spool must be
2Vs inches (56 mm) from valve face. Readjust as
required.

PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

All Models
185. Before making any pressure adjustments, ad-
just control linkage as in paragraph 184. Then, place
pto control lever in OFF position. Working through
access panel opening in cab floor, remove plug from Fig, 164—Exploded view of pto control valve and pres-
pressure test port in pto control valve as shown in Fig. sure regulator valve used on all models.
163. Connect a 0-400 psi (0-2758 kPa) pressure test 1. Locknut
2. Washer 22. "O"ring
3. Thread seal 23. Locknut
4. Detent adjusting screw 24. "O"ring
5. Detent spring 25. Regulated pressure
6. Guide adjusting plug
7. Detent ball 26. Regulator spring
8. Spool 27. Spring seat
9. Poppet 28. Regulator spool
10. Relief spring 29. Valve spool
11. Washer 30. Spool stop
12. Retaining ring 31. Snap ring
13. Pressure spring 32. Shoulder stop
14. Minimum pressure 33. Poppet
adjusting plug 34. Large washer
15. "O''ring 35. Secondary spring
16. Locknut 36. Small washer
17. Oil seal 37. Primary spring
18. Plug 38. Centering spring
19. "O"ring 39. "O"ring
Fig, 163—View showing removal ofpiug from pto con- 20. Valve body 40. End cap
trol vaive pressure test port. 21. Neutral start switch 41. Retaining ring

108
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 186

must self-disengage when engine is stopped. Loosen
locknut (1) and adjust detent screw (4) as necessary.
Tb check the pto clutch and brake pressure, discon-
nect the brake and clutch lines at pto unit. Install a
0-300 psi (0-2068 kPa) test gage at the end ofeach
line. Start tractor engine. Refer to Fig. 165 and with
pto lever in disengaged position, brake pressure gage
should read 260-280 psi (1793-1931 kPa) and clutch
pressure gage should read 0-5 psi (0-34 kPa). As the
control lever is moved forward from disengaged posi-
tion, brake pressure should drop to 10-30 psi (68-209
kPa) and clutch pressure shoidd remain at 0-5 psi
(0-34 kPa). ^^^th control lever in neutral position,
both pressure gages should read 0-5 psi (0-34 kPa).
As the control lever is moved further forward (inter-
mediate position) and an increase in lever effort is
noticed, brake pressure will remain at 0-5 psi (0-34
kPa) and clutch pressure will increase to 110-150 psi
(758-1034 kPa). Then, with control lever in fully
engaged position, brake pressure should be 0-5 psi
(0-34 kPa) and clutch pressure should be 260-280 psi
(1793-1931 kPa).
Any great differences from outlined pressure read-
ings would indicate problems in pto control valve.
Refer to paragraph 186. Remove test gages and re-
connect lines.
PTO CONTROL VALVE
All Models
186. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the pto
control valve, first unbolt and remove access panel
from cab floor. Clean exterior of the valve, lines and
surrounding area. Remove the inlet hose between
park lock cover and pto valve. Disconnect control
cable linkage from valve. Remove the steering prior-
ity valve supply line. Disconnect wires from neutral
start switch (21—Fig. 164). Remove the pilot pressure
tube from pto valve and hitch control valve. Discon-
nect brake supply tube and the pto valve drain tube.
Disconnect pto brake and clutch pressure tubes from
the valve. Remove the by-pass to sump tube. Discon-
nect the regulated pressure line to transmission con-
trol valve from pto valve. Unbolt valve bracket from
transmission housing and remove valve assembly.
Cap or plug all lines.
Tb disassemble the pto control valve, first unbolt
and remove valve from mounting bracket. Identify
and remove all extemal fittings for aid in reassembly.
Remove the neutral start switch (21—Fig. 164). Re-
move locknut (1), washer (2), thread seal (3), adjust-
ing screw (4), detent spring (5), guide (6) and detent
ball (7). Remove locknut (16), minimum pressure
adjusting plug (14) with "O" ring (15), pressure spring
(13) and relief valve assembly (8 through 12). Remove
retaining ring (12), washer (11), reHef spring (10) and
poppet (9) from spool (8). Remove locknut (23), regu-
lated pressure adjusting plug (25) with "O" ring (24)
and regulator spring (26). Remove plug (18) and push
regulator spool (28) and spring seat (27) from valve
bocfy. Place valve body in a press with blocks to protect
the valve spool (29). Apply pressure against end cap
(40) and remove retaining ring (41). Slowly release
pressure on end cap to release spring pressure on the
cap. Remove valve body from press, then remove end
cap and primary spring (37). Remove centering
spring (38). Push outer end of valve spool into body
and remove the small washer (36), secondary spring
(35), large washer (34) and poppet (33). Remove pto
spool assembly (29 through 32) from valve b o ^ . Re-
move oil seal (17).
Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing
excessive wear or other damage. Spool (8), spool (29)
and valve body (20) are not serviced separate^. Check
springs against the following specifications:
Secondary spring (35)
Free length 0.772 in.
(19.63 mm)
Test load 0.50-0.62 lbs.
(2.24-2.74 N)
Test length 0.240 in.
(6.10 mm)

PTO BRAKE PTO CLUTCH PTO LEVER

PRESSURE PRESSURE POSITION
260 to 280 PSI (1 793 to 1 931 kPa) 0 to 5 PSI (0 to 34 kPa) Disengaged
Drop to 10 to 30 PSI (68 to 209 kPa) 0 to 5 PSI (0 to 34 kPa)

0 to 5 PSI (0 to 34 kPa) 0 to 5 PSI (0 to 34 kPa) • Neutral

0 to 5 PSI (0 to 34 kPa) Rise to 110 to 150 PSI (758 to 1 034 kPa) Intermediate
0 to 5 PSI (0 to 34 kPa) 260 to 280 PSI (1 793 to 1 931 kPa) Engaged
Fig. 165—Chart showing pto brai<e and clutch pressures at various controi iever positions.

109
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 187 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Primary spring (37) Test load 74.5-91.1 lbs.

Free length 1.536 in. (331.6-405.3 N)
(39.01 mm) Test length 1.310 in.
Test load 7.38-9.02 lbs. (33.27 mm)
(32.82-40.12 N)
Test length 1.090 in. Relief spring (10)
(27.69 mm) Free length 1.354 in.
(34.39 mm)
Centering spring (38) Test load 28.03-34.25 lbs.
Free length 3.738 in. (69.06-84.40 N)
(94.95 mm) Test length 0.80 in.
Test load 16.2-19.8 lbs. (20.32 mm)
(72.1-88.1 N)
Test length 2.210 in. Pressure spring (13)
(56.13 mm) Free length 1.492 in.
(37.90 mm)
Regulator spring (26) Test load 16.56-20.24 lbs.
Free length 2.138 in. (73.75-90.13 N)
(54.31 mm) Test length 0.85 in.
(21.6 mm)

Detent spring (5)

Free length 1.085 in.
(27.55 mm)
Test load 27-33 lbs.
(120.1-146.8 N)
Test length 0.76 in.
(19.30 mm)
When reassembling, use all new "C* rings, thread
seal and oil seal and reverse the disassembly proce-
dure, keeping the following points in mind. Install
regulator adjusting plug (25) and locknut (23) so that
plug extends two or three threads beyond locknut.
Additional adjustment may be needed after valve
installation. Install minimum pressure plug (14) and
locknut (16) so that plug extends two or three threads
beyond locknut. Tighten locknut to a torque of 25-35
fl.-lbs. (41-54 N.m). No further adjustment should be
needed after valve is reinstalled. Install detent ad-
justment screw (4) and locknut (1) so that adjusting
screw extends about Vg inch (22 mm) out of locknut.
Additional adjustment may be required after valve is
reinstalled.
Fig, 166—Exploded view of pto clutch used on all Use all new "O" rings and reinstall pto control valve
models. by reversing removal procedure. Adjust control link-
1. Needle bearing
2. Snap ring 19. Back plate age as outlined in paragraph 184 and pressure adjust-
3. Oil seal 20. Snap ring ment as in paragraph 185.
4. "O** ring 21. Needle bearing
5. Lube tube 22. Clutch hub & shaft
6. Tubing nut 23. Seal ring PTO ASSEMBLY
7. Elbow 24. Pto housing
8. Clutch housing 25. Seal rings
9. Oil seal 26. Clutch carrier All Models
10. Snap ring 27. Thrust washer
11. Snap ring 28. Snap ring 187. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the
12. Thrust washers 29. Piston seal
13. Thrust bearing 30. Piston pto assembly, first drain oilfromtransmission and pto
14. Snap ring 31. "O" ring housings. Unbolt and remove pto safety shield, then
15. Retainer 32. Snap ring clean pto exterior and surrounding area. Unpin and
16. Bolt (4) 33. Spring
17. Friction disc (10) 34. Spring seat remove hitch upper link. Disconnect clutch, brake
18. Steel disc (11) 35. Snap ring and lube tubes from pto housing. Remove bolts that

110

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
hold pto unit to rear frame. Connect a hoist to pto
housing and remove pto unit from tractor.
Tb reinstall the pto unit, install two M12 x 150 mm
guide studs into rear frame. Install a new gasket over
guide studs. Slide pto into position and install retain-
ing bolts. Remove the guide studs and the hoist.
Install new seal washers on the top two retaining
bolts. Tighten retaining bolts to a torque of 93-112
ft.-lbs. (125-150 N.m). Reconnect pto clutch, brake
and lube tubes. Install safety shield and tighten bolts
to a torque of 54-64 ft.-lbs. (73-87 N.m). Fill transmis-
sion with Hy-Tran Plus fluid to correct level on dip-
stick.
188. DISASSEMBLE PTO CLUTCH. With pto
unit removed as outlined in paragraph 187, refer to
Fig. 166 and remove bolts (16) and retainer (15).
Remove snap ring (14), thrust washers (12) and
thmst bearing (13). Remove snap ring (11), then
unbolt and remove clutch housing (8). Remove "O"
ring (4) and remove lube tube, nut and elbow (5,6 and
7). Remove snap ring (10) and oil seal (9). Using a
slide hammer puller, remove needle bearing (1), then
remove snap ring (2) and oil seal (3). Remove snap
ring (20), back plate (19) and clutch hub and shaft (22)
with seal ring (23) and needle bearing (21). Remove
needle bearing from clutch hub and shaft. Remove
steel discs (18) and friction discs (17) from clutch
carrier. Using a bridge CAS-1907 or equivalent, com-
press clutch spring (33) and remove snap ring (35)
from its groove. Carefully loosen nuts on the bridge
and release clutch spring pressure. Remove snap ring
(35), spring seat (34) and clutch spring (33). Remove
snap ring (32) and pull piston (30) from carrier (26).
Remove "O" ring (31) and seal (29) from piston. Re-
move snap ring (28) and thrust washer (27), then
remove clutch carrier (26) with seal rings (25).
Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or
other damage and renew as required. Clutch spring
(33) should have a free length of 4.97-4.99 inches
(126.29-126.79 mm) and should test 200 lbs. (890 N)
when compressed to a length of 1.80-1.82 inches
(45.77-46.27 mm). Refer to paragraph 191 for reas-
sembly procedures.
189. OVERHAUL SINGLE SHAFT UNIT. With
the pto clutch removed as outlined in paragraph 188,
remove the two cover bolts (1—Fig. 167) and remove
cover (3). Remove "O" ring (10) and snap ring (9) from
output shaft. Remove snap ring (8) and drive output
shaft and bearing out front of pto cover (3). Remove
oil seal (2) from cover. Remove snap ring (7), then
press output shaft from bearing (6).
Refer to Fig. 168 and remove pto brake cylinders
and tubes as an assembly from pto housing. Discon-
nect and remove pressure tubes (1 and 8). Remove
pistons (4) from cylinders (2), then remove "O" rings
(3i 5 and 6).
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 188-191
Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing
excessive wear or other damage. Renew oil seal, gas-
ket and all "O" rings and reassemble by reversing
disassembly procedure.
190. OVERHAUL DUAL SHAFT UNIT. With
the pto clutch removed as outlined in paragraph 188,
remove the two cover bolts (1) and remove cover (4).
Remove thrust washers (12) and idler gear (14) with
needle bearings (13) and idler shaft (15). Using a slide
hammer puller, remove needle bearing (24) from pto
housing (11). Remove "O" ring (10) from 1000 rpm
output shaft (9). Remove snap ring (23), driven gear
(22) and spacer (21) from 540 rpm output shaft (18).
Remove snap ring (20), then drive the 540 rpm output
shaft with bearing (19) out front of pto cover. Press
shaft from bearing. Remove oil seal (17), dust ring
(16) and seal ring (3) from cover. Remove snap ring
(8) and drive the 1000 rpm output shaft (9) with
bearing (7) out front of cover. Remove snap ring (6)
and press output shaft from bearing (7). Remove oil
seal (2) from cover. Remove needle bearings (13) from
idler gear (14).
Refer to Fig. 168 and remove pto brake cylinders
and tubes as an assembly from pto housing. Discon-
nect and remove pressure tubes (1 and 8). Remove
pistons (4) from cylinder (2), then remove "O" rings
(3, 5 and 6).
Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing
excessive wear or other damage. Renew oil seals, seal
ring, gasket and all "O" rings and reassemble by
reversing the disassembly procedure.
191. REASSEMBLE PTO CLUTCH. With pto
rear unit overhauled as in paragraphs 189 or 190,
place unit on a bench with output shaft(s) pointing
downward. Refer to Fig. 166 and install new seal
rings (25) in grooves in carrier (26). Lubricate seal
rings with clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid and install clutch
Fig, 167—Exploded view of single shaft (1000 rpm) pto
unit.
1. Bolt (2)
2. Oil seal 7. Snap ring
3. Cover 8. Snap ring
4. Gasket 9. Snap ring
5. Output shaft 10. **O"ring
6. Bearing 11. Pto housing
111
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 192 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

carrier on the output shaft. Install thrust ring (27) inches (50.8 mm). Install snap ring (35) over end of
and snap ring (28) on the output shaft. Install new output shaft, compress spring and install snap ring
piston seal ring (29) and "O" ring (31) in grooves in in its groove. Remove bridge and starting with a steel
piston (30). Carefully install piston into clutch carrier. disc (18), then a friction disc (17) alternate discs until
Install snap ring (32) flat side up, then install clutch 10 friction discs and 11 steel discs are installed.
spring (33) and spring seat (34). Using bridge CAS- Install steel back plate (19). Install new needle bear-
1907 or equivalent, compress clutch spring about 2 ing (21) into clutch hub and shaft (22) until top of
bearing is flush with bottom end of chamfer. Install
new seal ring (23) in groove on clutch hub and shaft.
Align friction discs (17) and install clutch hub and
shaft, then install snap ring (20). Install oil seal (3)
from inside of clutch housing (8) until top of seal is
even with bottom of snap ring groove. Install snap
ring (2), then press new needle bearing (1) into hous-
ing until seated against the snap ring. Install oil seal
(9) from outside of clutch housing (8) until top of seal
is even with bottom of snap ring groove, then install
snap ring (10). Install lube tube, nut and elbow (5, 6
and 7) and install new "O" ring (4) over lube tube. On
dual shaft units, align idler shaft slot toward clutch
carrier. On all units, install clutch housing (8). Apply
Lx)cktite 242 on clutch housing retaining bolts, install
Fig, 166—Exploded view of pto brakes used on ali
bolts and tighten secure^. Install snap ring (11),
models. thrust washers (12) with thrust bearing (13) between
1. Brake pressure tube 5. "O"ring
the washers and snap ring (14). Install retainer (15)
2. Cylinder (3) 6. "O"ring and secure with bolts (16).
3. "O"ring 7. Pto housing Reinstall pto assembly as outlined in paragraph
4. Brake piston (3) 8. Brake pressure tube 187.

PTO REDUCTION GEARS

All Models ,
192. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the pto
reduction gears, first remove pto unit as outlined in
paragraph 187. Remove clamps and disconnect drain
tubes. Unbolt and remove transmission fill tube. Un-
bolt and remove upper link bracket, then unbolt and
remove pto adapter plate. Refer to Fig. 170, remove
clips (31) and shield cover (30). Remove bolts (29) and
lift out driven gear (28). Working through holes in hub
(27), remove the six bolts (23). Remove hub and
bearing cage assembly and gear oil shield (34) from
rear frame. Remove the four bolts (12) and withdraw
drive gear assembly (9 through 18).
Fig, 169—Exploded view of dual shaft (540 and 1000 Tb disassemble the driven hub assembly, remove
rpm) pto unit. snap ring (33) and shim (32) from driven hub. Using
1. Bolt (2) 13. Needle bearings a suitable puller, pull bearing cage (22) with bearing
2. Oil seal 14. Idler gear
3. Seal ring 15. Idler shaft cups (21 and 24) and bearing cone (20) from driven
4. Pto cover 16. Dust shield hub (27). Use a dish puller and remove bearing cone
5. Gasket 17. Oil seal (25) from driven hub. Remove bearing cups from
6. Snap ring 18. Output shaft (540 rpm) bearing cage (22). Remove cup plug (26) from driven
7. Roller bearing 19. Ballbearing
8. Snap ring 20. Snap ring hub.
9. Output shaft (1000 rpm) 21. Spacer Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing
10. "O" ring 22. Driven gear excessive wear or other damage. Then, reassemble as
11. Pto housing 23. Snap ring
12. Thrust washers 24. Needle bearing follows: Install cup plug (26) in drive hub. Heat bear-

112
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 192 (Cont.)

ing cone (25) in a bearing oven to a temperature of to a torque of 54-64 ft.-lbs. (73-87 N.m). Install driven
250° F (121° C) and install on driven hub until seated gear (28) on driven hub (27). Apply Loctite 242 to
against flange. threads on bolts (29), then install and tighten bolts to
a torque of 54-64 ft.-lbs. (73-87 N.m). Install shield
WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves cover (30) and secure with clips (31).
when handling heated parts.
Use a new gasket and install pto adapter plate.
Install new bearing cups (21 and 24) in bearing Install bolts and tighten securely. Install new gasket
cage (22). Install bearing cage assembly on driven and upper link bracket. Tighten bracket bolts to a
hub. Press bearing cone (20) on driven hub, but do not torque of 350-540 ft.-lbs. (610-730 N.m). Install fill
press tight. Install a dial indicator and check bearing tube with new gasket. Connect drain tubes and
cage end play. Press bearing on until end play is clamps.
0.0004-0.0035 inch (0.01-0.09 mm). Install snap ring Reinstall pto assembly as outlined in paragraph
(33) on driven hub, then using a feeler gage, measure 187.
distance between snap ring and bearing cone. This
distance is the correct shim thickness to be installed.
Remove snap ring, install selected shim and reinstall
snap ring. Shims are available in thicknesses of
0.136, 0.137, 0.139, 0.140, 0.142, 0.143, 0.145 and
0.147 inch (3.442, 3.482, 3.522, 3.562, 3.602, 3.642,
3.682 and 3.722 mm).
Tb disassemble the drive gear assembly, remove
snap ring (18—Fig. 170), spacer (17) and shim (16).
Using a suitable puller, pull bearing cage (13) with
bearing cups (11 and 14) and bearing cone (15) from
drive gear (9). Remove bearing cups (11 and 14) and
bearing cone (15) from drive gear (9). Remove bearing
cups from bearing cage. Using a dish puller, remove
bearing cone (10) from drive gear.
Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing
excessive wear or other damage. Heat bearing cone
(10) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121°
C) and install bearing on drive gear.

WARNING: Always wear heat protective gioves

when handling heated parts.

Install new bearing cups (11 and 14) in bearing cage

(13). Install bearing cage assembly on drive gear.
Press bearing cone (15) on drive gear, but do not press
tight. Install a dial indicator and check bearing cage
end play. Press bearing on until end play is 0.0004-
0.0035 inch (0.01-0.09 mm). Install spacer (17) and
snap ring (18) on drive gear, then using a feeler gage, Fig. 170—Exploded view of pto reduction gears and
measure distance between spacer (17) and snap ring relative parts used on all models.
(18). This distance is the correct thickness shim pack 1. Pto drive shaft 18. Snap ring
to be installed. Remove snap ring and spacer, install 2. Washer 19. Coupler
3. Seal ring 20. Bearing cone
the selected shim pack, then reinstall spacer and snap 4. "O"ring 21. Bearing cup
ring. 5. Union 22. Bearing cage
Tb reinstall drive gear assembly, align splines on 6. Lube tube 23. Bolt (6)
7. Elbow 24. Bearing cup
drive gear and coupler (19) and slide assembly into 8. «O"ring 25. Bearing cone
place. Flat side of bearing cage (13) must be up. 9. Drive gear 26. Cup plug
Install bolts (12) and tighten to a torque of 54-64 10. Bearing cone 27. Driven hub
ft.-lbs. (73-87 N.m). 11. Bearing cup 28. Driven gear
12. Bolt (4) 29. Bolt (6)
Tb reinstall driven hub assembly, install two MIO 13. Bearing cage 30. Shield cover
X 50 mm guide studs. Slide gear oil shield (34) and 14. Bearing cup 31. Clip (4)
15. Bearing cone 32. Shim
driven hub assembly over the guide studs. Remove 16. Shim 33. Snap ring
guide studs and install the six bolts (23). Tighten bolts 17. Spacer 34. Gear oil shield

113

Paragraphs 193-194
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
The hydraulic system provides power for the steer-
ing, brakes, pto clutch and brake, power shift clutches
and valves, air/oil seat valve and cylinder (if so
equipped), front drive axle clutch (if so equipped) and
differential lock, as well as hydraulic lift and control
of carried and towed implements. Hydraulic pumps
and drive unit are located on right side of range
transmission housing. Refer to paragraph 13 for serv-
ice information on hydraulic fluid and filters.
Refer to following paragraphs for hydraulic pumps
and system components.
HYDRAULIC PUMPS
All Models
193. PRESSURE AND FLOW TESTS. To check
the gear (charge) pump rear section pressure and
flow, disconnect hose from rear pump outlet. Install
inlet hose on flowmeter (CAS-10280 or equivalent).to
pump rear outlet and outlet hose from flowmeter to
the disconnected hose. Open load valve on flowmeter,
start engine and operate until hydraulic oil is
warmed. Then, with engine speed at 2200 rpm, adjust
load valve until pressure gage on flowmeter reads 250
psi (1724 kPa). At this time, flowmeter should read
43 gpm (163 IVmin) minimum. If pressure or flow
specifications cannot be met, renew or overhaul
pump. Remove flowmeter and reconnect hose.
Tb check the gear (charge) pump front section pres-
sure and flow, disconnect hoses at oil cooler. Connect
the lower (supply) hose of oil cooler to the flowmeter
inlet and the upper (return) hose of oil cooler to the
flowmeter outlet. Open load valve on flowmeter, start
engine and allow hydraulic oil to warm. Then, with
engine speed set at 2200 rpm, adjust load valve until
pressure gage on flowmeter reads 500 psi (3447 kPa).
At this time, flowmeter gage should read 11.5 gpm
(43.5 L/min) minimum. If pressure or flow specifica-
tions cannot be met, renew or overhaul pump. Tb
check the oil cooler relief valve (on gear pump), oper-
ate engine at 2200 rpm and adjust load valve to
increase pressure to 1525-1625 psi (10515-11204
kPa). At this time, flow should start to decrease (relief
valve opening). If flow does not start to decrease at
this pressure, renew pressure relief valve. Remove
flowmeter and reconnect oil cooler hoses.
Tb check flow and adjust standby pressure and
operating pressure, connect flowmeter inlet line to
piston pump outlet end cap. Connect flowmeter outlet
line to remote valve end cap. Tbe the signal line from
pump compensator to the flowmeter. Open flowmeter
load valve, start engine and warm hydraulic oil. With
engine speed set at 2200 rpm, adjust load valve on
flowmeter until pressure gage reads 2400 psi (16547
114
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
kPa). At this time, the flow gage should read 27 gpm
(102 L/min) minimum. If flow specification cannot be
reached, renew or overhaul piston pump. Close signal
line valve. Low stand by pressure should be 340-390
psi (2344-2689 kPa). If not, remove left plug from
compensator and tum adjusting screw in to increase
pressure or out to decrease pressure, then reinstall
plug. Remove flowmeter. Install a 5000 psi (34474
kPa) pressure gage in upper port of No. 1 remove
coupler at rear of tractor. With tractor operating at
2200 rpm, push No. 1 remote control lever forward
and check pressure gage reading. Pressure should be
2600-2700 psi (17927-18617 kPa). If not, turn slotted
plug on compensator in to increase pressure or out to
decrease operating pressure. Remove test gage.
194. R&R AND OVERHAUL GEAR PUMP. Tb
remove the gear (charge) pump, disconnect oil cooler
supply tube from front port of pump. Disconnect oil
filter hose from rear port of pump. Remove flange
clamp on suction tube at bottom of pump. Plug or cap
all openings. Unbolt and remove pump from drive
housing.
Tb disassemble the pump, refer to Fig. 171 and
remove cup (12), orifice (13), washer (11) and snap
ring (14) above each through bolt (10). Place a match
mark across front flange (9), front housing (23) and
rear housing (17) for aid in reassembly. Remove the
through bolts (10) and remove rear housing (17).
Remove the two gears (18 and 19) from drive shaft
(2). Mark location of each gear on shaft for aid in
reassembly. Remove key (1) from drive shaft. Remove
gears (20 and 21) from driven shaft (3). Mark location
ofeach gear on shaft. Remove "O" ring (22) from front
housing (23), then separate front housing from front
flange (9). Remove oil cooler relief valve (27) from
front housing (23). Remove small "C* ring (24), back-
up ring (25) and large "O" ring (26) from relief valve.
Remove "O" ring (8) from front flange (9). Remove
driven shaft with gear (3), then remove drive shaft
with gear (2). Remove wear plate (4), bearing seal (5),
rubber back-up seal (6) and back-up gasket (7). Re-
move shaft oil seal (15) and washer (16) from front
flange (9).
Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or
other damage. Check ID of the shaft bore bushings.
Maximum ID allowed is 0.879 inch (22.33 mm). In-
spect wear plate bronze surface for wear or scoring.
Check bearing journal areas on OD of shafts. Mini-
mimi OD allowed is 0.873 inch (22.17 mm). Check
width of front gears (on shafts). Minimum gear width
allowed is 0.637 inch (16.18 mm). Check the width of
narrow gears (18 and 21). Minimum gear width al-
lowed is 0.909 inch (23.09 m). Measure width of wide
gears (19 and 20). Minimum gear width allowed is
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 195

1.317 inches (33.45 mm). Check gear pocket depth in plate (39) from pump housing (8). Remove bearing
front housing (23). Maximum gear pocket depth al- plate (17) from valve plate. Remove piston (35) from
lowed is 0.775 inch (19.69 mm). Measure gear pocket piston rod (36), then unbolt and remove compensator
depth in rear housing (17). Maximum gear pocket valve from valve plate. Remove "O" ring (43) and
depth allowed is 2.237 inches (56.82 mm). Renew all retaining ring (42) from piston rod (36), then remove
parts showing excessive swear or other damage. As- piston rod from valve plate. Remove check valve seat
semble relief valve (27) to a test pump CAS-10016. (47), check valve (46) and spring (44). Using a slide
Pump pressure up and observe gage reading where hammer and blind hole puller, remove bearing cup
valve relieves the pressure. Valve setting must be (18) from valve plate. Remove bearing cone (19) and
1525-1625 psi (10515-11204 kPa). spacer (20) from drive shaft (13). Bearing cone is a
When reassembling pump, use all new seals and slip fit on shaft. Remove cylinder head and piston
"C* rings. Install washer (16) in outer portion of shaft assembly from pump housing. Remove pistons (33)
counterbore in front flange (9). Install oil seal (15) and shoe plate (30) assembly from cylinder block (25),
(metal side out) until seated against the washer. then remove pistons from shoe plate. Remove pivot
Install back-up gasket (7) in front flange so that ring (29), three pins (28) and pin retainer (27) from
smooth side of gasket is flush with face of flange. block (25). Place cylinder block assembly in a press
Install rubber back-up seal (6) inside the bearing seal and apply pressure to notched washer (22) to com-
(5). Install the bearing seal in the groove until smooth press spring (23) until snap ring (21) can be removed.
side of seal is flush with face of the flange. Install
wear plate (4) so bronze face will be toward gears.
Carefully install drive shaft (2) taking care not to
damage shaft oil seal. Install driven shaft (3) into
front flange. Lubricate "O" ring (8) with petroleum
jelly and install "O" ring in its groove in front flange.
Align match marks and install front housing (23) on
front flange (9). Lubricate "O" ring (22) with petro-
lexmi jelly and install "O" ring in groove on front
housing. Install one narrow gear (21), then one wide
gear (20) on the driven shaft (3). Install shaft key (1)
into groove in drive shaft (2). Install wide gear (19),
then narrow gear (18) on drive shaft. Align match
marks and install rear housing (11) on front housing
(23). Install through bolts (10) and tighten to a torque
of 40-50 ft.-lbs. (55-70 N.m). Install snap ring (14),
washer (11), orifice (13) and cup (12) on top ofeach
through bolt. Install large "O" ring (26), back-up ring
(25) and small "O" ring (24) on relief valve (27).
Back-up ring and small "O" ring go in the same
groove. Install relief valve in front housing (23).
Using a new gasket and "O" rings, reinstall gear
pump assembly by reversing removal procedure.

195. R&R AND OVERHAUL PISTON PUMP.

Tb remove the piston pump, first remove the following
hydraulic lines: Hydraulic filter to gear pump hose,
hydraulic filter to remote valve hose, suction tube to Fig. 171—Exploded view of gear (charge) pump used
hydraulic filter and the tube from pump inlet tee to on all models.
lube manifold. Disconnect the following hydraulic 1- Key 15. Oil seal
lines from piston pump: Pump to priority valve tube, 2. Drive shaft 16. Washer
3. Driven shaft 17. Rear housing
compensator valve to priority valve tube and pump to 4. Wear plate 18. Narrow gear
hydraulic filter tube. Remove inlet and outlet tees 5. Bearing seal 19. Wide gear
from pimip. Plug or cap all openings. Unbolt and 6. Rubber back-up seal 20. Wide gear
7. Back-up gasket 21. Narrow gear
remove piston pump assembly from pump drive hous- 8. "O"ring 22. "O'^ring
ing. Clean exterior of pump. 9. Front flange 23. Front housing
10. Bolt 24. "O"ring
Tb disassemble the piston pump, refer to Fig. 172 11. Washer 25. Back-up ring
and remove plugs (37 and 40) with "O" rings (38 and 12. Cup 26. "O"ring
13. Orifice 27. Relief valve
41). Remove the six bolts (32), then separate valve 14. Snap ring 28. Dowel pin (2)

115
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 195 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Release pressure and remove snap ring, notched
washer (22), spring (23) and washer (24) from cylin-
der head. Unbolt and remove bearing cover (2). Tag
any shims (3) that are present so they can be returned
to original location if pivot bearings (7) are being
reused. Remove "O" ring (4), spacer (5), bearing cup
(6) and bearing cone (7). Bearing cup and cone are a
slip fit in housing and on the swashplate. Remove
pivot bearing from opposite side of pump housing in
the same manner. Remove swashplate (16) from
housing. Remove pump drive shaft (13) with bearing
cone (12), then press bearing cone from drive shaft.
Remove spring (9) and spring seat (10) from housing.
Using a slide hammer and blind hole puller, remove
bearing cup (11).

Clean all parts and inspect for excessive wear or

other damage as follows: Check bearings for pitting
or roughness and renew as required. Check pistons
(33) and bores in cylinder block (25) for deep grooves
or scoring. Check for looseness between shoe and
piston. Looseness must not be more than 0.005 inch
(0.127 mm). Measure thickness of shoe on each pis-
ton. Thickness must not vary more than 0.001 inch
(0.025 mm) for all nine pistons. Pistons and cylinder
block are not available separately and if damaged,
renew piston and block assembly. Check the shoe
plate (30) and pivot ring (29) for deep grooves and
pitting in pivot area. Pins (28) must be straight and
of equal length. Inspect bearing plate (17) and face of
cylinder block for scratches or scoring. Inspect piston
shoe contact area on swashplate for excessive wear or
scoring. Check to see that spring pivot seat (14) is not
damaged and is secured tight with roll pin (15). Check
piston (35) and piston rod (36) for scoring or binding
action.
When reassembling piston pump, use all new gas-
kets and "O" rings and proceed as follows: Install
bearing cup (11) in housing until seated. Press bear-
ing cone (12) on drive shaft (13) until seated against
shoulder on shaft. Install drive shaft and bearing into
piomp housing. Install spring (9) and spring seat (10)
on the raised boss in housing. Install swashplate (16)
over pump drive shaft and into bearing bores. Install
pivot bearing cones (7), bearing cups (6), spacers (5),
Fig. 172—Exploded view of piston pump used on ali
"O" rings (4), original shims (3) and bearing covers
models.
1. Bolt
(2). Secure with bolts (1) tightened to a torque of
2. Bearing cover 25. Cyiinder head 170-190 in.-lbs. (19-21 N.m). If pivot bearings or
3. Shim 26. Dowel pin swashplate are being renewed, adjust begiring pre-
4. "O" ring 27. Pin retainer load as follows: Assemble new bearing cone (7), bear-
5. Spacer 28. Pin (3)
6. Bearing cup 29. Pivot ring ing cup (6), spacer (5) and "O" ring lubricated with
7. Bearing cone 30. Shoe plate petroleum jelly on one side of pump housing. Install
8. Pump housing 31. Washer one 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) shim under cover (2).
9. Spring 32. Bolt (6)
10. Spring seat 33. Hston(9) Install bolts (1) and tighten to a torque of 170-190
11. Bearing cup 34. Gasket in.-lbs. (19-21 N.m). On opposite side, install pivot
12. Bearing cone 35. Piston bearing cone (7), bearing cup (6) and spacer (5). Using
13. Drive shaft 36. Piston rod a depth gage, measure distance from top of bearing
14. Spring pivot seat 37. Plug
15. Roll pin 38. "O"ring spacer to the face of housing. This measurement less
16. Swashplate 39. Valve plate 0.007-0.009 inch (0.178-0.229 mm) will be the correct
17. Bearing plate 40. Plug shim pack thickness needed. If the required shim
18. Bearing cup 41. "O"ring
19. Bearing cone 42. Retaining ring pack thickness is more than 0.020 inch (0.508 mm),
20. Spacer 43. "O"ring split total shim thickness (both sides) between the
21. Snap ring 44. Spring pivot bearings. No more than 0.020 inch (0.508 mm)
22. Notched washer 45. Dowel pin
23. Spring 46. Check valve plate should be used on either side. Shims are available in
24. Washer 47. Check valve seat thicknesses of 0.003, 0.005 and 0.010 inch (0.076,

116
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 196

0.127 and 0.254 mm). Install selected shim packs, stall plug. Check and adjust pressure, flow and
lubricate "O" rings with petroleum jeUy, install "O" standby pressure as in paragraph 193.
rings and pivot bearing covers. Tighten bolts to a
torque of 170-190 in.-lbs. (19-21 N.m).
Install flat washer (24), spring (23) and notched 196. R&R AND OVERHAUL COMPENSATOR
washer (22) into center of cylinder block (25). Apply VALVE. Tb remove the compensator valve, first clean
pressure £^ainst notched washer to compress spring, valve and surrounding area, then unbolt and remove
then install snap ring (21). Install pin retainer (20) valve assembly. Refer to Fig. 173 and remove plug (21)
into splined end of cylinder block until retainer is V2 with "O" ring (20), spring (19), seat (18) and compen-
inch (12 mm) from end of cylinder block. Install the sator spool (17).Remove plug (16) with "O" ring (15).
three pins (28) into large grooves in splined area of Remove adjusting screw (14), lower seat (13), spring
cylinder block. Install pivot ring (29) with flat side on (12), upper seat (11) and load sensing spool (10).
pins. Install pistons (33) in shoe plate (30), lubricate Remove check plug (3), outer plug (9), orifice (8), plugs
pistons with clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid and install in (4) and plug (7) with "O" ring (6).
cylinder block.
If drive shaft, shaft bearings, valve plate or pump
housing is being renewed, drive shaft bearing preload
must be adjusted as follows: A spacer kit, consisting
of 11 spacers ranging in thicknesses from 0.139 inch
(3.531 mm) to 0.169 inch (4.293 mm) in increments of
0.003 inch (0.076 mm), must be acquired for this
adjustment. Install the 0.169 inch (4.293 mm) thick
spacer (20) from spacer kit, on the drive shaft so that
chamfered side is facing inward. Install bearing cone
(19) against spacer. Install bearing cup (18) in valve
plate (39). Install valve plate on pump housing with-
out gasket (34). Tighten valve plate mounting bolts
(32) eventy, while rotating drive shaft, to a torque of
5 in.-lbs. (0.565 N.m). Using a feeler gage, measure
the gap between valve plate and pump housing at four
locations. Take an average of the four dimensions.
Subtract the correct dimension 0.022 inch (0.559 mm)
from the average measured dimension. Then, sub-
tract the difference from spacer thickness installed,
0.169 inch (4.293 mm). The result will be the spacer
size needed. Select the nearest size spacer available
in kit. Unbolt and remove valve plate, bearing cone
and spacer. Install cylinder block assembly over drive
shgdt and into pump housing. Install selected spacer
(20) and bearing cone (19). Install spring (44), check
valve (46 and seat (47) in valve plate. Install piston
rod (36) through valve plate, then install spiral re-
taining ring (42) in inner groove of piston rod. Lubri-
cate new "O" ring (43) with petroleum jelly and install
in outer groove of piston rod. Using a new gasket,
install compensator valve and tighten bolts to a
torque of 60-70 in.-lbs. (7-8 N.m). Install piston (35)
on piston rod (36). Lubricate bearing plate (17) and
install on valve plate so that notch in bearing plate is Fig, 173—Exploded view of the compensator valve
seated over dowel pin in valve plate. Using a new used on all modeis.
gasket (34), install valve plate and bearing plate 1. Gasket
2. "O"ring 12. Spring
assembly on pump housing. Tighten retaining bolts 3. Check plug 13. Lower seat
to a torque of 23-26 ft.-lbs. (31-35 N.m). Install plugs 4. Plugs 14. Adjusting screw
(37 and 40) with new "O" rings (38 and 41). 5. Valve body 15. "O"ring
6. "O"ring 16. Plug
Use a new gasket on pump flange and reinstall 7. Plug 17. Compensator spool
piston pump assembly by reversing the removal pro- 8. Orifice 18. Seat
9. Plug 19. Spring
cedure. Remove upper plug from valve plate and 10. Load sensing spool 20. "Oaring
install one pint (0.437 L) of Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Rein- 11. Upper seat 21. Adjusting plug

117

Paragraphs 197-198
Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing
excessive wear or other damage. Use all new "O" rings
and reassemble by reversing disassembly procedure.
Use new "O" ring (2) and gasket (1) and reinstall
compensator valve assembly. Tighten mounting bolts
to a torque of 60-70 in.-lbs. (7-8 N.m). Adjust pressure,
flow and standby pressure as outlined in paragraph
193.
197. R&R AND OVERHAUL PUMP DRIVE
UNIT. Tb remove the hydraulic pump drive unit, first
remove the hydraulic pumps as outlined in para-
graphs 194 and 195. On models prior to P.I.N.
AJB0041175, disconnect the external lube line. On all
models, disconnect and remove engine speed sensor
(2—Fig. 174). Unbolt and remove the pump drive
unit.
NOTE: Pry pto valve and bracket upward to pro-
vide room to remove drive unit.
Unbolt and remove bearing cage (10 or lOA), " C
ring (11) and shim (12). Remove bearing cup (13) from
bearing cage. Remove drive gear assembly (15 or
15A). Remove idler gear shaft bolt, then using a slide
hammer, pull out idler gear shaft (3). Remove idler
gear assembly (4 through 9). Drive out bearing (4) and
remove spacer (5). Drive out bearing (9) and remove
snap rings (6 and 8) from idler gear (7). On models
prior to P.I.N. AJB0041175, remove seal ring (18)
Fig. 174—Exploded view of hydrauiic pump drive unit.
Minor differences between early and iate production
units are shown.
1. Housing lOA. Bearing cage (late)
2. Engine speed sensor 11. "O"ring
3. Idler shaft 12. Shim
4. Bearing 13. Bearing cup
5. Spacer 14. Bearing cone
6. Snap ring 15. Drive gear (early)
7. Idler gear 15A. Drive gear (late)
8. Snap ring 16. Bearing cone
9. Bearing 17. Bearing cup
10. Bearing cage (early) 18. Seal ring (early)
118
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
from drive gear shaft. On all models, remove bearing
cones (14 and 16) from drive gear shaft. Remove
bearing cup (17) from housing (1).
Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or
other damage and renew as necessary. Install bearing
cups (11 and 17) in bearing cage and housing. Install
snap rings (6 and 8) in idler gear (7). Install bearing
(9) against snap ring (8). Install spacer (5), then
install bearing (4) against snap ring (6). Install idler
gear assembly in housing and install idler shaft (3).
Install idler shaft retaining bolt with flat washer and
tighten securely. Press bearing cones (14 and 16) on
drive gear shaft (15 or 15A). Install drive gear assem-
bly in housing and install bearing cage (10 or lOA)
without shims (12) or "O" ring (11). Install and tighten
bearing cage bolts evenly to a torque of 30 in.-lbs.
(3.39 N.m) while turning the shaft. Using a feeler
gage, measure the gap between bearing cage and
drive housing at each bolt. Take an average of the
measurements. Add 0.0027 inch (0.07 mm) to the
average dimension. This will be the shim pack thick-
ness needed. Shims are available in thicknesses of
0.003, 0.004, 0.005, 0.012 and 0.030 inch (0.08, 0.10,
0.13, 0.30 and 0.76 mm). Remove bearing cage from
drive housing. Lubricate "O" ring (11) with petroleum
jelly and install on bearing cage. On models prior to
P.I.N. AJB0041175, install new seal ring (18) on drive
gear shaft (15). Lubricate seal ring with petroleum
jelly, then reinstall drive gear shaft assembly. On all
models, install selected shim pack (12) and bearing
cage (10 or lOA). Tighten bearing cage retaining bolts
to a torque of 40-45 ft.-lbs. (55-60 N.m). Using a dial
indicator, check end play of drive gear shaft. End play
must be 0.001-0.004 inch (0.025-0.100 mm). Change
shim pack (12) thickness, if necessary, to correct the
end play. Use new "O" ring and install engine speed
sensor (2).
Apply a bead of Loctite 515 to mounting surface of
pump drive unit. Install pump drive unit by reversing
the removal procedures.
PRIORITY VALVE
All Models
198. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the pri-
ority valve, first remove the remote valves as outlined
in paragraph 225. Disconnect tubes from priority
valve, then remove the valve.
Tb disassemble the priority valve, remove all fit-
tings and "O" rings. Refer to Fig. 175 and remove plug
(2) with "O" ring (3), priority spool (4) and spring (5).
Remove the 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) orifice plug from
spool. Loosen locknut (27) and remove adjusting
screw (26) with "O" ring (25), spring (24), poppet (23)
and seat (22). Remove relief valve body (21) with "O**
ring (20), back-up ring (19) and "O** ring (18). Remove
the 0.018 inch (0.46 mm) orifice plug (7) and the 0.090
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraphs 199-200

inch (2.28 mm) orifice plug (17) from valve body. OPERATION
Remove plug (16) with "O" ring (15), spring (14), ball
(13) and check valve body (12) with back-up rings (8
and 11) and "O" rings (9 and 10). All Models
Clean and inspect all parts for pitting, scoring or
grooves and renew as necessary. Spool (4) and body 200. The electronic hitch system consists of the
are a matched set and are not available separately^. operator's control panel, the control module with
Check valve spring (14) should have a free length of automatic reset, two load pin sensors, hitch hydraulic
0.455 inch (11.56 mm) and should test 0.090-0.108 control valve, hitch position feedback sensor and wir-
lbs. (0.40-0.48 N) when compressed to a length of ing harness.
0.400 inch (10.16 mm). Relief valve spring (24) should The electronic hitch system operates in one of two
have a free length of 1.118 inch (28.40 mm) and modes: Position Control and Load Control. In Posi-
should test 12.8-15.74 lbs. (57.0-70.0 N) when com- tion Control, the hitch position and movement is
pressed to a length of 0.826 inch (20.98 mm). Priority directly proportional to the position and movement of
spool spring (5) should have a free length of 2.51 the control lever. The hitch always raises at maxi-
inches (63.63 mm) and should test 40.45-49.46 lbs. mum speed. In lowering, the hitch moves at the speed
(180-220 N) when compressed to a length of 1.91 selected by the hitch position drop speed control. In
inches (48.51 mm).
Reassemble priority valve by reversing the disas-
sembly procedure keeping the following points in
mind: Use all new "O" rings and back-up rings when
reassembling. Make sure holes in orifice plugs are
clean. When installing orifice plug (17) use Loctite
242 on plug threads and tighten to a torque of 12-14
ft.-lbs. (16-19 N.m). Install orifice plug (7) and tighten
to a torque of 12-14 ft.-lbs. (16-19 N.m). Install and
tighten spool orifice plug (6) to a torque of 45-60
in.-lbs. (5-7 N.m). Tighten relief valve body (21) to a
torque of 30-35 ft.-lbs. (41-48 N.m). Tighten plug (2)
to a torque of 25-30 ft.-lbs. (34-41 N.m).
Use all new "O" rings and install priority valve by
reversing the removal procedure. Check and adjust
steering priority valve pressure as outlined in para-
graph 15.

PTO CONTROL VALVE

All Models

199. For information on PRESSURE ADJUST-

MENT and R&R AND OVERHAUL of the pto control
valve, refer to paragraphs 185 and 186.
-15

Fig. 175—Expioded view of the steering priority valve

HYDRAULIC LIFT 1.
used on all models,
Valve body
SYSTEM 2.
3.
Plug
"O" ring
; 15.
16.
"O"ring
Plug
4. Vialve spool |v 17. Orifice plug
5. Spring • 18. "Oaring
All models are available with a 3-point Category III 6. Orifice plug 19. Back-up ring
hydraulic operated hitch. The electronic hitch control 7. Orifice plug 20. "O"ring
8. Back-up ring 21. Relief valve body
system gives load control and position control of soil 9. "O"ring 22. Seat
engaging implements. Tractors are equipped with one 10. "O" ring 23. Poppet
internal hitch cylinder and either one (Models 7110 11. Back-up ring 24. Spring
12. Check valve body 25. «O"ring
and 7120) or two (Models 7130 and 7140) external 13. Ball 26. Adjusting screw
hitch cylinders. 14. Spring 27. Locknut

119

Paragraph 200 (Cont.)
Load Control, the electronic hitch system adjusts the
hitch position to maintain a constant implement load
on the tractor in changing soil conditions and varying
terrain. With a load increase, the electronic hitch
system will lower the hitch. The amount of hitch
movement to a particular load change is determined
by the hitch travel control and the speed that the
hitch raises or lowers is determined by the hitch
response speed control.
TTie amber enable or reset indicator light is located
as shown in Fig. 176. After tractor is started, the
indicator light will be ON continuously for one to two
seconds for a bulb check. If the position control lever
and the actual hitch position match, the hitch system
is enabled. If not, the amber light flashes ON and
OFF. Tb enable the hitch, move position control lever
to match the actual hitch position. When the indicator
light stops flashing, hitch system is enabled and hitch
will follow the control lever movement.
The position control lever is used to raise and lower
implements and to select the working position of the
implements. To lift the implement, pull position con-
trol lever to the rear. The hitch is fully up when
control lever is in transport lockout position. Tb lower
the implement, push control lever forward. The me-
chanical stop on the console provides an adjustable
lever stop which allows control lever to be returned
to the same set position.
The transport lockout is built into the control lever
slot in console. Pull control lever rearward and into
the offset to lock hitch in the raised position to pre-
vent the lowering of an implement during transport.
The up/down rocker switch is a convenience for
field work. When the switch is in down position, hitch
will lower to the position set by the position control
lever at the speed set by the hitch position drop speed
control. When the switch is in up position, hitch will
raise at maximum speed to the fully raised position.
The hitch position drop speed control varies the
lowering speed of the hitch as the control lever is
MECHANICAL
AOJUSTASLE
AMBER FLASHING
ENABLE (RESET)
INDICATOR LAMP UP/DOWN
SELECTOR SWITCH
Fig. 176~~View showing location of some of the electronic hitch controls on console. Refer also to Fig. 177.
120
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
pushed forward to the lower position or the up/down
rocker switch is pushed to down position. The position
drop speed control is only effective in the position
control mode. Rotate control knob clockwise to in-
crease or counterclockwise to decrease lowering
speed of hitch. The position drop speed control knob
is located under a cover at rear of control console. See
Fig. 177.
The load control knob (Fig. 176) sets the depth of
the implement to control the load on the tractor.
Turning the load control knob clockwise will increase
the tractor load and the implement depth. Turning
the knob counterclockwise will decrease tractor load
and implement depth. At lighter load settings (No. 1
to No. 4), some implements will not lower in load
control operation. The tractor must be moving in
order for load control to be functional.
The travel control knob varies the range of hitch
height corrections in response to load variations. A
higher (clockwise) travel control setting results in a
closer control of load and a better following of soil
contours but larger amounts of hitch movement. Set-
tings in the upper range should be used for fully
mounted equipment, especially when operating in
terrain that varies significantly (such as crossing
terraces). A lower (counterclockwise) travel setting
reduces the hitch movement and increases load vari-
ations, but limits the amount of hitch movement.
Settings in the lower range should be used with
semi-mounted implements or flat terrain where the
amount of hitch movement can be restricted without
affecting performance.
The hitch response control knob (Fig. 177) varies
the speed that the hitch raises and lowers in the load
control mode onfy. Turning the knob clockwise, raises
or lowers the hitch faster. Turning the knob counter-
clockwise, raises or lowers the hitch slower. The
slower action reduces the sharpness of hitch action.
Tbo slow a speed will limit ability to follow varying
terrain.
MECHANICAL
TRANSPORT
LOCKOUT
TRAVEL CONTROt KNOB
LOAD

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
201. OPERATING IN POSITION CONTROL.
The tractor and implement must be operated in the
field to select the correct position of the hitch. Set the
position control lever in the transport lockout posi-
tion. Place all control knobs in maximum setting of
11. Set up/down rocker switch in down position. If the
enable or reset indicator light flashes, move position
control lever to match the actual hitch position. When
lowering the hitch with the control lever, decrease the
hitch position drop speed until implement drops at a
desirable rate. (Aii empty hitch may not lower at a
setting of 1). Operate tractor and implement in the
field. Set the desired implement depth with position
control lever. Move the mechanical stop against fi-ont
side of control lever. Move the rocker switch to up
position to temporarily raise the implement without
changing any of the hitch position adjustments. Press
the down switch to return the implement to its origi-
nal working position. Adjust load control operation as
outlined in paragraph 202.
NOTE: Always place position control lever in
hitch lockout position for implement road trans-
port.
202. OPERATING IN LOAD CONTROL. Tum
the load control knob counterclockAvise to decrease
load setting until hitch begins to raise. Move position
control lever fully forward. Tum travel control knob
counterclockwise to reduce the changes in the work-
ing depth with changing loads. Atypical operation for
a fully mounted implement is a setting of 7 to 10 and
a setting of 3 to 5 for a semi-mounted implement. Use
the hitch response speed control to adjust the speed
at which the electronic hitch will respond to changing
soil and load conditions. Slowly tum the control knob
counterclockwise to^slow the hitch response. If hitch
response speed is adjusted too quickly, it will cause
HITCH FOSlTiON
DBOP SPEED
CONTROI KNOB
SEVEN SEGMENT
Fig. 177—View showing location of some of the electronic hitch controls on console. Refer also to Fig. 176.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 201-203
rapid changes in implement operating depth and
rapidly changing loads on the tractor. If adjusted too
slowly, implement may not follow the terrain prop-
erly.
ELECTRONIC HITCH DIAGNOSTIC
CODES
Ail Models
203. The electronic hitch diagnostic monitor (Fig.
177) shows the condition of electronic load control
system by a diagnostic code. When key switch is
tumed to ON position, all seven segments of the LED
(light emitting diode) display (Fig. 178) are continu-
ously on for 1 to 2 seconds for a display check.
The "O" code indicates the system is normal. Sys-
tem normal means that electrical and electronic parts
of the hitch system are functioning correctly. How-
ever, this display does not tell if controls are not
adjusted correctly or if there is a hydraulic problem.
If the "O" code is displayed and there is poor lever
to hitch movement or the hitch stops abruptly or over
shoots in relation to the control lever, the hitch posi-
tion potentiometer (14—Fig. 179) is out of adjust-
ment.
If the "O" code is displayed and the hitch does not
raise, lower or enable, the control lever potentiometer
(9) and/or hitch position potentiometer (14) are out of
adjustment.
If the "O" code is displayed and the hitch will not
lower, the load control potentiometer (3) or the drop
speed potentiometer (6) is in the fully counterclock-
wise position.
If the "O" code is displayed and hitch will not raise
or lower, or the hitch has erratic movement, control
valve spool is sticking or binding
DiSPLAY
121
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 203 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

If the "A" code is displayed, it indicates low battery
voltage (less than 9.8 volts) or a ground in the 8 volt
circuits to the left or right hitch pin sensors (15 or 16),
or the control lever potentiometer (9), or the hitch
position potentiometer (14).
lYS—View of the seven segment LED dispiay on
the electronic hitch diagnostic monitor.
12
13
The "E" code indicates too high battery voltage. If
battery voltage exceeds 19 volts, electronic hitch con-
trols will shut down.
The "2" code indicates a failure in the lower portion
of the control valve solenoid. Hitch will not lower but
will raise.
The **H" code indicates hitch position circuit failure.
Circuit open or grounded or hitch position potenti-
ometer is out of adjustment.
The "P'* code indicates a failure in the control lever
circuit. Circuit has an open or ground or the control
lever potentiometer is out of adjustment.
The "9" code indicates a travel control circuit fail-
ure. Circuit has an open or ground. Electronic hitch
system will function in position control only^.
The "L" code indicates a failure in the load control
circuit. Circuit is open or has a ground. Electronic
hitch system will function in position control only.
If the "S" code is displayed, it indicates a failure in
the circuit for the hitch pin sensors (15 and 16).
Electronic hitch system will function in position con-
trol only.
The "1" code indicates an up/down switch failure.
Up/down switch is inoperative.
The "6" code indicates a drop speed circuit failure.
Drop speed operates in maximum speed only.
The "7" code indicates a hitch response speed con-
trol circuit failure. Response speed operates in maxi-
mum speed only.
The "4" code indicates an enable or reset indicator
light circuit failure. All other hitch functions are
operative.
The "C" code indicates a valve compensation failure
(failure of potentiometer or module to synchronize the
control lever to hitch).
If a decimal point only is shown as a code, it indi-
cates that tractor ground speed is less than 0.5 mph
(0.8 km/h) or ground speed signal is not present.
Hitch system will not operate in load control.
If no code is shown, wire or wires are open, seg-
ments are not functioning, monitor is disconnected,
monitor is defective, fuse is blown or module is defec-
tive.
NOTE: If any of the following codes exist, there
wiil be no hitch controi. An "F" code fiashes aiter-
nateiy with an error code.

The T , 3" code flashing alternately, indicates a

_ ijg^\^iew showing hitch wiring and location of failure in the valve raise solenoid circuit.
electronic control units.
The T , A** code flashing alternately, indicates a
1. Reset indicator light 8. Hitch module
2. Up/down rocker switch 9. Control lever potenti- failure of both the supply voltage and the up/down
2A. Diode ometer switch circuits.
3. Load control potentiometer 10. Console hitch wiring The *F, E" code flashing alternately, indicates a too
4. Travel control potenti- 11. Rear hitch wiring
ometer 12. Control valve high battery voltage and a failure of the up/down
5. Hitch response potenti- 13. Wiring protector tubes switch circuit.
ometer 14. Hitch position potenti- The *F, H" code flashing alternately, indicates a
6. Hitch drop speed potenti- ometer
ometer 15. Left hitch pin sensor failure of both the hitch position and the up/down
7. Diagnostic monitor 16. Right hitch pin sensor switch circuits.
122

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
The T, P" code flashing alternately, indicates a
failure of both the hitch position lever control and the
lup/down switch circuits.
ELECTRONIC HITCH CONTROL CIRCUIT
TESTS
All Models
Batteries must be fully charged and all connections
must be clean and tight before testing. Use a mul-
timeter for all tests. Wire numbers are stamped con-
tinuously on wires.
204. HITCH MODULE VOLTAGE TEST. Dis-
connect the 37 pin connector. Tests will be made at
the terminals of the connector. Key switch must be in
ON position.
Check the voltage between terminal 5 for red wire
#526 and ground. If test shows less than 12 volts,
check for bad 7.5 amp fuse, bad relay, bad circuit
between module and relay or bad relay solenoid.
Check for continuity between terminal 1 for
black/white wire #500 and ground. If test shows no
continuity, check for bad wire between terminal 1 and
ground junction block.
There is no way to test the hitch module. If all other
components and circuits test good and hitch will not
operate, renew the module.
205. UP/DOWN SWITCH DIODE. Disconnect
the connector at the up/down switch side of diode.
Tbuch positive probe of ohmmeter to the diode and
negative probe to ground. There should be no conti-
nuity. If there is continuity, diode is bad.
Tbuch negative probe of ohmmeter to the diode and
positive probe to the ground. There should be conti-
nuity. If there is no continuity, diode is bad.
206. HITCH UP/DOWN SWITCH. Disconnect
connector at up/down switch. Place switch in UP
position.
Check for continuity between terminal 7 and ter-
minal 5 on the switch. If there is no continuity, switch
is bad.
Place switch in DOWN position. Check for continu-
ity between terminal 2 and terminal 6 on switch. If
there is no continuity, switch is bad.
Check for continuity between terminal 1 and ter-
minal 5 on switch. If there is no continuity, switch is
bad.
If the above readings are good, disconnect connec-
tor on hitch control module and check the circuits
between module connector and up/down switch.
Check for continuity between terminal 9 for light
blue wire #512 and terminal 2 on up/down switch. If
there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 204-208
Check for continuity between terminal 11 for light
blue wire #590 and terminal 1 on up/down switch. If
there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 18 for light
blue wire #510 and terminal 7 on up/down switch. If
there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
207. HITCH CONTROL VALVE SOLENOID.
Disconnect connector at control valve solenoid.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal C on solenoid. Reading should be 3.8-4.2
ohms. If not, solenoid is bad.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal B and
terminal C on solenoid. Reading should be 3.8-4.2
ohms. If not, solenoid is bad.
If all readings are good, disconnect connector at
control module and test circuits between module con-
nector and the solenoid. Up/down switch must be in
DOWN position.
Check for continuity between terminal 15 for light
blue wire #513 and terminal A of solenoid connector.
If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 9 for light
blue wire #512 and terminal B of solenoid connector.
If there is no continuity, check for bad wire, bad
connection or bad up/down switch.
Check for continuity between terminal 2 for black
wire #511 and terminal C of solenoid connector. If
there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
208. RH HITCH PIN SENSOR. Disconnect con-
nector at hitch pin sensor. Tfests will be made on
sensor.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal B. Reading should be 175K-195K ohms. If
not, hitch pin sensor is bad.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal C. Reading should be 270-330 ohms. If not,
hitch pin sensor is bad.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal B and
terminal C. Reading should be 175K-195K ohms. If
not, hitch pin sensor is bad.
If all readings are good, disconnect connector at
control module and test circuits between module con-
nector and RH hitch pin sensor.
Check for continuity between terminal 13 for black
wire #514 and terminal A of hitch pin sensor connec-
tor. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 28 for light
blue wire #514 and terminal B of sensor connector. If
there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
123

Paragraphs 209-213
Check for continuity between terminal 32 for red
wire #514 and terminal C of sensor connector. If there
is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.
209. LH HITCH PIN SENSOR. Disconnect con-
nector at hitch pin sensor. Tfests will be made on
sensor.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal B. Reading should be 175K-195K ohms. If
not, hitch pin sensor is bad.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal C. Reading should be 270-330 ohms. If not,
hitch pin sensor is bad.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal B and
terminal C. Reading should be 175K-195K ohms. If
not, hitch pin sensor is bad.
If all readings are good, disconnect connector at
control module and test circuits between module con-
nector and LH hitch pin sensor.
Check for continuity between terminal 14 for black
wire #515 and terminal A of hitch pin sensor connec-
tor. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 20 for light
blue wire #515 and terminal B of sensor connector. If
there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 33 for red
wire #515 and terminal C of sensor connector. If there
is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.
210. HITCH POSITION DROP SPEED PO-
TENTIOMETER. Disconnect connector at drop
speed potentiometer. Tfests will be made on potenti-
ometer.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal C on potentiometer. Reading should be
9000-11000 ohms. If not, potentiometer is bad.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal B. Reading should vary from 0 to 9000-
11000 ohms as potentiometer is moved from mini-
mum to maximum. If not, potentiometer is bad.
If all readings are good, disconnect connector at
hitch control module and test circuits between mod-
ule connector and drop speed potentiometer.
Check for continuity between terminal 3 for black
wire #502 and terminal A of potentiometer connector.
If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 29 for light
blue wire #502 and terminal B of potentiometer con-
nector. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or
bad connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 34 for red
wire #502 and terminal C of potentiometer connector.
If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
124
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
211. HITCH RESPONSE POTENTIOMETER.
Disconnect connector at response potentiometer.
Tfests will be made on potentiometer.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal C on potentiometer. Reading should be
9000-11000 ohms. If not, potentiometer is bad.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal B. Reading should vary from 0 to 9000-
11000 ohms as potentiometer is moved from mini-
mum to maximum. If not, potentiometer is bad.
If all readings are good, disconnect connector at
hitch control module and test circuits between mod-
ule connector and hitch response potentiometer.
Check for continuity between terminal 4 for black
wire #503 and terminal A of potentiometer connector.
If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 17 for light
blue wire #50S and terminal B of potentiometer con-
nector. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or
bad connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 37 for red
wire #503 and terminal C of potentiometer connector.
If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
212. TRAVEL CONTROL POTENTIOMETER.
Disconnect connector at travel control potentiometer.
Tfests will be made on potentiometer.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal C on potentiometer. Reading should be
9000-11000 ohms. If not, potentiometer is bad.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal B. Reading should vary from 0 to 9000-
11000 ohms as potentiometer is moved from mini-
mum to maximum. If not, potentiometer is bad.
If all readings are good, disconnect connector at
hitch control module and test circuits between mod-
ule connector and travel control potentiometer.
Check for continuity between terminal 25 for red
wire #506 and terminal A of potentiometer connector.
If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 26 for light
blue wire #506 and terminal B. If there is no continu-
ity, check for bad wire or bad connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 19 for black
wire #506 and terminal C. If there is no continuity,
check for bad wire or bad connection.
213. LOAD CONTROL POTENTIOMETER.
Disconnect connector at load control potentiometer.
Tfests will be made on potentiometer.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal C on potentiometer. Reading should be
9000-11000 ohms. If not, potentiometer is bad.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal B. Reading should vary fi:'om 0 to 9000-

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
11000 ohms as potentiometer is moved from mini-
mum to maximum. If not, potentiometer is bad.
If all readings are good disconnect connector at
hitch control module and test circuits between mod-
ule connector and load control potentiometer.
Check for continuity between terminal 35 for red
wire #505 and terminal A of potentiometer connector.
If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 22 for light
blue wire #505 and terminal B. If there is no continu-
ity, check for bad wire or bad connection.
Check for continvuty between terminal 7 for black
wire #505 and terminal C. If there is no continuity,
check for bad wire or bad connection.
214. CONTROL LEVER POTENTIOMETER.
Disconnect connector at control lever potentiometer.
Tfests will be made on potentiometer.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal C on potentiometer. Reading should be
4000-6000 ohms. If not, potentiometer is bad.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal B. Reading should vary from 0 to 4000-6000
ohms as potentiometer is moved from minimum to
maximum. If not, potentiometer is bad.
If all readings are good, disconnect connector at
hitch control module and test circuits between mod-
'ule connector and control lever potentiometer.
Check for continuity between terminal 30 for red
wire #504 and terminal A of potentiometer connector.
If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 21 for light
blue wire #504 and terminal B. If there is no continu-
ity, check for bad wire or bad connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 6 for black
wire #504 and terminal C. If there is no continmty,
check for bad wire or bad connection.
215. HITCH POSITION POTENTIOMETER.
Disconnect connector at the hitch position potenti-
ometer. Tfests will be made on potentiometer.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal C on potentiometer. Reading should be
4000-6000 ohms. If not, potentiometer is bad.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and
terminal B. Reading should vary from 0 to 4000-6000
ohms as potentiometer is moved from minimum to
maximum. If not, potentiometer is bad.
If all readings are good, disconnect connector at
hitch control module and test circuits between mod-
ule connector and hitch position potentiometer.
^ Check for continuity between terminal 12 for black
wire #507 and terminal A of potentiometer connector.
If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad
connection.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 214-218
Check for continuity between terminal 27 for light
blue wire #507 and terminal B. If there is no continu-
ity, check for bad wire or bad connection.
Check for continuity between terminal 31 for red
wire #507 and terminal C. If there is no continuity,
check for bad wire or bad connection.
ELECTRONIC HITCH ADJUSTMENTS
All Models
Be sure batteries are fully charged and all connec-
tions are clean and tight before starting adjustment
procedures. If necessary, move left rear wheel and tire
out for access to hitch valve. Unbolt and remove right
console side cover. Using adapter harness CAS-1897,
connect hitch tester and digital voltmeter CAS-1638A
to the test connector on hitch control module. Set
hitch load control and travel control knobs in fully
clockwise position. Place up/down switch in DOWN
position. Plug black wire into common terminal and
red wire into volt terminal. Put test box slide switch
in ON position. Put push/pull switch in OFF position.
Put digital voltmeter selector switch to DC volts.
216. CONTROL LEVER POTENTIOMETER
CALIBRATION. Tum keyswitch to ON position, but
do not start engine. Tum test box position switch to
number 1. Move hitch position control lever to full
raise position. Voltmeter reading should be 1.71-1.75
volts. If not, adjust control lever potentiometer as
follows: With position control lever in full raise posi-
tion, loosen set screw in bottom of lever on potenti-
ometer. Rotate the potentiometer shaft until reading
is 1.71-1.75 volts, then tighten set screw. Move hitch
position control lever to the full lower position. Read-
ing on voltmeter should be plus 0.01 to minus 0.01
volts. If not, adjust control lever stop on mounting
plate to obtain correct reading.
217. HITCH POSITION POTENTIOMETER
CALIBRATION. Tum keyswitch and start engine.
Move hitch position control lever in full lower posi-
tion. Check to see that hitch is completely down. If
not, loosen the link arm clamp bolt and tum the hitch
position (rockshaft) potentiometer shaft clockwise
until hitch is fully down. Stop tractor engine. Tum
keyswitch to ON position, but do not start engine.
Tum test box position switch to number 2. Make sure
the link rod is in the bottom of the slot on the lever
bracket on end of rockshaft. At this time, reading on
voltmeter must be 0.0 to minus 0.02 volts. If neces-
sary, rotate potentiometer shaft to correct reading.
Tighten link arm clamp bolt. Check to be sure the
potentiometer voltage is still at 0.0 volts.
218. CENTERING HITCH VALVE. Make sure
hitch is fully lowered before starting adjustment.
Disconnect the 37 pin connector from the hitch control
125

Paragraph 219
module, then connect the 37 pin connector on the CAS
2028 test box cable. Connect the remaining 37 pin
connector to the test box. Connect the 9 pin connector
to the test box. Connect the 16 pin connector to the
digital readout box. Tum keyswitch and start engine.
Check to see if hitch raises on its own when engine is
started. If there is no hitch movement, turn adjust-
ment screw on control valve solenoid core counter-
clockwise until hitch begins to raise. Make a mark on
the solenoid core for the screw slot position. Turn
adjustment screw clockwise until hitch begins to
lower. Make a mark on solenoid core for screw slot
position. Then, move adjustment screw slot to the
center position between the two marks on solenoid
core.
Depress and release the rocker switch momentary
position on the digital readout box (Fig. 180) and
observe the display. A decimal point will flash in the
lower right corner while hitch is going through a test
cycle. When cycle is complete, the readout will display
DECIMAL BAR
BAR NUMBER
Fig. 160—Various views of hitch vaive centering tooi,
CAS'2026, showing decimai point, bars and number in
dispiay boxes.
126
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
a flashing bar on either the top or bottom of the
display which will alternate with a flashing number
between 1 and 9. A flashing bar on the top indicates
the hitch valve is out of adjustment in the raise
direction. A flashing bar on the bottom indicates the
hitch valve is out of adjustment in the lower direction.
The flashing number indicates the amount of hitch
valve adjustment necessary to reach zero. One being
a small amount of adjustment and nine, a large
amount of adjustment.
NOTE: Do not make any hitch valve adjustment
when just the decimai point is flashing on the
dispiay.
Adjust the valve solenoid core as required by the
readout box display until the flashing zero without a
flashing bar is displayed. Tighten locknut on adjust-
ing screw. Disconnect test box cable from the tractor
wiring harness and connect tractor harness to the
hitch control module.
219. VALVE COMPENSATION ADJUST-
MENT. First adjust the hitch position (rockshaft)
potentiometer calibration as outlined in paragraph
217, then install 500-1000 lbs. (227-454 kg) of weight
on hitch arms Cycle hitch several times to remove any
air from cylinders and lines. Place position control
lever in middle of its travel slot. Measuring from the
lever knob, move control lever 0.016-0.024 inch (4.0-
6.0 mm) in one direction. There must be hitch move-
ment. Move control lever 0.35-0.43 inch (9.0-11.0 mm)
in opposite direction. Again, there must be hitch
movement. If hitch response does not fall within these
specifications, adjust the valve compensation poten-
tiometer on the control module. Adjusting potenti-
ometer screw (Fig. 181) clockwise will increase
control lever to hitch response. Adjusting the screw
counterclockwise will decrease hdtch response or
movement if hitch is overactive or unstable. Remove
weight from hitch.
Fig. 161—View showing location of control module po-
tentiometer adjusting screw used in adjusting valve
compensation

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140
220. HITCH FREE TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT.
Tum keyswitch and start engine. Slowly move hitch
control lever to the full raise position. Hitch cylinders
must not be fully extended against the intemal stop.
Hitch valve solenoid must not be energized when
hitch isftiUyraised. Manually lift outer ends of hitch
lower lift arms. There must be approximately 1.0 inch
(25.4 mm) of free travel as measured from the lift arm
ball to the ground. If there is more than 1.0 inch (25.4
mm) of free travel, move link rod ball joint upward in
rockshaft lever bracket slot. See Fig. 182. Tighten ball
joint retaining nut when adjustment is completed.
HITCH CONTROL VALVE
All Models
221. R&R AND OVERHAUL. If necessary, move
left rear wheel and tire out for access to hitch valve.
Refer to Fig. 183 and disconnect the following lines
from the hitch valve: Tube to lube manifold, tube to
pto valve, tube to priority valve, tube to rear frame
cover and tube to compensator valve. Disconnect
valve solenoid wiring connector. Unbolt and remove
valve assembly. Plug or cap line openings. Remove
tube fittings from valve. Refer to Fig. 184 and remove
sensing check body (29), then remove plug (32), sens-
ing spring (31) and check ball (30) from sensing check
body. Remove lockout plug and body assembly (21
through 26). Separate plug (21), spring (23), poppet
HITCH VALVE
TO REAR FRAME
PRIORITY VALVE-
Fig. 163—View showing hydraulic lines to be disconnected from hitch control valve.
www.classicmachinery.net
Paragraphs 220-221
(24) and "O" rings (22 and 26) from body. Remove
lockout spool (27) from valve body (15). Unscrew and
remove solenoid switch assembly (6) with "O" ring (7).
Remove locknut (1), adjusting screw (2) with "O" ring
(3), spring (4) and washer (5) from solenoid. Remove
pilot spool (8) and spring (9) from solenoid mounting
body (11). Unbolt and remove solenoid mounting body
from valve body. Remove plug (18) with "O" ring (19)
and pivot plug (16) with "O" ring (17). Remove pivot
lever (13) and spring (20). Remove end cap (40) with
"O" ring (39), then withdraw control spool assembly
(33 through 38). Using vise grip pliers, hold control
spool (33) on the nonmachined surface and remove
spring bolt (38), spring seats (34 and 37), spacer (36)
and spring (35).
Fig, 162—To reduce amount of hitch free travel, move
link rod ball joint upward in rockshaft iever bracket
Blot
LUBE MANiFOLD
PTO VALVE
COMPENSATOR VALVE
127
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 222 CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or
other damage. Inspect all spools and bores for nicks,
burrs or scoring. Minor nicks and burrs can be re-
moved with fine emery cloth.
When reassembling, renew all "O" rings and lubri-
cate "O" rings with petroleum jelly. Reassemble by
reversing disassembly procedure. When installing
spring bolt (38), apply Loctite 242 to the threads and
tighten spring bolt to a torque of 60-95 in.-lbs. (7-11
N.m). Tighten solenoid mounting body bolts (10) to a
torque of 50-70 in.-lbs. (5-8 N.m). Tighten sensing
check body (29) to a torque of 95-120 in.-lbs. (11-14
N.m). Using all new "O" rings, reinstall tube fittings
in valve body.
Using a new "O" ring, install control valve on range
transmissions housing. The balance of installation is
the reverse of removal procedure.
NOTE: The hitch control valve must be centered
as outlined in paragraph 218 after valve overhaul.
HYDRAULIC LIFT HOUSING
All Models
222. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the lift
housing, first drain and remove main fuel tank as
follows: Unholt and remove tail light panel from hack
of cah. Disconnect wiring, fuel supply and breather
hoses from fuel level sensor. Remove fuel inlet hose,
then loosen screws and remove fiiel inlet tuhe from
tank. Unbolt and remove rear handle from cab. Shut
off fuel valve and disconnect engine fuel supply hose

'V ,*.' > I

Fig. 184—Exploded view of typical electronic hitch control valve.

1. Locknut
2. Adjusting screw 10. Bolt (2) 17. "O'ring 25. Lockout body 33. Control spool
3. "O"ring 11. Solenoid mounting 18. Plug 26. "Oaring 34. Spring seat
body 19. "O"ring 27. Lockout spool 35. Spring
4. Spring
12. "Oaring 20. Spring 28. "O"ring 36. Spacer
5. Washer 37. Spring seat
6. Solenoid 13. Pivot lever 21. Plug 29. Sensing check body
14. "O" rings 22. "O"ring 30. Check ball 38. Springbok
7. "O'ring 39. "O"ring
8. Pilot spool 15. Valve body 23. Spring 31. Sensing spring
9. Spring 16. Pivot plug 24. Poppet 32. Plug 40. End cap

128
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 222 (Cont.)

from valve. Unholt tank support, then using a sling
and hoist, remove tank assembly.
Remove the LH remote lines, hitch control cylinder
lines, hitch lift cylinder lines and transmission dip-
stick. Disconnect the differential lock return line,
hitch control cylinder lube line, hitch lift cylinder
drain lines, pto lines and seat drain line, if so
equipped.
Refer to Fig. 185, then unbolt and remove bracket
(9), cover (10), potentiometer shaft (11) and link arm
(12). Remove bolt (15), lever bracket (14) with link rod
(13) and washer (16). Disconnect lift links from lift
arms (20) and lower lift links to floor. Unpin and
remove external lift cylinders). Remove the lift arms
(20). Install a lift eye in hitch control cylinder port in
top of housing (5). Remove the 16 bolts (8). Attach a
hoist with lift chain and sling, then lift off hydraulic
lift housing assembly.

NOTE: Housing is mounted on two dowel pins

and must be lifted straight up to prevent binding on
dowefs. ;. !

For ease of handling, it is recommended that hous-

ing be mounted on an engine stand. Remove cylinder
lube tube (21). Drive out roll pin (22) and remove Fig. 185—Expioded view of hitch lift housing and rela-
tive parts. Lift arms are timed to rockshaft. Refer to
piston rod (25). Loosen lockscrew (23) and remove Fig. 186.
rockshaft (32) out right side of housing. Remove oil 1. Gasket
seals (2 and 31) and bushings (3 and 30) if necessary 2. Oil seal, left 20. Lift arm, right
Remove bolts (4 and 6) and remove control cylinder 3. Bushing, left 21. Cylinder lube tube
4. Bolt (2) 22. Roll pin
assembly. Remove piston (26) with back-up ring (27) 5. Housing 23. Lockscrew
and "O" ring (28). Remove cushion relief valve (35). 6. Bolt (2) 24. Bellcrank
Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing 7. Lube tube 25. Connecting rod
excessive wear or other damage. Install relief valve 8. Bolt (16) 26. Piston
9. Bracket 27. Back-up ring
on the ram and pump CAS 10132 and check pressure 10. Potentiometer cover 28. "O'ring
setting. Pressure setting must be 2750-2850 psi 11. Potentiometer shaft 29. Cylinder housing
(18960-19650 kPa). If not, renew cushion relief valve. 12. Link arm 30. Bushing, right
13. Link rod 31. Oil seal, right
14. Lever bracket 32. Rockshaft
Renew all "O" rings, back-up ring, gasket and oil 15. Bolt 33. Seal ring
seals and reassemble by reversing disassembly pro- 16. Washer 34. "O" ring
cedure keeping the following points in mind. Install 17. Roll pin 35. Relief valve
new rockshaft bushings (3 and 30) into housing (5) 18. Lift cylinder pin 36. "O"ring
19. Pin 37. Plug
until flush with counterbore and with split of bushing
to the top. Tighten cushion relief valve (35) to a torque
of 25 ft.-lbs. (35 N.m). Use new seal (33) with chamfer
toward housing (5) and install cylinder assembly.
Make certain cylinder is tight against machined pad
on housing, then tighten bolts (4 and 6) securely^.
Lubricate rockshaft oil seals (2 and 31) with petro-
leum jelly and install over rockshaft ends. Carefully
install seals until flush with the cover bores. Install
lift arms so that timing arrows (Fig. 186) are aligned
as shown. Arrow on arms must align with arrow on
rockshaft next to the **XX" on the shaft.
Reinstall lift housing assembly by reversing the
removal procedure. Adjust hitch position potentiome- Fig. 186—View showing lift arm to rockshaft timing
ter, if necessary, as outlined in paragraph 217. marks. Refer to text.

129

Paragraphs 223-225
HITCH LIFT CYLINDERS (EXTERNAL)
AIIIModels
223. R&R AND OVERHAUL. With hitch fully
lowered, disconnect hydraulic pressure line and leak
offline. Remove upper and lower cylinder pivot pins
£ind remove cylinder.
To disassemble cylinder, remove elbow fitting from
cyhnder tube. Extend cylinder rod (10—Fig. 187)
until retaining ring (5) on end of cylinder rod is visible
through hydraulic fitting port in cylinder tube. Work-
ing through the port, use a small screwdriver or
similar tool to unseat retaining ring (5)fi:'omshallow
groove into deep groove in cylinder rod (10). With-
draw cylinder rod from cylinder, then remove seals
fi-om cylinder tube.
Bushings (2 and 4) in cylinder rod and cylinder tube
are renewable. Install back-up ring (6), seal ring (7)
and "O" ring (8) in that order in groove in cylinder
tube. Install rod seal (9) and wiper seal (11) in top of
cylinder tube. See Fig. 188. Lubricate seals with
Fig. 187—Exploded view of hitch lift assist (external)
cylinder. Models 7110 and 7120 are equipped with one
lift assist cylinder and Models 7130 and 7140 are
equipped with two lift assist cylinders.
1. Cylinder tube 5. Retaining ring
2. Bushing (2) 6. Back-up ring 9. Rod seal
3. Lube fittings 7. Seal ring 10. Cylinder rod
4. Bushing(2) 8. "Oaring 11. Wiper seal
130
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
petroleum jelly, then install cylinder rod with retain-
ing ring in deepest groove in rod. Work retaining ring
into shallow groove using a screwdriver through hy-
draulic fitting port in cylinder tube.
Install cylinder by reversing removal procedure.
Lube fittings (3) must be toward the rear. Repeat
operation for opposite lift assist cylinder as necessary,
if so equipped.
REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
All Models
224. OPERATION. All tractors may be equipped
with 1, 2, 3 or 4 remote valves. Remote valves are
located on right side of tractor and are mounted on
outside of steering priority valve. First remote valve
has priority of fiuid fiow. Flow will then be supplied
to the 2nd 3rd and 4th remote circuits and to hitch
control valve. Remote valves are controlled by levers
on console. Each remote valve has a variable fiow
control. Flow control levers are located directly be-
hind remote control levers. Each remote valve is
equipped with a single load check valve. Load check
valve will hold implement in hydraulically locked
position with no leakdown. To operate remote circuit
in float control, move fioat lockout from fi-ont of lever
slot in console. This will allow control lever to be
moved fully forward in slot for fioat position. Each
remote valve is connected to a remote coupler at rear
of tractor.
225. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Loosen set screws
and disconnect fiow control cables. Loosen jam nut on
remote control cable, then unbolt fiange from valve.
Turn the sleeve on cable until connecting pin can be
Fig. 188—View showing correct instailation of seals in
lift assist cylinder. Refer to Fig. 187 for legend.
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 225 (Cont.)

removed. Disconnect hydraulic hoses and tubes. Un-

bolt and remove end cover, then remove remote
valves.
Disassembly procedure is the same for all remote
valves. Refer to Fig. 189 or 190 and proceed as follows:
Remove flow control gland nut and adjusting rod
assembly (65 through 73). Pull adjusting rod (72)
from gland nut (66). Remove seal ring (65) and "O"
ring (67) from nut and remove back-up ring (68), "O"
ring (69), thrust races (70) and thrust bearing (71)
from adjusting rod (72). Roll pin (73) can be removed
if damaged. Remove flow control sleeve (78) from
valve body. Remove flow control spool (77) from
sleeve.

NOTE: Sleeve (78) for first remote valve has two

rows of holes for oil control. On 2nd, 3rd and 4th
remote valves, sleeve has one row of holes. Fiow
control spool (77) for first remote valve has a center
land. Spool for 2nd, 3rd and 4th remote valves does
not have the center land.

Remove snap ring (74) and plug (75) with "O" ring
(76) from sleeve. Removeflowcontrol spring (79) from
valve body. Loosen locknut (48) and remove adjusting
screw (47). Remove locknut and "O" ring (46) from
adjusting screw. Remove poppet assembly from de-
Fig. 189—Exploded view of typical first remote valve
used on all models.
1. Control spool 41. Washer
2. Dust seal 42. Poppet spring
3. "O"ring 43. Washer
4. Remote valve body 44. "Oaring
5. "O"ring 45. Back-up ring
6. Plug 46. "O"ring
7. Load check piston 47. Adjusting screw
8. Washer 48. Locknut
9. Retaining ring 49. "O"ring
10. "O"ring 50. Retainer
11. Back-up rings 51. Upper cup
12. "Oaring 52. Detent centering spring
13. "O"ring 53. Lower cup
14. Check valve body 54. "O" ring
15. "O"ring 55. Detent stud
16. Load check spool 56. Back-up ring
17. Poppet 57. "0^'ring
18. Load check spool spring 58. Body
19. Retainer plug 59. "Oaring
21. Load check spring 60. Back-up ring
22. "O'ring 61. Check ball
23. Plug 62. Check valve spring
24. Washer (top) 63. "O"ring
25. Detent ball (8) 64. Plug
26. Washer (bottom) 65. Seal ring
27. Back-up ring 66. Gland nut
28. "O"ring 67. "O"ring
29. Piston 68. Back-up ring
30. "O"ring 69. "O"ring
31. Back-up ring 70. Thrust races
32. Detent spring 71. Thrust bearing
33. Retainer 72. Adjusting rod
34. Plug 73. Roll pin
35. Snap ring 74. Snap ring
. "O"ring 75. Plug
37. Orifice washer 76. "O" ring Flg. 190—Exploded view of typicai second, third or
38. "Oaring 77. Flow control spool fourth remote vaive used on all models so equipped.
39. Detent housing 78. Sleeve Remote valve is identical to first remote valve shown in
40. Poppet 79. Flow control spring Fig. 189 except for Items 77 and 78.

131

Paragraphs 226-227
tent housing (39). Separate back-up ring (45), "O" ring
(44), washer (43), spring (42) and washer (41) from
poppet (40). Remove load check plug (23) with "O"
ring (22), load check spring (21) and load check spool
assembly. Unscrew retainer plug (19) and remove
load check spool spring (18) and poppet (17) from load
check spool (16). Remove load check valve body (14)
with piston assembly. Remove "O" rings (10, 12 and
13) and back-up rings (11) from check valve body and
retaining ring (9) and washer (8) from piston (7).
Place valve body (4) in a press and push detent
retainer (33) down, remove snap ring (35) and release
pressure. Remove retainer (33) and detent spring
(32). Unbolt and remove detent housing (39), then
remove "O" rings (36 and 38) and orifice washer (37)
from detent housing. Remove detent piston (29),
washers (24 and 26) and eight balls (25). Remove "O"
rings (28 and 30) and back-up rings (27 and 31) from
piston. Remove detent stud (55), "O" ring (54), spring
cups (51 and 53), detent centering spring (52), re-
tainer (50) and "O" ring (49). Remove control spool (1),
dust seal (2) and "O" ring (3) from valve bocfy.
Remove check valve plug (64) v^th "O" ring (63),
check valve spring (62) and check ball (61), then
unscrew and remove check valve body (58). Remove
"O" rings (57 and 59) and back-up rings (56 and 60)
from check valve bo<fy. Remove plug (6) and "O" ring
(5) from remote valve body.
Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing
excessive wear or other damage. Check remote valve
springs against the following specifications: Check
valve spring (62) should have a free length of 0.455
inch (11.56 mm) and should test 0.09-0.11 lbs. (0.40-
0.48 N) when compressed to a length of 0.4 inch (10.16
mm). Detent centering spring (52) should have a free
length of 2.36 inches (60.05 mm) and should test
20.68-25.40 lbs. (92-113 N) when compressed to a
length of 1.25 inches (31.75 mm). Detent spring (32)
should have a free length of 1.27 inches (32.16 mm)
and should test 71.94-88.13 lbs. (320-392 N) when
compressed to a length of 0.826 inch (20.98 mm).
Check valve spool spring (18) should have a free
length of 1.23 inches (31.22 mm) and should test
9.0-11.0 lbs. (40-49 N) when compressed to a length
of 0.93 inch (23.52 mm). Load check spring(21) should
have a free length of 3.27 inches (83 mm) and should
test 3.15-3.82 lbs. (14-17 N) when compressed to a
length of 1.21 inches (30.78 mm). Poppet spring (42)
should have a free length of 1.14 inches (28.93 mm)
and should test 17.1-20.9 lbs. (76-93 N) when com-
pressed to a length of 0.79 inch (20.18 mm). Flow
control spring (79) should have a free length of 2.48
inches (63.09 mm) and should test 26.98-33.05 lbs.
(120-147 N) when compressed to a length of 2.02
inches (51.23 mm). Renew any spring which fails to
meet the specifications.
132
www.classicmachinery.net
CASE/INTERNATIONAL
Using all new "O" rings, back-up rings and seals,
reassemble remote valve by reversing disassembly
procedure, keeping the following points in mind.
Tighten plug (6—Fig. 189 or 190) to a torque of 5-6
ft.-lbs. (6-8 N.m). Tighten plug (64) to a torque of
12-14 ft.-lbs. (16-19 N.m). When installing spring
cups (51 and 53), shallow cup (51) goes on the top and
deep cup (53) goes on the bottom. Tighten detent stud
(55) to a torque of 9-12 ft.-lbs. (12-16 N.m). Install
orifice washer (37) with small end to the top. Tighten
detent housing bolts to a torque of 45-60 in.-lbs. (5-7
N.m). Apply Loctite 242 to threads of retainer plug
(19) and tighten to a torque of 3-4 ft.-lbs. (4-5 N.m).
Tighten load check body (14) to a torque of 25-30
ft.-lbs. (34-41 N.m). Tighten load check plug (23) to a
torque of 25-30 ft.-lbs. (34-41 N.m). When installing
thrust races (70), install the thickest race first.
Tighten gland nut (66) to a torque of 30-35 ft.-lbs.
(41-47 N.m).
Using all new "O" rings, reinstall remote valves by
reversing the removal procedure. Tighten end cover
nuts to a torque of 93-112 ft.-lbs. (125-150 N.m).
Adjust valve linkage as outlined in paragraph 226
and detent release pressure as in paragraph 227.
226. VALVE LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT, To ad-
just the remote valve linkage, move control levers to
neutral position. Install lock pin through slots in
levers. See Fig. 191. Loosen locknut at top of control
cable sleeve. Loosen mounting bolts for sleeve fiange
until sleeve is free to turn. Turn sleeve counterclock-
wise until it no longer contacts the valve surface. Turn
sleeve clockwise until sleeve just contacts valve sur-
face, then turn sleeve V4 turn more. Tighten fiange
mounting bolts. Tighten locknut against the sleeve.
Remove neutral lock pin and check all four detented
valve spool positions. If adjustment is not correct,
disconnect linkage from valve spool and check neutral
position of valve spool. Top of spool must be IV4 inch
(32) mm) above valve face. If spool height is not
correct, remove and disassemble valve and check for
improper assembly. If spool height is correct, repeat
linkage adjustment.
To adjust the flow control linkage, loosen the
locknut on lower end of flow control cable. Push flow
control lever fully to the right side position. Make
sure the set screw is tight against the flat side of flow
adjusting rod. Turn flow adjusting rod fully counter-
clockwise. Hold bottom end of cable from turning and
tighten locknut against the cable.
227. VALVE DETENT RELEASE PRESSURE.
To check and adjust detent release pressure, connect
flowmeter inlet and outlet hoses to the No. 1 remote
coupler. Move flow control to the maximum position.
Start tractor and operate at 2200 rpm. Move No. 1
remote lever to the lower position. Turn load valve on
flowmeter until there is a reading of 2250-2300 psi
 www.classicmachinery.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Paragraph 228

(15513-15858 kPa). The remote valve lever must
Mckout to neutral position at this pressure. If not,
oosen locknut (48—Figs. 189 or 190) and turn detent
[justing screw (47) clockwise to increase pressure or
counterclockwise to decrease pressure. When detent
release pressure is correct, tighten locknut. Repeat
operation for other remote valves.
CAB
All models are equipped with a Silent Gardian II
cab, heater and air conditioning.
Disconnect cab to chassis ground cable. Disconnect
hitch wiring harness, transmission harness and en-
gine harness from cab platform. Identify and discon-
nect brake tubes at brake valve. Remove nut and
washer from left and right front cab mount bolts. Prop
up hood and remove left hood cylinder. Loosen air
conditioner compressor and remove drive belt. Unbolt
condenser and compressor and carefully lay them in
the cab. Remove cab roof cap bolts, disconnect light
wiring and remove roof cap. Install a chain down
inside of all four corner channels and hook to bottom
of channels. Connect chains to cab removal lift-

All Models 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Holes

1/4x2 Inch
228. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the Angle Iron
cab assembly, first place transmission shift lever in 1/4x2 Inch
PARK position and block tractor wheels secure^. Angle Iron
Remove battery covers and disconnect battery cables.
Unbolt and remove steps. Disconnect forward-re-
verse linkage and the inching pedal spool linkage,
then remove adjusting sleeves from cables. Raise
hood and remove side panels. Shut off valves and
disconnect heater hoses. Disconnect throttle cable
from injection pump. Disconnect cable from cab 8-1/2 Inch (216 mm)
50 Inch (1270 mm)
power relay on firewall. Identify and disconnect steer-
ing lines from hand pump. Disconnect transmission
control linkage. Remove main fuel tank. Disconnect 2 Inch (51 mm)
remote valve linkage and pto valve linkage. Discon-
Fig. 192—View showing cab removai bracket, which
nect park lock linkage. Remove lower cab covers. can be fabricated using dimensions shown.

CONTROL LEVER

LOCK PIN

LOCK NUT

SLEEVE

FLANGE

Fig. 191—View showing remote control valve linkage adjustment. Refer to text.
133
 www.classicmachinery.net

Paragraph 228 (Cont.) CASE/INTERNATIONAL

bracket. See Fig. 192. Attach a hoist to lift bracket.

Remove nuts and washers from left and right rear cab
mounts. Slowly raise cab and check to see that
wiring, tubes and cables have been disconnected. Lift'
off cab assembly as shown in Fig. 193.

Reinstall cab by reversing removal procedures. In-

stall cab mount washers and nuts and tighten nuts to
a torque of 140-180 ft.-lbs. (190-244 N.m). Remove lift
bracket and install roof cap.

F/g. i93--Cab being removed, using lifting bracicetand

tioist

134